No preview available
 /
     
EDUCATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS AMENDED EDUCATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS For HIGH SCHOOL "III" ADDENDUM I Grades 9 - 12 Student Capacity 2,509 Student Stations 2,642 Core Facilities 2,507 New Construction ~Jj\OOL D/& -J . ~ ~~g~q ~ 9t FOR EXCEL\..~ K- ~Af BEACH caU" Mrs Paulette Burdick, Chairman Mrs. Diane Heinz, Vice Chairman Mr William G Graham Ms. lOOy Gleason Mr Robert Hayes Ms Dorothy B Montgomery Dr Sandra Richmond Dr loan P Kowal Superintendent July 1998 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS AMENDED FACILITY LIST BY AREAS APPENDIX A 1 1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 1 GENERAL CLASSROOMS 10 RESOURCE ROOMS 16 SCIENCE 20 TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION 30 AMENDED FACILITY SPACE SUMMARY Appendix B 47 H. \DATA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.I11 June 1998 Table of Contents APPENDIX A To Be Used For Construction FACILITY LIST BY AREAS High School "III" Grades 9-12 Student Capacity 2,501 Student Stations 2,633 Core Capacity 2,507 No. of Square Feet Student StatioDS Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total GENERAL CLASSROOMS 27 Classroom 810 21,870 30 810 27 Material Storage 70 1,890 1 Teacher Planning 800 TOTAL 24.560 SCIENCE 11 Science Laboratory/Classroom 1,300 14,300 23 249 11 Material Storage 183 2,015 1 Material Storage 400 8 Project Storage/Equip . Maintenance (combined) 150 1,200 1 Computer Laboratory 1,042 1 Teacher Planning 450 TOTAL 19.407 H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.III June 1998 \I Facility Space List GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS Documents to be utilized in facilIty design shall mclude State Requirements for EducatiOnal Facilities (S.R.E.F ), Educational Specifications, the Guidelines for Design Engmeers, and Life Cycle Cost Containment GmdelInes (LCCCG) Additional DeSign Gmdelmes are listed hereafter A. Security - The deSign shall be comnutted to maximum security from unauthorized or illegal entry during school hours and when the school is not m seSSiOn. Internal security preventatives such as limited access, locked storage, proper lIghtmg, etc , shall be considered. The exterior of the building shall not have II natural ladders II , blind corners or areas where security would be difficult. IntruSiOn alarm system shall be provided in accordance with current SBPBC policy and guidelines Appropriate security shall be provided for all computers and other expensive equipment throughout the school. Refer to General Security Considerations An additional consideration would be to plan the layout of the schools to provide the greatest amount of supervision with the least number of admmistrators In other words, avoid as many nooks and crannies as possible so that it is easy to monitor the campus With limited personnel B. Flexibility - Consider flexibility to allow for future program changes and expansions of the school plant. c. Con..m-uction Techni<lJ.les - Consider fast and economical construction consistent with long-range maintenance and flexibility requirements of a permanent school plant. Standardized building components shall be utilized. D Heating. Ventilating and Air-Conditioning rnv AC) - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational FacilIties, (S.R.E.F ), the State of Florida Energy Efficiency Code For Building Construction and the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC Phase II HV AC submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase II design. Phase ill HV AC submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase ill design. Revisions to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC are minor and thus, the revisions will not affect the Phase II conceptual design. Any deviations from the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's engineer H. \DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 General Consideralions E. Plumbing - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S R.E.F) and 'the Plumbing System Design Requirements for the SDPBC Provide electriC water cooler that is easily accessible to each classroom. Phase III Plumbing Submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the Plumbing System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase III design. Any deviations from the Plumbing System Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's engineer F Building Fire Protection - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F ) and the Fire Protection System Design Requirements for the SDPBC Phase ill fIre protection submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the Fire Protection System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase ill design. Any deviations from the Fire Protection System Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's engineer G Windows - Shall allow a high degree of efficiency in heating and cooling. Windows shall have light control treatment such as honzontal or vertical blinds H. Floors - Resilient tile or sheet vinyl except in the following. quarry tile in kitchen, non-slip ceramic tile in shower and locker rooms, ceramic tile in toilet rooms and group toilets shall be provided with floor drains, smooth concrete with colored sealer in custodial closets and storage areas Carpeting is limited to principal's office I. Walls - Toilets, shower and locker rooms, kitchen, dishwash area, dry food storage, garbage can wash and service closets shall have smooth impervious fmish from floor to ceiling The dining area shall have impervious wall fmish up to 9' mmimum. J BJw.f - Roof slope shall conform to the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S R.E.F ) K. Corridors and Student Commons - Corridor Width shall comply with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S R.E.F ) and drinking fountains, except those for the disabled, shall be recessed in walls Door stops and holders shall be overhead or wall-mounted. H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lII June 1998 2 General Considerations L. Sound Treatment - Acoustically-treated walls and ceIlings shall be provided as necessary for the intended use of the space M. Hot Water - Hot water shall be prOVided m admmlstratlve suite, cafeterIa, shower rooms, art rooms, home economics SUIte, SCience preparatIOn rooms, climc, media, auditorium dressing rooms, and custodIal faclhtles N Lighting - All interior hghting shall be electronic type WIth T -8 lamps and electronic ballast. Classroom lighting shall be controlled with alternate switching of light fIxtures. Special lighting shall be provided for areas such as Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) production room, art lab, stage, auditorium, gymnasium. Exterior lighting shall be high intensity discharge type and shall be mounted so that minimum shadows are cast on buildings Exterior lighting (parking lot, walkway and security) shall be circuited individually and shall be controlled by Section 15900 Electronic Management and Control system. Lighting system shall meet the requirements of "Electrical Design Requirements" for the SDPBC o Electrical - Electrical systems shall be 277/480-volts, 3 phase, 4 wire Step down, dry-type transformers shall be located inside electrical rooms which shall be properly ventilated. Drawings shall include complete load summary for the main distribution system and shall indicate NEC demand factors Riser diagrams or one line riser diagrams shall include feeder size, voltage drop, available short circuit, etc Electrical outlets, disconnect switches and wIring shall be provided for all equipment furnished by contractor or the SDPBC Floor outlets may be utilized for special equipment or usage but shall not be utilized in classrooms Lockable, weatherproof, 120-volt GFCI outlets shall be located every ISO' lineal of exterior wall. Power distribution system and all other electrical requirements shall be m accordance with "Electrical Design Requirements" for the SDPBC. P. Student Toilets - Soap dispensers shall be powder type. Paper towel dispensers and toilet paper dispensers shall be continuous-roll type except for handicapped restrooms A mirror and a shelf for books shall be provided in each toilet room. Sanitary napkin dispensers and disposers shall be located in girls' toilet rooms Q. Entrances - Sand traps of suitable size and mesh shall be located at entrances from the outside Ramps shall be prOVIded where required for the disabled. Panes of break-resistant materials are preferred to large areas of glass R. Lockers - Individual lockers of not less than two cubic feet capacity shall be provided for middle and high school students Lockers shall be located in air- conditioned corndors H. \OA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EOSPECS\HS\AMENOEO.lIl June 1998 3 General Considerations S. Clock and Bell System - Battery clocks shall be utilized throughout the facility and provided by the SDPBC Bell system shall have automatic and manual operation. Class change bell system shall be a tone generator through intercom system. T Intercommunications System - There shall be a two-way intercom between the administrative suite and all teacher stations, work areas, gymnasium and cafeteria The central control for the intercom system shall have input capacity from phonograph, tape recorder and radio In addition, provisions and equipment of VHF Communications on campus shall be included. Principal to have access to intercommunication system. Connect intercom system to building emergency power U Television Receivers - Instructional areas and other designated areas will be equipped with TV receivers on mobile stands V Television Cable - Coaxial cable shall be installed in all classrooms and Media center, with internal closed~ircuit capabilities in designated areas, to comply with ITV specifications Provide one !TV antenna connection with electrical outlet for ITV Provide central antenna to receive the SDPBC ITV signal. Principal to have ITV broadcast capability, RF in and RF out. w. Colors - Harmonizing colors shall be used to enhance the design of the plant. The architect shall submit colors for review and approval by the SDPBC Superintendent or his/her designee x. Display - A built-in display case shall be located in the entrance foyer Three built-in display cases shall be located in the student common area to serve the following purposes. special occasions, class projects and departmental projects Additional display shelving shall be located in the main administrative office and media center y Telephones - Provide a complete telephone conduit system including backboards and cabinets in accordance with SBPBC policy and guidelines All telephone and cable equipment shall be installed by the SDPBC telephone department. In the Middle School Administration Building, provide a main telephone room location, minimum 120 sq ft., to house the main PBX Equipment and the utility company service entrance equipment. This location shall follow the current SBPBC policies and guidelines In the High School, provide a main telephone room location, minimum 192 sq ft z. Teacher Work Areas - Work areas for teachers are specIfied in the program. Toilets for teachers shall be located near these work areas H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.III June 1998 4 General Considerations AA. Safety - Provide safety devices in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S RE.F) Exits, exit. lights , panic hardware, etc , shall be provided according to the S RE.F Fire extinguishers and automatic extinguishing systems shall be provided in accordance with S REF and current SBPBC policy and guIdelines Extinguishers shall not be mounted on the exterior of buIldings AB. Site Fire Protection - Provide fire hydrants as recommended by the appropnate local fire protection agency Fire alarm system shall be provided in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.RE F ) and current SBPBC policies and guidelines See Electrical Design Requirements and LCCCG An emergency entry key safe shall be mounted on the exterior of the buIlding near the fire alarm annunciator panel. AC. Automobile Parking - Parking shall be provided in accordance WIth traffic control section. Visitor parking shall be provided near the entrance to the administrative suite. Parking shall be illuminated for night use AD Storage - Departmental, custodial and administrative storage shall be provided as specified. Central textbook storage shall be provided in a location specified elsewhere AE. Water Outlets - Provide hose bibb with control key operator in each student group toilet. Provide hose bibb with control key operator at a maximum mterval of 150' of exterior wall AF Potable Water - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC. Provide dual backflow preventers and size each backflow preventer for 100% of the demand flow Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's designated civil engineer AG Pavement. Site Improvements - Provide all pavement typical sections, access routings, sidewalks, traffic and pedestrian controls, signing and pavement markings layout, sports facilities, as identified elsewhere in this section, and other site improvements as set forth in the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC. Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's deSIgnated civIl engmeer H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.IlI June 1998 5 General Considerations AH. Sanitary Sewer - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, In advance and In writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's designated civil engineer AI. Storm Water Drainage - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's designated civil engineer AJ Irrigation Water - Provide irrigation water system from a wet retention area or well Where necessary, provide a rust inhibitor system to prevent staining of buildings and sidewalls AK. Structural - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Structural Design Requirements for the SDPBC Any deviations from the Structural Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's structural engineer AL. Bulletin Boards - In addition to any bulletin boards specified in departmental specifications, there shall be located in the corridors and/or student common area the following. (a) for general administrative, provide eight lineal feet; (b) for student activities, eight lineal feet; (c) for general faculty, eight lineal feet; (d) for interscholastic activities, eight lineal feet; (e) for music, eight lineal feet; (t) for interdepartmental use, eight lineal feet. Bulletin (tack) boards shall not be less than 36nverticalm~urement. AM. Ceiling Heights - Ceiling height in all spaces shall conform to the State Requirements for Educational Facilities, (S.R.E.F) AN Service Access for Mechanical Equipment - Mechanical equipment rooms shall be designed to provide service access to the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the HV AC System Design Requirements for theSDPBC AO Disabled Accessibility - All spaces to comply with federal/state regulations H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.I1I June 1998 6 General Considerations AP Crowd Control - The design shall reflect good crowd control. Consideration shall be given to large groups that enter and leave the site at times of public and school events AQ Energy Conservation - The building and its systems shall be designed in accordance with the State of Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Buildmg ConstructIon. Dunng Phase II, an economic analysis shall be performed for the following energy conservation measures HV AC Thermal storage (ice) system to reduce electrIc demand dunng "on peak" periods Domestic Hot Water- De-superheaters for air-cooled chillers and heat recovery condensers for water-cooled chillers to preheat supply water for food service and gymnasium domestic hot water systems AR. Community School - The general plan and campus design shall be arranged to permit and facilitate use of all appropriate school facilities by community agencies when these spaces are not in use for the regular school program. Community school considerations include ready access from parking lots to all athletic and recreational facilities, meeting rooms, music facilities, media center, cafeteria and community school coordinator's office. Restroom facilities shall be made available without entrance into main buildings AS. Exterior Building Materials - Major exterior building materials shall be fully documented in the design phase of project development for review and approval by the SDPBC Superintendent or his/her designee. Exterior materials and coatings shall be graffiti resistant and easily cleaned to the maximum extent practical. AT Instructional Technology for Data, Voice and Video - Provide conduits, wiring, data outlets and receptacles for computer network requirements ProvIde spaces and special air-conditioning for computer-related electronics. Refer to current SBPBC policy on computer systems AU School Site and PI~fields - Carefully design site development for proper drainage, vehicle and pedestrian circulation. Provide useful and safe outdoor play areas and fields Refer also to SITE DEVELOPMENT. A V Working Heights - Built-in equipment and furnishings shall be constructed and/or provided to accommodate the appropriate student grade levels. These figures were taken from ~ ~ Standards, a Handbook of Architectural Design, Fourth Edition, John Hancock Callender, Editor-in-Chief H.\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 7 General Considerations Working Heights in Inches for Elementary and Secondary School Children Elementary Secondary Item Kindergarten Grades 1-3 Grades 4-S Grades 1i-12 Cabinet, display (bottom) 26 29 34 39 Marker Board (bottom & chalkrail) 22 25 29 34 Counter, classroom work (standin~) 24 26 30 36 Hook, coat (student) 36 41 48 55 Lavatorv and sink: 24 26 30 36 Mirror, lower ed~e (Max.) 35 38 43 52 Pencil sharpener 27 31 36 42 Shelf, hat and books 41 46 53 60 Soap dispenser 27 31 36 42 Tack board (bottom) 22 25 29 34 Towel disvenser 27 31 36 42 Water Closet (seat) 15 15 15 15 A W Ventilation - Ventilation shall be designed in accordance WIth the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditionmg Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 62 and the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC AX. Program Furniture and Equipment - Program furmture and equipment list, in all sections herein, is to be utilized as a design guide for determining space requirements. It is not intended to be used as an ordering guide Existing furniture and equipment shall be utilized. AY Natural Gas - Natural gas shall be used for cooking (food service) and for domestic water heating (food service and gymnasium) Where Natural Ga~ is not available, Propane shall be used For small demand domestic water heating systems, electric water heaters shall be used. AZ. Design Notebooks - Design notebooks shall be prOVIded in accordance with the Design Requirements for Mechanical (HV AC, Plumbing and Fire ProtectIOn), electrical, civil and structural systems. The Table of Contents for each Phase III design notebook shall be signed and sealed by the consultant. H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 8 General Considerations BA. Communications Room Every facility shall have one Communication Equipment Room (CER) and several Communication Closet Rooms (CCR) CER shall house the servers for the instructional technology system and be the origmation point for the system's fiber in the faclhty CCR shall be provided m every buildmg and shall be used for distribution of data to the data outlets throughout building CER and CCR shall not serve as a storage or custodial room. BB. Electrical Design - Electrical design, mcludmg hghtmg, power and systems shall meet "Electrical Design Requirements" All eqUipment, devices and wiring shall meet the requirements of the SDPBC and LCCCG Any deviations from the Electrical System Design ReqUirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's electrical engineer BC. Not In Contract, In Contract Furniture and equipment that is built-in is in contract, what is portable is not in contract. H. \DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lIl June 1998 9 General Considerations GENERAL CLASSROOMS I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY The high school program IS organized around, and focused on, personal and societal goals that help students become effective participants in the SOCIal world II. PROGRAM GOALS The high school program goals center around the preparation of students for more reflective and effective partiCIpation in their society The program goals would Include the following A. Socialization - aimed at helping the student become an effective member of social groups B. Decision-making Processes - aimed at helping students to make effective use of intellectual skills n reaching decisions about hislher social concerns C. Citizenship - aimed at helping the students to use more effectively the processes of a representative-democratic government. D Knowledge Acquisition - aimed at helping the student to acquire and utilize information and intellectual skills provided through the curriculum. In addition, the program will stress the assimilation of three important components. subject, learner and society III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Curriculum 1 2. 3 4 5 Government Comparative Political Systems Economics Law Studies Psychology 6 Sociology 7 Anthropology 8 History 9 Advanced Placement Courses B Teacher Activities 1 Confer with individual students. 2 Consult with small groups on activities, discussions or projects 3 Lead large or small discussion groups 4 Plan bulletIn boards and interest centers 5 Make recommendatIOns as to selection of matenals and equipment. 6 Plan WIth team of teachers for class and Inter-level group activities H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.III June 1998 10 General Classrooms 7 Assist with assembly programs 8 Sponsor enrichment programs 9 Provide demonstrations 10 Help to plan and lead field trips 11 Lecture 12 InterView resource people 13 Provide techniques for teacher and student evaluation of learning 14 Conduct teacher, parent, and pupil conferences 15 Utilize computer lab activities C Student Activities 1 Think - Creative and critical thinking, problem solvmg, associations 2 Listen - Tapes, lectures, records, speeches, discussions, radiO, TV, movies, guests, classmates 3 Speak - Speeches, explanations, dramatizations, demonstrations, simulations, class and panel discussions 4 Read - Textbooks, reference books, reports, magazines, newspapers, fiction, trade books 5 Write - Creative writing, reports, research papers, outlines, summaries, speeches, comparisons 6 View - Films, filmstrips, slides, pictures, TV, maps, charts, globes, overlays, field trips and other projected materials 7 Inspect - Relief maps, roads maps, globes, artifacts, samples, pictures, charts, graphs 8 Construct - Booklets, displays, posters, scrapbooks, graphs, bulletin boards, maps, charts, diagrams, time lines, pictures, replicas, dioramas, mobiles, murals IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period--B.1.Q. Total No of Teachers --21...- Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-1..:l:.. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.1II June 1998 11 General Classrooms V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A Areas may be used for night class and community school activIties B The architect shall study the shape of typical classrooms to provide for efficient operation and communication, utilizing marker board and wall-mounted illustrations The spaces must also proVIde flexibilIty for large and small group instruction as well as the capability for individualization. Computerized lab actIvities will be incorporated into instructional program. VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) N/A VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total GENERAL CLASSROOMS 27 Classroom 810 21,870 30 810 27 Material Storage 70 1,890 1 Teacher Planning 800 TOTAL 24.560 VIn. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Classroom 1 Chair/desk (30) 2 Teacher desk 3 Teacher chair 4 Chair (6), stackable, 18" 5 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Table, 30" x 72", mica top 7 Teacher podium 8 Stool 9 Maps/globe 10 Computer (8), printer (2) H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lII June 1998 12 General Classrooms B. Teacher Planning 1 Carrel (8), electric, with lockable cabinet that mcludes shelves and tackboard surface 2 Teacher chaIr (8), operator 3 ChaIr (8), stackable, 18" 4 Laser video/dIsc player 5 File cabinet (8), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Computer (8), printer (2) 7 Copy machme with stand 8 Folding table (2), 30" x 72" 9 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/CoolingNentilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS B. Acoustical - Each classroom and the Teacher Planning area must be designed and constructed to prevent voice and noise transmission. Consideration shall be given to the following 1 Partitions from floor-to-ceiling with closure around penetrating ductwork. 2 Partition materials that will arrest chalk tapping and voice sounds 3 Acoustically lined ductwork to prevent classroom to corridor noise transmissions C Floor - Provide resilient tile D ~ - Provide concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. E. Ceiling - Acoustical. F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H. Doors - Sufficient glass for safety in classroom doors and Teacher Planning door Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.1Il June 1998 13 General Classrooms I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures. In Teacher Planning, provide smgle smk with goose neck faucet (CW) J Communications 1 Teacher Planning area shall have a connection for Closed-Circuit TV and a clock. 2 Provide for open-circuit TV reception m each classroom. K. Electrical 1 Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 2 One duplex outlet in center of back wall in classroom. 3 Teacher Planning area shall have 120-volt, duplex outlet (8) 4 Stagger outlets, not back-to-back. L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - Standard. N Fencing - N/ A o Service Drives - N/ A P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work counter a. Classroom shall have one wall with counter and lockable storage cabinets below and above, approximately, 15' b Teacher Planning area shall have a stainless steel sink. in a 10' work counter, Formica top, and cabinets below 2. Built-in cabinets/shelving - Classroom shall have cabinet with adjustable shelving and lockable doors, 3' h x 18" d x 8' 1. 3 Built-in Instructional Aids a. Each classroom shall have: (1) Marker board (2), 8' x 4' (2) Bulletin board (2), 8' x 4' H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 14 General Classrooms (3) Projector screen (4) Map rail continuous around room, except where m conflict wIth windows or cabinetry (5) Bookcase on one wall, 30" h, WIth adjustable shelvmg b Teacher Planning shall have a 8 I X 4 I bulletin board and computer station with shelving R. Other Considerations - N/A H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.llI June 1998 15 General Classrooms RESOURCE ROOMS I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY All students are entitled to receive appropriate educational services designed to achIeve two major objectives (1) the development of skills and competencIes common to all cItIzens, (2) the development of skills and competencies unique to the students' mdivldual potentialities II. PROGRAM GOALS Students will be provided educational programs designed to meet their individual needs. ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES Instruction will be provided in academic, vocational, living skills and enrichment curriculum areas IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.15 Student Capacity Per Period 150 Total No of Teachers---1.(L Grade Levels For Which Program Is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-1.:l:.. V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES N/A VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F ) VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Descriotion of Areas Per Unit I Total RESOURCE ROOMS 10 Resource Room 480 4,800 10 Material Storage 90 -200 TOTAL ~ H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 16 Resource Room VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Resource Room 1 Student desk (16) 2 Teacher desk and chaIr 3 Lectern 4 Stool, 30" 5 Table, 30" x 72" 6 Chair (6) 7 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 8 Computer 6, printer B. Material Storage - Material storage is part of classroom. Storage is free- standing IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/CoolinglVentilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- ATIONS B. Acoustical - Standard. C. Enm: - Provide resilient tile. D. Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. E Ceiling - Acoustical F. Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G. Wmdows - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS and sections in document that locate resource rooms adjacent to specific areas; see R. Other Considerations. H. Doors - Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - N/A J Communications - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS K. Electrical - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS L. Gas and Air - N/A H. \DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED 1lI June 1998 17 Resource Room M. Safety - N/A N Fencing - N/A 0 Service Drives - N/A P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage space a. Resource Room (1) Standard storage cabinet, lockable, 5' w x 18" d x 7' h (2) Counter space with cabinets below, approximately, 12' I x 30" h x 30" w, unless otherwise noted. 2. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Resource Room (1) Marker boards, on two walls, totaling 8' x 24' (2) Tack board, 4' x 4' R. Other Considerations 1 Part of a Resource room, 350 nsf shall be utilized for a Pottery area in Art and has been calculated in the Art section. 2 A Resource room shall be utilized for Computer Enhanced Instruction. See Computer Education. 3 One-half Resource room and Material Storage, 285 nsf shall be utilized for related classroom instruction in the Foreign Language program. 4 One-half Resource room, 285 nsf shall be utilized in Language Arts for Publications 5 One-half Resource room, 285 nsf shall be utilized for Speech/Debate in the Language Arts program. 6 One Resource room for Language Arts, 570 nsf shall be utilized for Reading Laboratory 7 A Resource room shall be utilized in Language Arts for Writmg Resource room. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lll June 1998 18 Resource Room 8 A Resource room shall be utilized as a Simulator room for Drivers Education. 9 One Resource room and Material Storage, 570 nsf shall be utilized for PIano Keyboard in Music 10 Two Resource rooms and Material Storage, 1,140 nsf each shall be utilized as Technical W orkshop/Construction m AudItorium. 11 One-half Resource room and Material Storage shall be utilized in the Business Computer Operations Laboratory for instructiOnal purposes in communication and technology H:\DATA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lll June 1998 19 Resource Room SCIENCE I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Today's society requires scientifically literate and laboratory-skilled high school graduates Therefore, it is imperative that they participate in a dynamic science education program with considerable laboratory opporturuties Such a program will encourage student understandmg of the experimental nature of science, increase the level of students' technIcal skills, and enhance student enthUSIasm. II. PROGRAM GOALS A. Maximize laboratory use and provide a laboratory-centered science experience for all students Laboratory experiences include at least 72 class hours (per year) of student laboratory activities, 40% of which may be pre- and post-laboratory preparation by students. A minimum of 32 laboratory activities must be scheduled. B Provide a cost-effective laboratory program through more efficient utilization of materials and equipment. C To eliminate equipment duplication. ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Courses Offered 1 2 3 4 Earth Science Biology I Biology II Advanced Placement Biology Marine Biology Chemistry I Chemistry II Advanced Placement Chemistry 10 Physical Science 11 Physics I 12. Advance Placement Physics 13 Science Research 14 Anatomy and Physiology 15 Botany 16 Zoology 17 Astronomy 18. Environmental Science 19 Ecology 5 6 7 8 9 The facilities must be adaptable to all these curricula. It is planned that all courses will be taught with an emphasis on investigation. B. Teacher Activities 1 Conduct lecture/class discussion. 2 Demonstrate for single and double classes in lecture room. 3 Demonstrate on marker board and with overhead projector 4 Plan, provide and lead laboratory actiVIties H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lII June 1998 20 Science 5 Use ITV, films, filmstrips, Closed-Circuit TV, etc 6 Teach, test and remediate individuals, small and large groups 7 Prepare students for science faIr competItions 8 Answer individual student questIOns 9 Plan mdividually and departmentally 10 Team two teachers with single and double classes m teaching/lecture room. 11 Use models, charts, whiteboard, in additIon to A V projectors and screens 12 Conduct outdoor instructIonal activities for classes and mdivIdual students C Student Activities 1 Classroom/Laboratory a. Perform activities in small and large groups b Listen to lecture and participate in class discussions c Watch audio-visual and ITV presentations and overhead projections. d. Participate in small group activities with display equipment, such as aquarium models and other apparatus for class projects not requiring laboratory facilities e Maintain animals and plants f Observe specimens under a microscope. g Plan, prepare, demonstrate, and exhibit science fair projects h. Perform activities which involve the use of gas, water, air and electricity I. Utilize counter space to read earth science maps, operate, computers, etc j Study and experiment individually k. Collect and identify rocks, minerals and soil. 1. Perform scientific experiments in groups of two These experiments will apply, prove and/or test basic theories which have been presented in the classroom. m. Use a variety of microscopes This is the only laboratory activity requiring the use of seating H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lll June 1998 21 Science n. Utilize apparatus and equipment m performmg sCIentific experiments requiring electricity, water, aIr, and gas o View ITV, films, and/or filmstnps mdlvldually and m groups p Interface the computer with basic laboratory eqUIpment IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.24 Student Capacity Per Period 249 Total No of Pupils Served Per Day 2.507 Total No of Teachers -1.L Teacher Schedule Teaching --6- Planning -L Period Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-1:l:.... V. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Provide for inter- and intra-departmental Closed-Circuit TV which will allow for the transmission of appropriate lectures, fIlms, and demonstrations to selected classrooms/laboratories. The opportunity for centralizing signal origination shall be available Selective switching of programming to points of signal origination shall include the classroom/laboratories. B Community School utilization in science-related interest areas, e.g , electriCIty, astronomy C Science suite shall have a lockable, equipment maintenance room with hose bibb to allow cleaning and storage of wet equipment after field trips. D All science spaces will be a combination classroom/laboratory Rooms will be set up for- biology (4) chemistry (2), physics (1), and earthlphysica1 science (4) programs VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F.) A. Chemical storage of 400 NSF is necessary to meet the current state safety standards for storage of chemicals and for the preparation of chemicals for laboratory/classroom use. B Project storage shall be combined into one or two spaces called equipment storage H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.III June 1998 22 Science C Five demonstration classrooms at 5,550 nsf and eight laboratones at 9,792 nsf have been combined into 11 classroom/laboratories' at 1,300 nsf each. D 5,550 nsfplus 9,792 nsfequals 15,342 nsf 11 labs at 1,300 nsftotals 14,300 nsf The difference of 15,342 nsf minus 14,300 nsf leaves 1,042 nsf for a computer science laboratory dedicated and located adjacent to the sCience classrooms/- laboratones E Thirteen material storages at 2,015 nsf shall be converted to eleven material storages at 183 nsf each. VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total SCIENCE 5 Demonstration Classroom 1,110 5,550 5 Material Storage 155 775 Subtotal 1,265 6,325 8 Laboratory 1,224 9,792 8 Material Storage 155 1,240 8 Project Storage 150 1.200 Subtotal 1,529 12,232 VARIANCE 11 Laboratory/Demonstration Classroom 1,300 14,300 11 Material Storage 183 2,015 8 Project Storage 150 1,200 1 Chemical Storage 400 1 Teacher Planning 450 1 Computer Laboratory 1.042 TOTAL 19.407 H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.I1I June 1998 23 Science VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Classroom/Laboratory 1 Podium 2 Teacher stool, high-back, adjustable, cushioned 3 Student chair (30), standard, with backs 4 Safety container for disposal of contaminated paper and cloth materials and broken and/or contaminated glass 5 Wastebasket (3) (I-tall, 2-plastic) 6 Computer (8), printer (2) 7 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable B. Material Storage 1 Teacher desk 2 Chair on wheels 3 Computer, printer 4 File cabinet, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable C. Biology Laboratory (4) 1 Monocular microscope (30) 2. Stereoscopic microscope (15) 3 Blanket (4), buckets D. Chemistry Laboratory (2) 1 Fume hood 2 Blanket (4), buckets E. EarthlPhysical Science Laboratory (4) 1 Stream table (portable) 2. Weather station with Barograph, Thermograph, etc. F. Physics Laboratory 1 Standard laboratory equipment G. Chemical Storage 1 Step stool, standard 2. File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 3 Stainless steel laboratory ,cart (5) -- one per two laboratories 4 DIshwasher 5 Refrigerator, explosive-proof, with icemaker for chemicals H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 24 Science 6 Step stool 7 Fireproof steel storage cabinet (3), lockable -- one cabinet each for caustics, aCIds and flammables H. Teacher Planning 1 Standard carrel (8), WIth bookshelf 2 Standard chair, teacher (8) 3 File cabinet (8), in carrel, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Computer (2), printer 5 Bookcase, approximately, 8' w x 6' h xl' d, movable 6 Rectangular table, 30" x 72" 7 Lockable storage area for department chairman I. Computer Science Laboratory Dedicated to Science 1 Computer work station (30) 2 Computer (30) 3 Printer (2) IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/CoolinglVentilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. At the start of Phase IT design, discuss HV AC systems with the Senior Engineer, Department of Architect Services, SDPBC Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 1. Chemistry Laboratory' Provide emergency exhaust system. 2. Material Storage. Provide exhaust system to outside. Provide separate make-up air systems for occupied and unoccupied times 3 Fume Hoods Provide vent to outside 4. Chemical Storage Cabinets Provide vent to outside. B. Acoustical - Standard. C. Eoor - Laboratories to have chemical and damage-resistant surface. Storage area to be chemical-resistant. Chemical storage room to be treated concrete. All laboratory rooms to have floor drains under the shower Resilient tile D. ~ - Construction of chemical storage room shall provide "one-hour" fire rating Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. E Ceiling - Standard H. \DATA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.UI June 1998 25 Science F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Provide window between material storage and classroom/laboratory Black out curtaIns m classroom/laboratories H. Doors - Chemical storage room shall have a one-hour fire rated door All doors must be lockable Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for extenor I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures - Provide (HW) and (CW) at teacher station and m material storage Provide (CW) at student stations Provide towel dispensers in classrooms (1) for teacher and minimum of (2) for students and in material storage Provide master shut-off valve for water Provide (CW) to the deluge shower and eye wash. Based on program furniture and equipment, provide water as required In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) J Communications - Closed-Circuit ITV control located in central storage area. Telephone wiring in teacher planning K. Electrical - 120 - volt electrical service will be provided as specified in "Q..BWJt:. ins." In addition, 208 - volt service will be supplied to each classroom/laboratory by one properly designated outlet. Master shut-offs to all electrical outlets in an area will be provided and located in a secure area near the demonstration tables in classrooms and near the exit doors of other areas, with the exception of the chemical storage room where the master shutoff will be located externally and marked. Heat and smoke detectors connected to central alarm system in chemical storage room. Electrical outlets for phone communications for computer stations are necessary in classrooms Electrical power is needed in central storage for dishwasher and refrigerator Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS L. Gas and Air - Provide gas at teacher station and at student stations For chemistry laboratory, provide compressed air at teacher station and at student stations. Provide master shut-off valves for gas and compressed air Based on program furniture and equipment, provide gas and compressed air as required. M. Safety - Deluge shower, drain and eye bath (double spout wall fountain) One in each classroom and in chemical storage. N Fencing - N/A o Service Drives - Provide nearby access to main storage room for deliveries P Parking - N/A H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMEN OED. III June 1998 26 SCience F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Provide wmdow between material storage and classroom/laboratory Black out curtains m classroom/laboratorIes H. Doors - Chemical storage room shall have a one-hour fire rated door All doors must be lockable Solid core wood for Interior, hollow metal for exterior I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures - Provide (HW) and (CW) at teacher station and In material storage Provide (CW) at student stations Provide towel dispensers m classrooms (1) for teacher and minimum of (2) for students and in materIal storage. Provide master shut-off valve for water Provide (CW) to the deluge shower and eye wash. Based on program furniture and equipment, proVIde water as required. In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) J Communications - Closed-Circuit ITV control located in central storage area. Telephone wiring in teacher planning K. Electrical - 120 - volt electrical service will be provided as specified in "Q .Built:- iDs." In addition, 208 - volt service will be supplied to each classroom/laboratory by one properly designated outlet. Master shut-offs to all electrical outlets in an area will be provided and located in a secure area near the demonstration tables in classrooms and near the exit doors of other areas, with the exception of the chemical storage room where the master shutoff will be located externally and marked. Heat and smoke detectors connected to central alarm system in chemical storage room. Electrical outlets for phone communications for computer stations are necessary in classrooms. Electrical power is needed in central storage for dish- washer and refrigerator Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS L. Gas and Air - Provide gas at teacher station and at student stations For chemistry laboratory, provide compressed air at teacher station and at student stations Provide master shut-off valves for gas and compressed air Based on program furniture and equipment, provide gas and compressed air as required. M. Safety - Deluge shower, drain and eye bath (double spout wall fountain) One in each classroom and in chemical storage. N Fencing - N/ A o Service Drives - Provide nearby access to main storage room for deliverIes P Parking - N/ A H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.I1I June 1998 26 Science 2. Built-in Storage a. All Laboratories/Classrooms (1) Microscope cabinet to house microscope (60), and stereoscopic microscope (15), lockable, except in phYSICS and chemistry laboratories (6) Bookcase with locking, hinged, glass doors and adjustable shelves, approximately, 83" h x 42" w x 16" d. b. Material Storage (Central) - wall cabinets, glass-front doors, lockable, with adjustable shelves on available wall space c. Material Storage - floor-to-ceiling, adjustable shelves, 12" d, on available wall space. d. Chemical Storage (1) 100 lineal feet, 14" d, chemical storage shelving, non- corrosive (2) Full-height, adjustable shelving on available wall space, with lip, non-corrosive 3. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Provisions for Closed-Circuit TV b Wall-mounted A V screens in each teaching station. c. Wall-mounted, stackable, white board/marker board in each teaching station, 12' minimum. d. Bulletin boards, 12' minimum, adjustable chart-mount away from board in each teaching station. Tack board panels on cabinets doors 4. Other Built-ins a. Laboratories/Classrooms - fIre blanket in wall-mounted canister b. All Laboratories/Classrooms and Chemical Storage (I-regular and I-C02 - fire extinguisher H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lIl June 1998 28 Science -~--~-_._-~---------- c. Chemical Storage - ExplosIOn-proof refrigerator with Ice maker S Other Considerations 1 Grease traps, where necessary 2 Chemical storage to have outsIde wall in case of explosIOn. 3 Student activities taking place in the perimeter areas of the laboratory/ classroom. Classroom will require adequate standing height work surface 4 A dispensing area located in the laboratory will be necessary to Issue supplies and equipment. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.I11 June 1998 29 Science TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Technology Education is a comprehensIve actIOn-based educational program concerned with technical means, their evolutIOn, Utlhzation, and significance, WIth industry, its organization, personnel, systems, techmques, resources, and products, and their social/cultural Impact. II. PROGRAM GOALS The program is designed to provide students with an in-depth foundation for career preparation at the secondary or post-secondary levels Students will gain skills leading to consumer awareness and personal enrichment as well as occupational readiness III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. General Activities (applicable to all laboratories) 1 Applying problem solving techniques 2. Applying tools, materials, processes, and technical concepts safely and efficiently 3 Designing and developing. 4 Applying other school subjects. 5 Dealing with forces that influence the future 6 Experimenting in the laboratory 7 Becoming a wiser consumer 8 Making informed career choices B. Specific Activities 1. Drafting/mustrative Design Technology Laboratory a. Operating a computer utilizing a CAD program. b Making computer assisted drawings (CAD) c. Making orthographic, pictorial, auxiliary view, and sectional view drawings d. Making engineering and architectural drawings. 2. Communications Technology Laboratory a Operating a computer utilizing a desktop publishing program. b Producmg prInted copies c Using the screen printmg process. d Usmg continuous tone photography e Using binding and fimshmg processes H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED 1I1 June 1998 30 Technology Education f Using enlargers g Developing prints h. Using video camera equipment. I Usmg vIdeo edItmg eqmpment. J Usmg audiO editmg eqmpment. 3 Production Technology Laboratory a. Performing processmg skills on industrial materIals and composItes b Producing custom products from industrial materials and composites usmg preprocessmg, processing, and postprocessing production technology skills c Planning and participating in a mass production system for manufacturing a product. d. Performing technological processes of separating and forming materIals e. Utilizing modern production technology in the processes of separating, forming, combining, fabrication and finishing of materials (CAM, CNC, Robotics, and Work Cells) f Conducting research and experimentation projects on a production technology system. g Demonstrating technological knowledge and skills in the designing and engineering of constructed works h. Demonstrating technical knowledge and skills in the contracting, estimating, bidding, and scheduling procedures processes 4. Engineering Technology Laboratory a. Demonstrating and applying fluid system principles b Demonstrating and applying thermal system principles c Demonstrating and applying electrical system principles. d. Demonstrating and applying mechanical system principles e. Communicating through oral, written, or graphical means the results of solutions of designs. f Demonstrating graphical literacy and use of graphical representation in analysis and design. g Demonstrating engineering analysis and design methods h. Using tools, machines, calculators, and computers necessary for obtaining solutions to design problems I. Conducting research and experimentation and/or designing a project on engineering technology IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student ratio 1.24 Student capaCIty per period. --2Q.. Total number of teachers ~ Grade levels for which program is mtended. 9-12 Hours per day space Will be used ~ H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED 1Il June 1998 3\ Technology Education V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USE Titles of the laboratories have changed to comply with the revised educational program. VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) A Two of the four laboratories have Resource Rooms of 800 NSF, each. These Resource Rooms are to be shared spaces with the remaining two labs B The total NSF of the laboratories have not changed from the DOE. approved Educational Specifications Many of the related spaces have been deleted, increased or decreased due to the unique technology curriculum requirements VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST Description of Areas SQuare Feet Total TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory 2,280 Material Storage -.m Subtotal 2,675 Communication Technology Laboratory 3,240 Material Storage 395 Project Storage 310 Technology Resource Center ---800 Subtotal 4,745 Production Technology Laboratory 3,240 Material Storage 395 Project Storage 310 Technology Resource Room ---800 Subtotal 4,745 Engineering Technology Laboratory 3,240 Material Storage 395 Project Storage 310 Tool Storage -1lQ Subtotal 4,255 TOTAL 16.420 H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.IU June 1998 32 Technology Education VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory 1 Teacher demonstration table, 96" x 30" x 36", With 1 ~" lammate top, double-door base unit with two adjustable shelves, five-drawer base unit, modesty panel, master keyed cylinder locks and pulls 2 Teacher chair, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" w x 371h" d x 37" h, solid maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow print drawer, with dust cover 4 Parallel straightedge, 48," mobile, with mounting hardware and Instructions 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 6 Filing cabinet, 42" w x 18" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 26~" d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves 9 Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) Table (30), 30" x 48, with built-in wire troughs 10 Student chair (30), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 11 CAD computer (31), ffiM compatible, Pentium II processor, 64 MB RAM, 6GB hard drive, 144MB 31h" internal floppy disk drive, CD-ROM, mouse, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, 17" color monitor, Microsoft Windows (latest version), 101100 3COM Ethernet card, delivery and setup, three-year warranty, 115V, 3 SA. 12 Power-switching system (31), with surge suppression, 115V 13 AutoCAD (31) (latest version), CAD software 14 Autosketch Enhanced software (27), latest verSIOn. 15 White printer, 55" w x 36" d, non-ammonia type, WIth paper storage stand and cabinet, 115V, 9A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.III June 1998 33 Technology Education 16 Laser pnnter, with network card, 16MB RAM, printmg 11 "x 17" paper, 115V,65A 17 Plotter, 36" w x 12" d x 38" h, inkjet, with stand, network card, 16 MB RAM, and plotter cable, must be able to serve as a stand along plot station, paper sizes A, B, C, D, 115V, lA 18 Copier, with stand, 115V, 12A. 19 TelevisIOn (2), 27" color, with cart, 115V, 2A. 20 VCR, 4-head, 115V, .5A. 21 Video encoder to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV 22 Steel work bench (3), 36" x 72" B. Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory Material Storage 1 Shelf (10), 36" w x 18" d, full height. c. Communication Technology Laboratory 1 Teacher demonstration table, 96" x 30" x 36", with 1 IA" laminate top, double-door base unit with two adjustable shelves, five-drawer base unit, modesty panel, master keyed cylinder locks and pulls 2 Teacher chair, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" w x 37Ih" d x 37" h, solid maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow sprint drawer, with dust cover 4 Parallel straightedge, 48," mobile, with mounting hardware and instructions 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless. 6 Filing cabinet (2), 42" w x 19" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 261h" d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable with hangers 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves 9 Work station (3), 15' x 15', quad type, eight students each. H. \DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.lII June 1998 34 Technology Education 10 Student chair (24), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for work stations 11 LIght table, 42" x 62" top, floor model, 115V, 2A 12 Pedestal stool (4), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for hght table seatmg 13 Computer (14), IBM compatible, Pentium IT processor, 64 MB RAM, 6GB hard drive, 144MB 3th" internal floppy disk drive, CD-ROM, mouse, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, 17" color morutor, Microsoft Windows (latest version), 101100 3COM Ethernet card, delivery and setup, three-year warranty, 115V, 3.5A. 14 Power-switching system (14), with surge suppressIOn, 115V 15 Laser printer, with 16 MB RAM, network card, and shielded printer cable to connect to IBM 115V, 6.5A. 16 Laser printer, color, with network card, 115V, 65A. 17 Scanner (2), color, full page, table top, with OCR editing software, 115V, 75A. 18 MS Office Suite (14), latest version. 19 PageMaker Desktop Publishing software (14) 20 Corel Draw software (14) 21 Digital video production and editing package, includes computer, S- VHS camcorder (2), super VHS video cassette recorder, monitor (2), and power-switching, 115V, 3.5A. 22. Video digitizer, 24 - bit video frame grabber, with software 23 Paper drill, counter top model, 18" x 18," 115V, 5 5A. 24 Paper jogger, counter top model, 20" w x 14" d, 115V,2A. 25 Duplicator, high speed, production, digital input, network ready, four color, 11" x 17" stock, single phase, 115V, 5A. 26 Paper cutter, 25th" electric, mcludmg stand, 40" w x 50," 2 HP three-phase motor, 230V, llA. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED 1II June 1998 35 Technology Education 27 Stapler, counter top model, heavy duty, electric, with saddle and flat attachments, 115V, lA. 28 Paper folder, 40" w x 18" d, counter top model, with slitting, scoring, and perforating capabilities, 115V, 3 6A. 29 Collator, 12-page, 22" w x 15" d x 15" h, counter top model, 115V, 3A 30 Drying rack, 36" w x 26" d, fifty shelves 31 Wax coater, counter top model, 12" roller, 115V, 65A. 32 Silk screen printer, 96" diameter, carousel type, four color, work station (4), child and adult size shirt boards, stand, WIth sleeve, cap, and jacket printing attachments 33 Dryer, 72" I x 26" w x 59" h, textile, with legs, 20" w belt, infrared/ convection heat, 6" diameter power exhaust, 230V, 15A. 34 Laminating press, counter top model, with supplies, 18th" x 23" platen, 115V, 11 3A. 35 Television (2), 27" color, with cart, 115V, 2A. 36 VCR, four-head, 115V, .5A. 37 Video encoder, to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV 38 Cabinet (2), 72" w x 30" d x 34" h, sliding door, steel base with double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock, 2 IA" maple top 51 Cabinet, 43" w x 18" d x 44" h, flammable liquid safety storage, 30-gallon capacity 52. Work bench (3), 72" w x 28" d x 34" h, steel, with shelf and stringer D Communication Technology Laboratory Material Storage 1 Shelf (6), open, 36" w x 24" d x 75" h. 2 Shelf (18), open, 36" w x 18" d x 75" h. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.III June 1998 36 Technology Education E. Production Technology Laboratory 1 Teacher demonstration table, 96" x 30" x 36", with l1A" laminate top, double-door base unit with two adjustable shelves, five-drawer base unit, modesty panel, master keyed cylInder locks and pulls 2 Teacher chair, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" w x 371f2" d x 37" h, sohd maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow print drawer, with dust cover 4 Parallel straightedge, 48," mobile, with mountmg hardware and instructions 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 6 Filing cabinet, 42" w x 19" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable with hangers 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 261h "d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves. 9 Work station (3), 15' x 15', quad type, eight students each. 10 Student chair (24), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for work stations 11 Cabinet (6), 72" w x 3D" d x 34" h, sliding door, steel base with double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock, 21A" maple top 12 Work bench (2), 64" w x 54" d x 21A" h, four-station, base consists of heavy gauge steel unit (2), each with sliding double doors and cylinder locks, top is constructed from hard rock maple, with four woodworking vises 13 Tool storage cabinet, 62" w x 22" d x 84" h, general shop, with tools, constructed of hard maple framing with hardwood plywood panels, with master keyed locks 14 Tool storage cabinet, 60" w x 22" d x 84" h, for portable power tools, two sections, each with five adjustable shelves, constructed of hard maple framing and hardwood plywood panels, with master keyed locks H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 37 Technology Education 15 Band saw, 14", 25" w x 18" d, with enclosed stand, miter gauge and rip fence, wheel and blade guards, arbor and motor pulleys, V-belt, blade guides, wood cutting blade, magnetic control sWItch, * HP single phase motor, 230V, 7 A 16 Band saw, 8," bench-top mounted, with miter gauge, 1/5 HP smgle phase motor, 115V, 2 5A. 17 Scroll saw (2), 20," bench-top mounted, tilting table, multi-speed, WIth blades and accessories, single phase motor, 115V, 2A 18 Power miter box saw, 10," compound cut, bench-top mounted, with 10" steel blade, clear view retractable blade guard, dust bag, electric blade, work supports, clamp and stock stop, 115V, 15A. 19 Drill press, 14", 11" x 25" d, bench-top model, five spindle speeds, ~ "chuck, ~ HP single phase motor, 115V, IDA. 20 Combination belt/disk sander, 30" w x 25" d x 56" h, 6" belt/12" disc, with tilting tables, 4 ~" arbor pulley, V-belt, 80 - grit garnet belt, 50 - grit garnet disc, stand, auto-set miter gauge, and dust control package, 1 ~ HP single phase motor, 230V, lOA. 21 Combination belt/disc sander, 15" w x 24" d, 1" belt/8" disc, bench-top model, with miter gauge, V3HP single phase motor, 115V, 10A. 22. Buffer, 8," long shaft with pedestal, 1800 RPM, *HP single phase motor, 1151230V, 1417A. 23 Tool grinder, 7," with pedestal and lighted shields, water pot and tool tray, exhaust-type guards, two wheels, 7" xl" X 5/a" (one, 36 - grit and one, 60- grit), 3600 RPM, lhHP single phase motor, 115/230V, 10/5A. 24 Utility vise (2), 5" jaw width, 5Ih" opening, with replaceable serrated steel jaws, built-in steel pipe jaws, swivel base. 25 Circular saw, 7 ~ ," with combination saw blade and wrench, 115V, 13A. 26 Jigsaw, variable speed, 115V, 4A. 27 Router, 1 IhHP, with ~" and 1h" collets, collet wrenches, and base assembly, 115V, 8A. 28 Drill, electric, reversible, variable speed, Yz" chuck, 115V, 5 5A. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.llI June 1998 38 Technology Education 29 Belt sander, with dust bag, 3" x 24" belt, vacuum dust removal system 115V, 10lhA 30 Sander, orbItal pad, 1fs sheet, double insulated, 115V, 5A. 31 Sander, orbital finish, 1A sheet, double insulated, 115V, 1 25A 32 Vacuum cleaner (3), 28 - gallon, with 6' x 21h" hose, extension wands, and nozzle, 115V, lOA. 33 Safety glass cabinet, with glasses 34 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) metal lathe (2), bench-top model, lathe machinist kit, air chuck robotic mterface, pneumatic lathe shield opening, CAD/CAM software, 200-2000 RPM, lhHP single phase motor, 115V, 12A. 35 Mobil service bench for CNC metal lathe (2),42" w x 24"d x 28"h, 51A" casters 36 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) wood router, with Lexan safety shield, key operated switch, built-in dust collection, ffiM compatibihty, engraving package, CAD/CAM software, 1 * HP single phase motor, 115V, 15A 37 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) milling machine (2), 24"w x 22"d, bench-top model, with Lexan safety shield, air vise robotic interface, milling machinist kit, quick change tooling, CAD/CAM software and documentation, IHP DC motor, 115V, 15A. 38 Plastics technology module, containing: manual injection molding machine, rotational molding machine, vacuum former machine, supplies and instructional videos, each machine 115V, 15A each. 39 Plastic strip heater, 23" I, bench-top use, 115V, 12A. 40 Student table (6), 30" x 60," wood. 41 Student chair (30), stackable 42 Work station (3), 15' x 15', quad-type, eight students each. 43 Student chair (30), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for student tables H. \DATA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.II1 June 1998 39 Technology Education 44 Laser printer, 12MB RAM, with network card, 12' shielded printer cable, 115V,65A 45 Computer (20), ffiM compatible, Pentium IT processor, 64 MB RAM, 6GB hard drive, 144MB 3th" internal floppy disk drive, CD-ROM, mouse, senal port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, 17" color monitor, Microsoft Windows (latest version), 101100 3COM Ethernet card, delivery and setup, three-year warranty, 115V, 3 5A 46 Power-switching system (20), with surge suppression, 115V 47 CAM software program (6), for off-line programming 48 Mobile Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) bench (2), 36" x 72", steel, with controller mounting modules Types 1 and 2, keyboard/monitor mounting module, utilities distribution module, electrical power module, compressed air distribution module, quick release connector, and monitor multiplexer 49 Robotic arm (3), with teach through nose software, including: curriculum and instructional packages, Vision System, linear conveyor, rotary table, linear slide base, experimenter table (2), end effector package, D C. servo motor kit, gravity feeder (2), pallet (4), infra-red sensor 50 Television (2), 27" color, with cart, 115V, 2A. 51 VCR, 4 - head, 115V, .5A. 52. Video encoder, to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV 53 Stock cart (2), steel, 5' diameter casters, 24" w x 36" d x 32" h. 54 Oily waste can, 6-gallon. F Production Technology Laboratory Material Storage 1 Storage rack (2),48" w x 34" d x 112" h, triangular type to store up to 14' of stock vertically, three shelves 2 Storage cabinet (10), 35" w x 21" d x 78" h, steel construction, four adjustable shelves, lockable. 3 Shelf (6), open, 36" w x 24" d x 75" h. 4 Shelf (10), open, 36" w x 18" d x 75" h. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.1ll June 1998 40 Technology Education G Engineering Technology Laboratory 1 Teacher demonstration table, 96" x 30" x 36", WIth l1A" lammate top, double-door base unit with two adjustable shelves, five-drawer base umt, modesty panel, master keyed cylinder locks and pulls 2 Teacher chair, pneumatic 11ft, non-tllt, caster base, armless 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" W x 371h" d x 37" h, solid maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow print drawer, WIth dust cover 4 Parallel straightedge, 48," mobile, with mounting hardware and instructions 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 6 Filing cabinet, 36" w x 19" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 26lh" d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with and hangers 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves 9 Work station (3lh), 15' x 15', quad-type, eight students, each. 10 Student chair (28), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for work stations 11 Tool storage cabinet, 62" w x 22" d x 84" h, general shop, without tools, constructed of hard maple framing with hardwood plywood panels, with master-keyed locks 12 Hand tools, assorted, including basic woodworking and mechanical tools 13 Cabinet, 72" w x 30" d x 34" h, sliding door, steel base with double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock 2 ~ " maple top 14 Work bench (2),64" w x 28" d x 2~" h, two-station, base consists of one heavy gauge steel unit, with double swinging doors and cylinder lock, top is constructed from hard rock maple, with one wood-workmg vise 15 Cabinet (2), 60" w x 30" d x 34" h, sliding door, steel base WIth double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock, 2 ~" maple top H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.111 June 1998 41 Technology Education 16 Tool storage cabinet, 60" w x 22" d x 84" h, for portable power tools and robot arms, two sections, each with five adjustable shelves, constructed of hard maple framing and hardwood plywood panels, with master-keyed locks 17 Computer (18), IBM compatible, Pentmm II processor, 64 MB RAM, 6GB hard drive, 144MB 3th" mternal floppy disk drive, CD-ROM, mouse, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, 17" color monitor, Microsoft Windows (latest version), 10/100 3COM Ethernet card, delivery and setup, three-year warranty, 115V, 3 5A. 18 Power-switching system (11), with surge suppression, 115V 19 Laser printer, 12MB RAM, with network card, 12' shielded printer cable, 115V, 6 5A. 20 Robotic arm, advanced robotic arm with teach through nose software, including' curriculum and instructional packages, Vision System, linear conveyor, rotary table, linear slide base, two experimenter tables, end effector package, D C servo motor kit, gravity feeder, infra-red sensor, integration manual, and bar stock gripper adapter 21 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) metal lathe, bench-top model, lathe machinist kit, air chuck robotic interface, pneumatIC lathe shield opener, CAD/CAM software, 200-2000 RPM, lhHP single phase motor, 115V, 12A. 22 Mobile service bench, for CNC metal lathe, 5 ~" casters, 42" w x 24" d x28" h. 23 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) milling machine, 24" w x 22" d bench-top model, with Lexan safety shield, air vise robotic interface, milling machinist kit, quick-change tooling, CAD/CAM software and documentation, 1HP DC motor, 115V, 15A. 24 Mobile Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) bench (2), 36" x 72", steel, with controller mounting modules Type 1 and 2, keyboard/monitor mounting module, utilities distribution module, electrical power module, compressed air distribution module, quick release connector, and monitor multiplexer 25 Band saw, 8", bench-top mounted, with miter gauge, 115 HP single-phase motor, 115V, 25A. 26 Scroll saw, 20", bench-top mounted, tilting table, multi-Speed, with blades and acceSSOrIes, smgle-phase motor, 115V, 2A. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 42 Technology Education 27 Drill press, 14", bench-top model, five spindle speeds, Ih "chuck, 11" w x 25" d, V2 HP single-phase motor, 115V, lOA. 28 Combination belt/disc sander, 1" belt/8" disc, bench-top model, with miter gauge, 15" w x 24" d, % HP single-phase motor, 115V, lOA. 29 Tool grinder, 6, II bench-top model, with two-piece tool rests, exhaust-type guards, two wheels 6" x *" x Ih" (one, 36 - grit and one, 60 - grit), 1/3 HP single-phase motor, 115/230V, lO/SA. 30 Utility vise, 5" jaw width, 5-V2" opening, with replaceable serrated steel jaws, built-in steel pipe jaws, swivel base. 31 Vacuum cleaner (3), 28-gallon, with 6' x 2-V2" hose, extension wands and nozzle, 115V, lOA. 32. Drill, variable speed, reversing, 3/8" chuck, 115V,4A. 33 Bench (2), steel, open base, 72" w x 30" d. 34 Safety glasses cabinet, with glasses 35 Television (2), 27" color, with cart, 115V,2A. 36 VCR, four - head, 115V, 5A. 37 Video encoder, to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV 38 Projection screen, 10' x 10', ceiling mounted, manually operated. 39 Structural technology module, with structural tester (counter top model), videos, projects, software and manuals. 40 Electricity and electronics module, with trainer, tools, meters, leads and curriculum, 115V, lA. 41 Hydraulics module, with lockable steel case, counter top, components, video, instructor notes and curriculum. 42 Pneumatics module, with lockable steel case, counter top, components, video, instructor notes and curriculum. 43 Mechanisms module, with lockable steel case, counter top, components, VIdeo, instructor notes and curriculum. 44 Oily waste can, six-gallon. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.IlI June 1998 43 Technology Education H. Engineering Technology Laboratory Material Storage 1 Open, full-height shelf (12), 36" x 24" shelves 2 Storage cabinet (6), 36" w x 21" d x 78" h, steel constructIon, four adjustable shelves, lockable IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/CoolinglVentilation - All laboratories to be air-conditioned. Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS B. Acoustical - Acoustical tile or sound absorbing materials should be used where possible to reduce noise level. C. Eoor - Resilient tile in all areas D. Walls - The entire facility to be painted with epoxy for ease of cleaning Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint fInish. E. Ceiling - 12' in all laboratories except the Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory which will be standard height. F. Lighting - Fluorescent. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Exterior windows in the laboratory should be above eye-level to avoid outside distractions and allow use of wall space. Windows should be operable for ventilation. Maximum security must be provided at all exterior windows Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. H. Doors - One, 6' double door in each laboratory to facilitate delivery of materials and sharing of equipment. One, 6' double door between the equipment storage room and the Production Technology Laboratory, the equipment storage room and the Engineering Technology Laboratory, and the project storage room and the Communication Technology Laboratory Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- ATIONS I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures 1 Based on program furniture and equipment for each laboratory, provide (HW) and (CW) H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.I1I June 1998 44 Technology Education 2 Communications Technology LaboratOl.:Y- Provide a large stainless steel sink, with (HW) and (CW), approximately, 24"d x 36"w x 12", for cleanIng screen printmg screens ProVIde for a lot of splashed water 3 Each Laboratory- ProVIde stamless steel SInk, 18" d x 24" w, with (HW) and (CW) Provide electric water cooler J Communications - ProviSIOn for data, VOice and video wIfmg m all laboratories Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS K. Electrical - Appropriate wiring for all laboratory equipment. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS L. Gas and Air - Provide compressed air in the ProductIOn Technology and Engineermg Technology labs M. Safety - Panic buttons (kill switches) for instant disconnection of all equipment should be installed on two walls in appropriate laboratories A keyed reset switch to be installed in conjunction with one of the panic buttons in each laboratory Adequate fIfe extinguishers of proper size must be provided in each laboratory (Note All computer circuits to be isolated and controlled by a keyed switch.) Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS N Fencing - N/A o Service Drives - Production Technology lab should be located on the fIrst floor near a service drive for delivery of large stock. P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins 1. Built-in Work/Storage a. Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory (1) Counter, 25', cabinets below and above, lockable. b. Communication Technology Laboratory (1) Counter, 60', cabinets below and above, lockable (2) Work station (3), eight-student quad type, to District speCifications H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED III June 1998 45 Technology Education . c. Production Technology Laboratory (1) Counter, 30', 1-*" thick, hard maple top, wIth cabmets below and above, lockable (2) Work station (3), eight-student quad type, to District specifications d. Engineering Technology Laboratory (1) Counter, 30', 1-*" thick, hard maple top, WIth cabinets below and above, lockable (2) Work station (3-lh), eight-student quad type, to District specifications 2. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Laboratories (1) Marker board, minimum 16' (2) A V screen (3) Tack board, minimum 12' 3 Other Built-ins a. Air compressor, central system, located away from laboratories R. Other Considerations 1 Noise control between laboratories and within laboratory areas 2 Visual availability and supervision should be consIdered in planning all areas of the laboratories for the purpose of providing the instructor visual contact with students at all times and in all areas 3 Air compressor system located outside and away from laboratories 4 The Production Technology lab must be located on the first floor and be located with an exterior wall. This lab will require a dust collection system for part of the lab This will need to be located immediately outside of the lab H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED 1I1 June 1998 46 Technology Education AMENDED FAC~ITYSPACES~ARY APPENDIX B High School "III" Grade 9-12 Student Capacity 2,509 Student Stations 2,642 Core Capacity 2,507 (Original) (Amended) Student Net Assign Net Assign Facility Area Stations So. Ft. (NASF) Sa.Ft.(NASF) ADMINISTRATIVE/STUDENT SERVICE 11,467 ART 90 6,815 AUDITORIUM 13,439 COMPUTER EDUCATION 60 2,300 CUsrODIAL 3,258 DRIVER EDUCATION 30 900 EXCEPTIONAL STUDENT EDUCATION 147 15,839 FOOD SERVICE 22,564 FOREIGN LANGUAGE 120 3,820 GENERAL CLASSROOM 900 27.200 24,560 LANGUAGE ARTS 240 7,940 MATHEMATICS 180 5,730 MEDIA CENTER 19,443 MUSIC 78 6,766 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 160 28,662 RESOURCE ROOMS 5,700 RESTROOMS 5,265 R.O.T.C. 25 1,580 SCIENCE 168 11,553 19,407 SOCIAL STUDIES 180 5,730 SfUDENT srORAGE 1,250 VOCATIONAL 264 32,706 (Business Education, Distributive Education, HealthlFamily Uving, Home Economics, Technology Education) 'lJ J'-ll TOTAL STUDENT STATIONS 2,642 SUBTOTAL NET SQ Ff 239,927 245,141 MECHANICAL @ 6% 14.396 14.708 TOTAL NET SQ Ff 254,323 259,849 CIRCULATION, WALL, ETC. @34% 86.470 88.349 TOTAL GROSS SQ Ff 340,793 348,198 H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\AMENDED.ll1 June 1998 ~,~ 47 Amended Facility Space Summary EDUCATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS For IDGH SCHOOL "ill" Grades 9 - 12 Student Capacity 2,509 Student Stations 2,642 Core Facilities 2,507 New Construction "jJ:-\OOL D/& W'J . ~ ~ a ~q ~ ~" (J ~ ~ FOR EXCEI.."~ r <At BEACH CO~ ~ Mrs. Paulette Burdick, Chairman Mrs. Diane Heinz, Vice Chairman Mr William G Graham Ms. Jody Gleason Mr Robert Hayes Ms Dorothy B. Montgomery Dr Sandra Richmond Dr Joan P Kowal Superintendent March 1998 - TABLE OF CONTENTS - TABLE OF CONTENTS - FORWARD III SCOPE OF WORK iv - FACILITY LIST BY AREAS APPENDIX A VI - PHILOSOPHY & GOALS 1 - GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 5 GENERAL SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS 14 - SITE DEVELOPMENT 15 - TRAFFIC CONTROL 15 ADMINISTRATNE/STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 17 - ART 27 - AUDITORIUM 35 - COMPUTER EDUCATION 43 CUSTODIAL 47 - DRIVER EDUCATION 53 - EXCEPTIONAL STUDENT EDUCATION 57 FOOD SERVICE 66 - FOREIGN LANGUAGE 79 - GENERAL CLASSROOMS 84 - LANGUAGE ARTS 89 MATHEMATICS 99 - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\ill.398 March 1998 Table of Contents - TABLE OF CONTENTS MEDIA CENTER 104 MUSIC 119 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 126 RESOURCE ROOMS 139 R.OTC 143 SCIENCE 148 SOCIAL STUDIES 157 BUSINESS EDUCATION 162 DISTRIBUTIVE/DIVERSIFIED EDUCATION 171 HOME ECONOMICS 176 TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION 198 FACILITY SPACE SUMMARY Appendix B 219 H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\UI.398 March 1998 ii Table of Contents FORWARD These Educational Specifications are intended for use as a planning guide by architects and others responsible for developing physical facilities in Palm Beach County The general concept embodied in the specifications is to provide general and adequate details for proposed spaces while leaving ample flexibility for creativity and options in design by the architects Philosophy and Goals of the School Board of Palm Beach County (SBPBC) are provided as general directions for programs in the School District of Palm Beach County (SDPBC) and are followed by a listing of General Considerations The facilities list is intended to be a summary of the spaces to be provided, but IS sufficiently flexible to accommodate design reqUIrements and compatibility with adjacent space Specifications for the various program areas include a common listing of informational categories within each of the areas Specific information relative to each particular area is included under various headings as follows I. TI. ill. IV V VI. VTI. VITI. IX. Program Philosophy Program Goals Program Activities Organizational Nomenclature Innovations, Experimental Ideas, Other Planned Uses Justification for Variance from Florida State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F ) Program Facilities List Program Furniture and Equipment Special Considerations The graphic representations of Space Relationships are intended only to establish adjacencies and not to set design. Spaces shall be arranged for the various program areas in a configuration compatible with traffic control, site needs and the following considerations 1 2 Facilities shall be as functional as possible; that is,they shall be organized in a manner responsive to educational programming requirements in an orderly economical way Facilities shall be as responsive as possible to long-term maintenance goals. The architect shall endeavor to produce a product with the lowest possible life cycle cost. 3 Facilities shall be as vandal-resistant as is possible within realistic budget constraints 4 Facilities shall be as aesthetically pleasing as possible, considering neighborhood, shape, materials, colors, etc 5 Facilities shall be designed to provide adequate student movement (circulation) without unnecessary waste. Special attention is directed to planning for community utilization of the plant and campus, maximum energy conservation and capital budget restraints H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 1\1 Forward - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - APPENDIX A To Be Used For Construction FACILITY LIST BY AREAS High School "III" Grades 9-12 Student Capacity 2,509 Student Stations 2,642 Core Capacity 2,507 No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Descriotion of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total ADMINISTRATIVE/STUDENT SERVICES Administrative Services 1 Principal 250 4 Assistant Principal 150 600 1 Curriculum Coordinator 150 1 Bookkeeping 120 4 Secretary 150 600 1 General Reception 550 1 ProductionIWorkroom 752 1 Conference 625 1 Clinic (includes storage, restrooms (2) and office) 750 1 Administrative Storage 1,003 1 RecordsNault 375 5 Dean 150 750 1 Dean's Reception 375 1 Attendance (from Admin. storage) * (120) 1 Attendance Reception 125 1 Computer Area 375 1 SecuritylItinerant 120 1 Textbook Storage 752 2 Restrooms, Staff (from allotment) '" Out of Administative Storage H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lU.398 March 1998 vi Facility List by Areas No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Student Services 8 Counselor 150 1,200 2 Itinerant ** 120 240 1 Student Records (from RecordsNault) 375 1 Conference 200 1 Reception Area 250 1 Career Room 630 2 Secretary 150 300 Subtotal 11,467 Art 1 Pottery Area (part of Resource Room) 350 1 Ceramics Laboratory 1,590 30 1 DrawinglPainting 1,590 30 1 PhotolPrintmaking 1,590 30 3 Kiln Room (combined into 1) 60 180 3 Project Storage 150 450 3 Material Storage 155 465 3 Darkroom (combined into 1) 100 300 1 Teacher Plarming 300 Subtotal 6,815 .. School Psychologist, Speech Clinician, Student Services Specialist, Audiologist, Military Represent- ative, College Representative, Vocational Represent- ative, and Homebound Teacher Auditorium 1 Seating 7,521 1 Stage (830 nsf from Admin. Recp ) (830) 1 Technical/Construction Workshop (1,140) (2 Resource Rooms) 1 Storage 1,254 2 Dressing Rooms 627 1,254 1 Video Control Room/Projection Room ZOO 1 Lobby! Art Gallery 1,130 - . . . - - - - - - . - - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 vii Facility List by Areas - No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Auditorium (continued) 1 Concession 200 1 Ticket Booth 60 1 Green Room/Recording (from Music) (225) 1 Restroom (from allotment) Subtotal 13,439 Computer Education 2 Skills Development Laboratories 960 1920 30 60 2 Material Storage 90 180 1 cm Resource Room (570) (included in Resource Room allotment) 1 Material Storage 1 Teacher Planning 200 Subtotal 2,300 Custodial Central Receiving, Service Closets, ** LockerslRestrooms (including shower), Workroom, Office 2,508 1 Flammable Storage 150 1 Furniture Holding Area 200 1 Equipment Storage 400 Subtotal 3,258 Driver Education 1 Classroom 810 30 1 Material Storage 90 1 Resource Room (570) Subtotal 900 H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lIl.398 March 1998 viii Facility List by Areas No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Deserintion of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Exceptional Student Education 2 Educable Mentally Handicapped 975 1,950 15 30 2 Material Storage 120 240 2 Project Storage 100 200 2 Student Storage ~ ~ Subtotal 1,225 2,450 1 Physically Handicapped 950 10 1 Material Storage 120 1 Outside Storage 45 1 Student Storage 30 1 Student RIR and Bath 95 Subtotal 1,240 2 Emotionally Handicapped 950 1,900 10 20 2 Material Storage 120 240 2 Outside Storage 45 90 2 Student Storage 30 60 2 Student RIR and Bath ~ ---12Q Subtotal 1,240 2,480 5 Specific Learning Disabled 975 4,875 15 75 5 Material Storage 155 775 5 Project Storage 150 750 5 Student Storage -AQ ----200 Subtotal 1,320 6,600 1 Pre-Vocation and Vocation Laboratory 1,140 12 1 Material Storage 155 1 Student Storage ~ Subtotal 1,335 . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 ix Facility List by Areas - No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Descriotion of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Exceptional Student Education (continued) 2 Exceptional Child Resource Room* 672 1,344 2 Material Storage 155 310 2 Student Storage -AQ 80 Subtotal 867 1,734 TOTAL 15.839 Food Service 1 Dining (for 835 students) 10,028 1 Kitchen (including office and restroom) 11,031 1 Staff Dining 1,003 1 Chair Storage 502 1 Staff Restroom (from allotment) Subtotal 22,564 Forei:n ~e 3 Classrooms 810 2,430 30 90 3 Material Storage 70 210 1 Central Storage ISO Ih Resource Room (285) Subtotal 2,790 Computer Networked Foreign Language Lab 30 (skills development lab) 960 Material Storage 70 Subtotal 1,030 3.820 . One Resource Room to be located adjacent to the Pre- Voc and Vocational Lab and one Resource Room divided into two Itinerant spaces H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 x Facility List by Areas No. of Descrlotion of Areas Square Feet Student Stations Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total General Classrooms 30 Classroom 810 24,300 30 900 30 Material Storage 70 2,100 1 Teacher Planning ----8QQ Subtotal 27,200 Lanf:Uae-e Arts 5 Classroom (general) 810 4,OSO 30 ISO S Material Storage 70 ~ Subtotal 4,400 1 Classroom (Publications) 810 30 30 1 Material Storage 70 1h Resource Room and Storage (285) Subtotal 880 1 Skills Development Laboratory (SpeechlDebate) 960 30 30 lh Material Storage 70 lh Resource Room and Storage 085) Subtotal 1,030 1 Skills Development Laboratory (Reading) 960 1 Material Storage 70 1 Resource Room and Storage (570) Subtotal 1,030 1 Resource Room and Storage (Writing) (S70) 1 Teacher Planning ~ Subtotal 600 TOTAL ~ Mathematics 6 Classroom 810 4,860 30 180 6 Material Storage 70 420 1 Teacher Storage (in Teacher Planning) 1 Teacher Planning ~ Subtotal 5,730 H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1l1.398 March 1998 xi Facility List by Areas . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - No. of Areas Desc:rlDtion of Areas Media Center 1 Reading Room/Stacks 1 Technical Processing 1 Professional Library 1 A V Storage/Maintenance Repair (combined) 1 Periodical Storage 2 Conference * 1 Technology Instruction Room 1 Closed-Circuit TV Production 1 Closed-Circuit TV Storage 1 Media Production/Copy Room (combined) 1 Small Group Listening 1 Group Projects 1 Media Specialist's Office 1 Restroom (from allotment) Subtotal Musk 1 Vocal Music Classroom 1 Ensemble Room 3 Practice Room (combined into one) 1 Reference Room 1 Material Storage 1 Robe Storage 1 Teacher Planning Subtotal 1 Band Classroom 1 Ensemble Room 3 Practice Room *Out of Administrative conference space. Administration conference is 25 sf, Guidance conference is 200 sf, allowing 680 for media conference area H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 xii Square Feet Per Unit I Total 340 8,625 850 850 1,375 375 680 600 1,750 1,254 1,500 180 1,254 150 19,443 70 1,596 300 210 100 155 150 --100 2,611 70 2,000 300 210 Student Stations Per Unit I Total 28 50 Facility List by Areas No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas DescrlotiOD of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total M.YSk (continued) ~ 1 Reference Room 100 1 Instrument Storage 600 1 Material Storage 155 1 Uniform Storage 175 1 Studio 180 1 Teacher Planning --100 Subtotal 3,820 1 Recording Room 225 1 Resource Room (Piano Keyboard) (570) 1 Instrument Repair -1lil Subtotal 335 TOTAL 6.766 Physical Education 2 Dressing Rooms 1,504 3,008 2 Lockers 125 250 2 Showers 125 250 2 Drying 125 250 2 Storage 564 1128 2 Restrooms 125 250 2 Teacher Planning 250 500 2 Teacher Planning 100 200 2 Teacher Restrooms/Showers 66 132 1 Weight Room* 1,000 1 First Aid 250 1 Training Room 250 1 Multipurpose Room 1,050 1 Wrestling Room 1,680 1 GymnasticslDance 1,050 1 Gymnasium 6,500 160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H. \DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 Xlii Facility List by Areas - No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Descrintion of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Physical Education (continued) 1 Gymnasium Seating (2,640 x 2.7) 8,022 1 Gymnasium Storage 376 2 Laundry Towel 125 250 1 Gymnasium Lobby 1,254 1 Concessions 200 2 Ticket Booth 30 60 1 Outdoor Storage Building * 250 1 Public Toilet (from allotment) 251 -502 Subtotal 28,662 (*250 nsf from Custodial allotment) Resource Room 10 Resource Room 480 4,800 10 Material Storage 90 -200 Subtotal 5,700 Restrooms 1 Public Toilets 502 1 Staff 1,003 1 Student 3.760 Subtotal 5,265 R.O.T.e. 1 Classroom 1,050 25 1 Arms Room 150 1 Material Storage 155 1 Conference ~ Subtotal 1,580 Science 7 Science Laboratory/Classroom 1,224 8,568 24 168 7 Material Storage 155 1,085 1 Material Storage 400 1 Project Storage/Equip. Maintenance (combined) 150 1,050 H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1lI.398 March 1998 xiv Facility List by Areas No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Descriotion of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Science (continued) Teacher Planning 450 Subtotal 11,553 Social Studies 6 Classrooms 810 4,860 30 180 6 Material Storage 70 420 1 Teacher Planning 450 Subtotal 5,730 Student Storage (Lockers) 1 Student Personal Storage 1.250 Subtotal 1,250 VOCATIONAL EDUCATION Business Education 1 Accounting Operations Laboratory 1,460 20 1 Material Storage 120 1 Project Storage ~ Subtotal 1,680 1 Computer Operations Laboratory 1,460 20 1h Resource Room (285) 1 Material Storage - 120 1 Project Storage ~ Subtotal 1,680 1 Clerical/Secretarial Occupations Laboratory 1,460 20 1 Material Storage 120 1 Project StoragelB C.B. Office ~ Subtotal 1,730 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 xv Facility List by Areas - No. or Square Feet Student Stations Areas Description or Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Business Education (continued) 1 Teacher Planning ~ Subtotal 250 TOTAL 5.340 Distributive Education 1 Laboratory (DCT, DE, Work Experience) 900 20 1 Material Storage 155 1 Project Storage 150 1 Classroom for Related Instruction 500 1 School Store (from Administration) 250 1 Teacher Planning -100 Subtotal 2,055 HeaIthlLife Mana~ement Skills 1 Laboratory 1,200 20 1 Classroom Related 675 1 KitchenIDispensary 135 1 Project Storage 150 1 Material Storage --W Subtotal 2,315 Home Economics 1 Blueprint for Success/Clothing Laboratory 1,536 1 Resource Room 800 24 1 Laundry 50 1 Material Storage 155 Subtotal 2,541 1 Food and Nutrition Laboratory 1,536 24 1 Resource Room/Commercial Foods 800 1 Laundry 50 1 Material Storage 155 H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 xvi Facility List by Areas No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Descrintion of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total Home Economics (continued) 1 Teacher Planning -2QQ Subtotal 2,741 Child Care 1 Child Care Services Laboratory 1,100 20 1 Project Storage 150 1 Resource Room from Clothing (800) 1 Restroom (from allotment) Subtotal 1,250 TOTAL 8.847 TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION 1 Drafting and Design Technology 2,280 24 1 Material Storage ~ Subtotal 2,675 1 Communications Technology 3,240 24 1 Material Storage 395 1 Technology Resource 800 1 Project Storage -llQ Subtotal 4,745 1 Engineering Technology 3,240 24 1 Material Storage 395 1 Project Storage 310 1 Tool Storage -llQ Subtotal 4,255 1 Principles of Construction Technology 3,240 24 1 Material Storage 395 1 Technology Resource 800 1 Project Storage -11Q Subtotal 4,745 TOTAL 16.420 H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IU.398 March 1998 xvii Facility List by Areas - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PIDLOSOPHY AND GOALS I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY The SBPBC Philosophy is to provide an educational system which is instructionally sound and environmentally stimulating enough to attract and maintain high-quality professional, technical and administrative employees This system is designed to earn the respect of Palm Beach County, the community, state and nation. The SBPBC believes that successful implementation of its philosophy is higWy dependent upon a positive, active, working partnership which includes the SBPBC, administrators, teachers, staff, students, parents, community, business and industry For this reason, the support requirements for this project were developed by a participatory process involving faculty writing committees, the Department of Curriculum and Instruction, various departments of the SDPBC, and representatives of the Florida State Department of Education (D.O.E.) ll. PROGRAM GOALS A. Student Goals - Students shall acquire, to the extent of their individual physical, mental and emotional capacities, a mastery of the basic skills required in the curriculum. 1. Communication and Learning Skills - All students shall be provided an opportunity to do the following: a. Develop and apply basic skills in reading, writing, speaking, viewing and listening. b Gain a general education in broader fields of language arts, social studies, science, science, mathematics, humanities and vocational education. c. Develop a desire for learning. d. Develop a capacity for self-evaluation and self-direction. e. Examine, analyze, evaluate and utilize various kinds of information. 2. Human Relations - All students shall be provided an opportunity to do the following' a. Develop a pride of accomplishment and a feeling of self-worth. b Learn to respect and get along with people H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1l1.398 March 1998 Philosophy and Goals - 3 Citizenship Education - All students shall be provided an opportunity to do the following - a. Develop good character and self-respect. - b Be responsible CItizens c Participate In democratic experiences and processes - 4. Occupational Interests - All students shall be prOVIded an opportunity to do the following - a. Develop a positive attitude toward work. - b Develop respect for the dignity of all occupations c. Acquire information needed for making appropriate job selections - - d. Develop the ability to use information as it relates to a particular vocation. - 5. Home and Family Relationships - All students shall be provided an opportunity to do the following: - a. Broaden an appreciation of the family as a social institution and as a basic unit of society - b Acquire skills and attitudes for management of family resources c Acquire and understand the skills of family living - 6. Mental and Physical Health - All students shall be provided an opportunity to do the following: - a. Develop good health habits and an understanding of the conditions necessary for maintenance of physical and emotional well being. - - b Acquire a knowledge of basic psychological and sociological factors affecting human behavior and mental health. - c Develop competence for adjusting to changes d Recognize and work to solve environmental health problems - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 2 Philosophy and Goals - 7 Aesthetic and Cultural Appreciation - All students shall be provided an opportunity to do the following a. Develop an understanding and appreciation of human achievement in natural sciences, social sciences, humanities and the arts b Broaden interests and prepare for productive use of leisure time. c. Develop skills and creative abilities for self-expression. B. Management Goals 1. General Management - The SDPBC shall refine, implement and utilize management practices which will provide the following: a. Planning and evaluation programs which will ensure accurate and adequate information for decision-making. b Information services that promote timely acquisition of accurate information c. Information services that promote timely acquisition of accurate information regarding SBPBC policies, procedures and activities which fulfill the needs of the SDPBC and the public. d. Administrative and Instructional support for "school-based management" procedures and techniques. e. System-wide support services for functions, processes and programs f Continuing development, refmement, implementation and evaluation of instructional materials and processes g Flexible organizational structure which clearly defmes and delineates authority, responsibility and accountability h. Fiscal integrity in budgeting and business affairs H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I11.398 March 1998 3 Philosophy and Goals - - 2. Personnel Management - The SDPBC will develop and maintain the following - a. b c. d. e. Practices and programs to recruit the best qualified personnel for all positions - Programs to orient all employees properly to their job responsibilities, operation and organization of their units, and organization of the school system. - Staff Development Programs to update employees in their chosen fields and to enhance their professional and career growth. - - Develop programs to teach administrators at all levels how to achieve excellence in managing people, including performance, planning, evaluation and counseling - A system to identify high potential employees and their readiness status to qualify for higher career positions within the SDPBC - f. Practices and programs to attain effective affirmative action. - g H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 Practices and systems to establish realistic position descriptions for each level and equitable compensation for those levels. - - - - - - - - 4 Philosophy and Goals - GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS Documents to be utilized in facility design shall include State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F ), Educational Specifications, the Guidelines for Design Engineers, and Life Cycle Cost Containment Guidelines (LCCCG) Additional Design Guidelines are listed hereafter A. Security - The design shall be committed to maximum securIty from unauthorized or illegal entry during school hours and when the school is not m session. Internal security preventatives such as limited access, locked storage, proper lighting, etc., shall be considered. The exterior of the building shall not have "natural ladders" , blind corners or areas where security would be difficult. Intrusion alarm system shall be provided in accordance with current SBPBC policy and guidelines Appropriate security shall be provided for all computers and other expensive equipment throughout the school. Refer to General Security Considerations. An additional consideration would be to plan the layout of the schools to provide the greatest amount of supervision with the least number of administrators In other words, avoid as many nooks and crannies as possible so that it is easy to monitor the campus with limited personnel. B. Flexibility - Consider flexibility to allow for future program changes and expansions of the school plant. C. Construction Techniques - Consider fast and economical construction consistent with long-range maintenance and flexibility requirements of a permanent school plant. Standardized building components shall be utilized. D. Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (JIVAC) - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities, (S.R.E.F), the State of Florida Energy Efficiency Code For Building Construction and the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC Phase IT HV AC submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase n design. Phase ill HV AC submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of .the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase ill design. Revisions to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC are minor and thus, the revisions will not affect the Phase IT conceptual design. Any deviations from the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's senior engineer H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\H1.398 March 1998 5 General Considerations - E. Plumbing - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F ) and the Plumbing System Design Requirements for the SDPBC Provide electric water cooler that is easily accessible to each classroom. - - Phase III Plumbing Submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the Plumbing System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase ill design. - Any deviations from the Plumbing System Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's senior engineer - - F Building Fire Protection - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F ) and the Fire Protection System Design Requirements for the SDPBC. - Phase ill fire protection submittal shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the Fire Protection System Design Requirements for the SDPBC at the start of Phase ill design. - Any deviations from the Fire Protection System Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's senior engineer - - G Windows - Shall allow a high degree of efficiency in heating and cooling. Windows shall have light control treatment such as horizontal or vertical blinds. - H. Floors - Resilient tile or sheet vinyl except in the following: quarry tile in kitchen; non-slip ceramic tile in shower and locker rooms, ceramic tile in toilet rooms and group toilets shall be provided with floor drains; smooth concrete with colored sealer in custodial closets and storage areas. Carpeting is limited to principal's office. - - I. lYalls - Toilets, shower and locker rooms, kitchen, dishwash area, dry food storage, garbage can wash and service closets shall have smooth impervious finish from floor to ceiling. The dining area shall have impervious wall finish up to 9' minimum. - J Roof - Roof slope shall conform to the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S R.E.F ) - K. Corridors and Student Commons - Corridor width shall comply with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F ) and drinking fountains, except those for the disabled, shall be recessed in walls Door stops and holders shall be overhead or wall-mounted. - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lIL398 March 1998 6 General Considerations - L. Sound Treatment - Acoustically-treated walls and ceilings shall be provided as necessary for the intended use of the space M. Hot Water - Hot water shall be provided in administrative suite, cafeteria, shower rooms, art rooms, home economics suite, science preparation rooms, clinic, medIa, auditorium dressing rooms, and custodial facilities N Lighting - All interior lighting shall be electronic type with T -8 lamps and electronic ballast. Classroom lighting shall be controlled with alternate switching of light fixtures Special lighting shall be provided for areas such as Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) production room, art lab, stage, auditorium, gymnasium. Exterior lighting shall be high intensity discharge type and shall be mounted so that minimum shadows are cast on buildings. Exterior lighting (parking lot, walkway and security) shall be circuited individually and shall be controlled by Section 15900 Electronic Management and Control system. Lighting system shall meet the requirements of "Electrical Design Requirements" for the SDPBC. o Electrical - Electrical systems shall be 277/480-volts, 3 phase, 4 wire. Step down, dry-type transformers shall be located inside electrical rooms which shall be properly ventilated. Drawings shall include complete load summary for the main distribution system and shall indicate NEC demand factors. Riser diagrams or one line riser diagrams shall include feeder size, voltage drop, available short circuit, etc. Electrical outlets, disconnect switches and wiring shall be provided for all equipment furnished by contractor or the SDPBC. Floor outlets may be utilized for special equipment or usage but shall not be utilized in classrooms. Lockable, weatherproof, 120-volt GFCI outlets shall be located every 150' lineal of exterior wall. Power distribution system and all other electrical requirements shall be in accordance with "Electrical Design Requirements" for the SDPBC. P Student Toilets - Soap dispensers shall be powder type. Paper towel dispensers and toilet paper dispensers shall be continuous-roll type except for handicapped restrooms A mirror and a shelf for books shall be provided in each toilet room. Sanitary napkin dispensers and disposers shall be located in girls' toilet rooms. Q Entrances - Sand traps of suitable size and mesh shall be located at entrances from the outside. Ramps shall be provided where required for the disabled. Panes of break-resistant materials are preferred to large areas of glass R. Lockers - Individual lockers of not less than two cubic feet capacity shall be provided for middle and high school students Lockers shall be located in air- conditioned corndors H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1Il.398 March 1998 7 General Considerations - s. Clock and Bell System - Battery clocks shall be utilized throughout the facility and provided by the SDPBC Bell system shall have automatic and manual operation. Class change bell system shall be a tone generator through intercom system. - T Intercommunications System - There shall be a two-way intercom between the administrative suite and all teacher stations, work areas, gymnasium and cafeteria. The central control for the intercom system shall have input capacity from phonograph, tape recorder and radio In addition, provisions and equipment of VHF Communications on campus shall be included. Principal to have access to intercommunication system. Connect intercom system to building emergency power - - - U Television Receivers - Instructional areas and other designated areas will be equipped with TV receivers on mobile stands - V Television Cable - Coaxial cable shall be installed in all classrooms and Media center, with internal closed-circuit capabilities in designated areas, to comply with ITV specifications. Provide one ITV antenna connection with electrical outlet for ITV Provide central antenna to receive the SDPBC ITV signal. Principal to have ITV broadcast capability, RF in and RF out. - - W. Colors - Harmonizing colors shall be used to enhance the design of the plant. The architect shall submit colors for review and approval by the SDPBC Superintendent or hislher designee. - X. Display - A built-in display case shall be located in the entrance foyer Three built- in display cases shall be located in the student common area to serve the following purposes special occasions, class projects and departmental projects Additional display shelving shall be located in the main administrative office and media center - - Y. Telephones - Provide a complete telephone conduit system including backboards and cabinets in accordance with SBPBC policy and guidelines. All telephone and cable equipment shall be installed by the SDPBC telephone department. - - In the Middle School Administration Building, provide a main telephone room location, minimum 120 sq ft., to house the main PBX Equipment and the utility company service entrance equipment. This location shall follow the current SBPBC policies and guidelines. II!I In the High School, provide a main telephone room location, minimum 192 sq ft - z. Teacher Work Areas - Work areas for teachers are specified in the program. Toilets for teachers shall be located near these work areas - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 8 General Considerations - AA. Safety - Provide safety devices in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E F) Exits, exit lights, panic hardware, etc , shall be provided according to the S.R.E.F Fire extinguishers and automatic extinguishing systems shall be provided in accordance with S.R.E.F and current SBPBC policy and guidelines Extinguishers shall not be mounted on the exterior of buildings AB. Site Fire Protection - Provide fire hydrants as recommended by the appropriate local fIre protection agency Fire alarm system shall be provided in accordance with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F) and current SBPBC policies and guidelines. See Electrical Design Requirements and LCCCG An emergency entry key safe shall be mounted on the exterior of the building near the fIre alarm annunciator panel. AC. Automobile Parking - Parking shall be provided in accordance with traffic control section. Visitor parking shall be provided near the entrance to the administrative suite. Parking shall be illuminated for night use AD Storage - Departmental, custodial and administrative storage shall be provided as specified. Central textbook storage shall be provided in a location specified elsewhere. AE. Water Outlets - Provide hose bibb with control key operator in each student group toilet. Provide hose bibb with control key operator at a maximum interval of 150' of exterior wall. AF. Potable Water Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC. Provide dual backflow preventers and size each backflow preventer for 100% of the demand flow Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's civil engineer AG Pavement, Site Improvements Provide all pavement typical sections, access routings, sidewalks, traffic and pedestrian controls, signing and pavement markings layout, sports facilities, as identified elsewhere in this section, and other site improvements as set forth in the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's civil engineer H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1U.398 March 1998 9 General Considerations - AH. Sanitary Sewer Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC - Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in - writmg, by the school district's civil engineer AI. Storm Water Drainage - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC - Any deviations from the Civil Engineering Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's civil engineer - - AJ Irrigation Water - Provide irrigation water system from a wet retention area or well. Where necessary, provide a rust inhibitor system to prevent staining of _ buildings and sidewalls AK. Structural - Systems shall be designed in accordance with the Structural Design - Requirements for the SDPBC Any deviations from the Structural Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's structural engineer - - AL. Bulletin Boards - In addition to any bulletin boards specified in departmental specifications, there shall be located in the corridors and/or student common area the following' (a) for general administrative, provide eight lineal feet; (b) for student activities, eight lineal feet; (c) for general faculty, eight lineal feet; (d) for interscholastic activities, eight lineal feet; (e) for music, eight lineal feet; (t) for interdepartmental use, eight lineal feet. Bulletin (tack) boards shall not be less than 36" vertical measurement. - - - AM. Ceiling Heights - Ceiling height in all spaces shall conform to the State Requirements for Educational Facilities, (S.R.E.F ) - AN. Service Access for Mechanical EqJ.Iipment - Mechanical equipment rooms shall be designed to provide service access to the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC - AO Disabled Accessibility - All spaces to comply with federaUstate regulations - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1I1.398 March 1998 10 General Considerations - AP Crowd Control - The design shall reflect good crowd control. Consideration shall be given to large groups that enter and leave the site at times of public and school events AQ Energy Conservation - The building and its systems shall be designed in accordance with the State of Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction. During Phase II, an economic analysis shall be performed for the following energy conservation measures HV AC Thermal storage (ice) system to reduce electric demand during "on peak" periods Domestic Hot Water- De-superheaters for air-cooled chillers and heat recovery condensers for water-cooled chillers to preheat supply water for food service and gymnasium domestic hot water systems AR. Community School - The general plan and campus design shall be arranged to permit and facilitate use of all appropriate school facilities by community agencies when these spaces are not in use for the regular school program. Community school considerations include ready access from parking lots to all athletic and recreational facilities, meeting rooms, music facilities, media center, cafeteria and community school coordinator's office. Restroom facilities shall be made available without entrance into main buildings. AS. Exterior Building Materials - Major exterior building materials shall be fully documented in the design phase of project development for review and approval by the SDPBC Superintendent or hislher designee. Exterior materials and coatings shall be graffiti resistant and easily cleaned to the maximum extent practical. AT. Imn:ructional Technology for Data, Voice and Video - Provide conduits, wiring, data outlets and receptacles for computer network requirements. Provide spaces and special air-conditioning for computer- related electronics. Refer to current SBPBC policy on computer systems. AU. School Site and Pl=urfields - Carefully design site development for proper drainage, vehicle and pedestrian circulation. Provide useful and safe outdoor play areas and fields. Refer also to SITE DEVELOPMENT A V. Working Heights - Built-in equipment and furnishings shall be constructed and/or provided to accommodate the appropriate student grade levels These figures were taken from ~ ~ Standards, a Handbook of Architectural Design, Fourth Edition, John Hancock Callender, Editor-in-Chief H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 11 General Considerations AW. AX. AY. AZ. - Working Heights in Inches for Elementary and Secondary School Children - Elementary Secondary Item Kindergarten Grades 1-3 Grades 4-S Grades 6-12 Cabinet, display (bottom) 26 29 34 39 Marker Board (bottom & chalkrail) 22 25 29 34 Counter, classroom work (standinl!) 24 26 30 36 Hook, coat (student) 36 41 48 55 Lavatory and sink 24 26 30 36 Mirror, lower edge (Max.) 35 38 43 52 Pencil sharpener 27 31 36 42 Shelf, hat and books 41 46 53 60 Soap dispenser 27 31 36 42 Tack board (bonom) 22 25 29 34 Towel dispenser 27 31 36 42 Water Closet (seat) 13 15 15 15 - - - - - - - - Ventilation - Ventilation shall be designed in accordance with the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 62 and the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC - - Program Furniture and E<lJ.lipment - Program furniture and equipment list, in all sections herein, is to be utilized as a design guide for determining space requirements It is not intended to be used as an ordering guide. Existing furniture and equipment shall be utilized, where space permits - - Natural Gas - Natural gas shall be used for cooking (food service) and for domestic water heating (food service and gymnasium) Where Natural Gas is not available, Propane shall be used. For small demand domestic water heating systems, electric water heaters shall be used. - Design Notebooks - Design notebooks shall be provided in accordance with the Design Requirements for Mechanical (HV AC, Plumbing and Fire Protection), electrical, civil and structural systems The Table of Contents for each Phase ill design notebook shall be signed and sealed by the consultant. - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III. 398 March 1998 12 General Considerations - BA. Communications Room - Every facility shall have one Communication Equipment Room (CER) and several Communication Closet Rooms (CCR) CER shall house the servers for the instructional technology system and be the origination point for the system's fiber in the facility CCR shall be provided in every building and shall be used for distribution of data to the data outlets throughout building CER and CCR shall not serve as a storage or custodial room. BB. Electrical Design - Electrical design, including lighting, power and systems shall meet "Electrical Design Requirements" All equipment, devices and wiring shall meet the requirements of the SDPBC and LCCCG Any deviations from the Electrical System Design Requirements for the SDPBC shall be requested, in advance and in writing, by the consultant and shall be approved, in writing, by the school district's electrical engmeer H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 13 General Considerations - GENERAL SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS - 1 The area for loading/unloading of students shall be designed for easy superVIsion. - 2 Open parking areas shall have good natural surveillance Provide a fenced staff parking area that can be locked during the day where local conditions warrant. - 3 Parking lots shall have more than one access - 4 School sites shall have perimeter security fencing preventing access to walkways and courtyards when facility is not occupied, but allow for public use of extenor athletic facilities Design exterior doors to prevent unauthorized entry, Le key access only - 5 Use maze-type of entry system to restrooms where appropriate, Le., gymnasium. Do not use maze-type of entry for exterior locations - 6 Bicycle parking compound shall be located in an area with good natural surveillance and have an 81 fence. Provide racks to which bicycles can be locked. - - 7 When designing courtyards, consider physical division of space, Le. benches, planters, to avoid congregation of large groups of students and to allow smooth flow of traffic. Position amenities to create multiple access and passageways Planters shall not be placed in such a way as to allow its contents to block clear vision of common areas and courtyards - - 8 Locate teacher planning areas throughout the campus to provide supervIsion for potential problem areas - 9 Provide multiple exits from assembly areas to allow for expedient dispersal of crowds Exit routes shall be convenient so that all exits will be used. - 10 Provide zoned lighting to allow for security during community school activities at night. Consider use of motion detector lights in isolated areas. - 11 Computers shall be attached to desk or work counters with locking devices to deter theft. The type of locking devices could include a cable-type locking device. - 12. Design roofs without obstructions that could conceal persons from view - 13 Provide a KNOX Box for emergency key access to the building - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1l1.398 March 1998 14 General Security Considerations - SITE DEVELOPMENT A Site Plan shall include, but not limited to, the following 1 Entrance to the site 2 Proposed building locatIOn on the SIte 3 Driveways, parking areas and service areas 4 Outdoor areas for physical education and athletics 5 Fencing, benches, lighting and other structures 6 Students' free-time recreation areas 7 Pedestrian circulation 8. Landscaping, plant material, ground cover and irrigation system. Landscaping plan shall contribute to the development of a balanced and harmonious appearance of the educational complex. Landscaping shall be based on surveys of existing plants on the site and a palette of species of plants native to the vicinity Plantings shall be site specific with special consideration given to minimizing supplemental irrigation systems, energy efficiency and maintainability of the designed vegetation systems, from installation to maturity Supplemental irrigation systems to be used shall provide for total coverage of landscape areas. Where practical, minimum plant sizes and maximum spacing shall be used. Landscaping shall be in compliance with State Requirements for Educational Facilities 5.3(2)(a), (S.R.E.F ) TRAFFIC CONTROL The following traffic related activities occur on the school site: 1 Approximately, 30 school buses will enter and exit the site at the beginning and end of each school day 2. Approximately, 270 staff will enter and exit the site daily 3 Service and visitor vehicles will enter and exit the site daily 4 Private vehicles of spectators attending extra curricular activities will enter and exit the site periodically A complete traffic pattern and parking plan shall be prepared for the site. The goal of this plan is that all persons and vehicles on the site shall be able to move from place to place with the greatest possible efficiency and the least possible hazard to persons or property H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lU.398 March 1998 15 Site Development and Traffic Control - Specific consideration shall be given to the following - 1 School bus traffic shall be separate from private vehIcular and pedestrian - traffic 2 Provide covered bus drop-off - 3 Parking spaces shall be conveniently located for (235) staff, (565) students, (25) visitors and (40) service personnel. Spaces to be 9' wide - 4 Pedestrian traffic shall be protected from vehicular traffic. - 5 The Florida Department of Transportation or other appropriate agency shall be involved in planning and attaining maximum possible safety in entering and leaving the site - 6 Visitor parking shall be provided near the administrative suite - 7 A fenced parking area for bicycles and motorcycles shall be provided. 8 All drives and service areas shall be paved and marked to indicate fire lanes, - no parking, loading zones and pedestrian crossing. 9 Provide traffic signs that clearly indicate flow information. Examples are. - BUS TRAFFIC ONLY - NO OTHER VEmCLES VISITOR TRAFFIC ONLY - 10 Student pedestrian traffic to play fields shall not cross any vehicular traffic area. - 11 The National Safety Council Publications, Standardc; for School Bus Operation. is recommended as a reference source concerning bus transportation requirements A copy is available in the Department of Architect Services - - 12 Refer to General Security Considerations Section. - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\Ill.398 March 1998 16 Site Development and Traffic Control - ADMINISTRATIVE/STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Refer to overall II. PROGRAM GOALS Refer to overall III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Administration 1 Reception of public 2. Reception of students 3 Secretarial and clerical duties 4 Accounting duties 5 Filing and office storage 6 Office activities for- a. Principal b Curriculum Coordinator c. Assistant Principals d. Community School Director/ Assistant Principal e. Deans 7 Data processing/computer area 8 Record keeping and storage 9 Mail distribution 10 Duplicating production 11 Textbook processing and storage 12 Conference (individual and small group) 13 Key and security control 14 Verbal communication, school wide 15 Telephone control, school wide 16 Clock and bell control 17 Curriculum development 18. Student scheduling 19 Attendance and discipline 20 Health clinic B. Student Personnel Services 1 Reception of students 2. Reception of parents 3 Secretarial and clerical duties 4 Filing and office storage H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HSUH.398 March 1998 17 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - 5 Office activities for guidance counselor 6 Student record keeping and storage 7 Conferences (individual and small group) - C. Individual testing - 1 Registration and onentation of new students 2 Job placement follow-up 3 Dissemination of educational, career and personal/social information 4 Liaison activities between school and community agencies - - IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE - Number of Students Served Per Day Total Varies Number of Persons Served at one time Varies - V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES Community school concept. School facilities are made available for a wide variety of activities and classes after and during regular school hours. - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITffiS (S.R.E.F ) - A. Administration reception has been calculated for a total of 2, 131 nsf (net square feet) to provide for the following' - - 1 General AdminIstrative of 550 nsf 2 Attendance Reception of 125 nsf 3 Student Services Reception of 250 nsf - 4 Dean's s reception of 375 nsf 5 The remaining 830 nsf is to be used to increase the size of auditorium stage and w~s - B Conference space has been calculated for a total of 1,505 nsf to provide for the following conference areas - 1 Administrative of 625 nsf 2. Student Services of 200 nsf 3 Media Center of 680 nsf - - C 120 nsf for attendance area came from the 1,003 nsf of administrative storage D Itinerant space of 120 nsf is needed for school psychologist, student services specialist, military representative, college representative, vocational representative, homebound teacher, and school security officer - - H. \DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 18 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - E. School store is to be located in distributive/diversified education space F Student activities area was deleted, the career room will be sufficient for the needs of the program and will replace student activitIes G Records/vault of 750 nsf has been separated into two spaces and at 375 nsf each. VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. or Square Feet Areas Description or Areas Per Unit / Total ADMINISTRATIVE/STUDENT PERSONNEL SERVICES 1 Principal 250 4 Assistant Principal 150 600 1 Curriculum Coordinator 150 1 Bookkeeping 120 4 Secretary (I @ 300 shared space, 2 @ 150) 600 1 General Reception 550 1 ProductionIW orkroom 752 2 Conference (1 @ 225, 1 @ 4(0) 625 1 Clinic (includes storage, restrooms (2) and office) 750 1 Administrative Storage 1,003 1 RecordsN ault 375 5 Dean 150 750 1 Dean's Reception 375 1 Attendance (120) 1 Attendance Reception 125 1 Computer Area/Data Processing 375 1 Security IItinerant 120 1 Textbook Storage 375 2 Restrooms (included in general allocation) Staff (2) Student Services 8 Counselor 150 1200 2 Itinerant 120 240 H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\ll1.398 March 1998 19 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - I No. of I Description of Areas I Square Feet I Areas Per Unit I Total 1 Student Records (from Records/Vault) 375 1 Conference 200 1 Reception Area 250 1 Career Room 630 2 Secretary 150 -3.QQ TOTAL 11.467 - - - - VID. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Principal 1 Executive desk, 36" x 72 2 Executive chair 3 Credenza 4 Couch 5 Chair (3) 6 Corner table 7 Coffee table 8 Bookcase, 36" x 48" 9 Computer/peripheral equipment/printer B. Assistant Principal (4) 1 Desk, 36" x 72" 2 Chair, swivel-type, executive high back 3 Credenza 4 Chair (2) 5 File cabinet, four-drawer, 36" w, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Computer/furniture/printer - - - - - - C. Curriculum Coordinator - 1 Desk, 36" x 72" 2 Chair, swivel-type 3 Credenza 4 Chair (2) 5 File cabinet, four-drawer, 6 Computer/furniture/printer, 36" w, legal, lateral, lockable D Bookkeeper - - - 1 Secretary desk 2 Secretary chair 3 Table, 3 I X 5', with chair 4 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, one letter, one legal, lateral, lockable 5 Word processor - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 20 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - 6 Coin counter 7 Check writer 8 Computer/furniture/printer 9 Currency counter 10 Calculator E. Head Secretary 1 Secretary desk 2 Secretary chair 3 Chair (2) 4 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Electric typewriter 6 Computer/word processor/printer/furniture F Secretary Work Area (4) 1 Secretary desk (4) 2 Secretary chair (4) 3 Electric typewriter (4), word processor 4 Storage shelves between desks 5 Computer/printer/furniture G General Reception (Lounge furniture) 1 Cushion arm chair (6) 2 Coffee/end table H. Production Workroom 1 Photocopier. 2 Worktable (2) 3 Chair (8), stackable 4 Table, rectangular 5 Refrigerator I. Conference Room 1 Conference table (2) 2 Cushion arm chair (8) 3 Screen/marker board J. Clinic 1 Secretary desk 2. Secretary chair 3 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Side chair (4) 5 Cot (4) 6 Refrigerator with ice maker 7 Wheel chair 8 Scale H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HSUIl.398 March 1998 21 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - K. Administrative Storage 1 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 2 Storage cabinets/storage shelves (2) 3 Stamp machine 4 Two-way radios 5 Radio charger Desk, 30" x 60" Chair, low-back, executive File cabinet, four-drawer, 36" w, letter, lateral, lockable Side chair (2) Computer/furniture/printer N Dean's AttendancelReception L. YaDlt 1 2 3 M. Ikan 1 2 3 4 5 - - - File cabinet (8), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, fIreproof Safe depository, approximately, 23" x 23" x 361h" single door, combination lock, Key cabinet - - - - - 1 Lounge furniture - end tables, coffee table, chairs for 12 2. Time/date stamp o Computer ArealData Processor 1 Secretary desk/chair (2) 2 Micro computer/word processor system with printers on a I-to-1 process 3 Modem wiring shall be provided for computer 4 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, 42", legal, lateral, lockable P. Security/Itinerant 1 Desk & chair 2. File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 3 Chair (2), stackable Q. Textbook Storage 1 Wall and free-standing shelving, maximum amount R. Counselor (8) - - - - - - 1 Desk, 30" x 60", center drawer 2 Chair, executive, low-back 3 File cabinet, four-drawer, 36", legal, lateral, lockable 4 Arm chair (2), cushion 5 Computer/furniture/printer - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 22 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - S. Itinerant (2) 1 Desk 2 Chair 3 Table, 3' x 5' 4 Chair (4) 5 Display rack T Student Records (minimum one-hour fire rating) 1 File cabinet (12), legal, lateral, lockable 2 Desk, secretarial 3 Chair 4 Copier 5 Carrel (2), wet 6 Computer/furniture/printer 7 Typewriter U Conference 1 Table, 3' x 8' 2. Chair (8), cushion V SecretarylReception Area 1 Desk, secretarial 2. Chair 3 File cabinet (2), legal. lateral. lockable 4 Arm chair (6), cushioned 5 Chair (6), side, cushioned 6 Table, round, 5' diameter 7 Computer/word processor compatible/furniture/printer 8 Time/date stamp w. Career Room 1 Desk 2. Chair, operator's 3 Table (4), 30" x 96" 4 Chair (12), stackable, sled base 5 File cabinet (3), legal, lateral, lockable 6 Computer/furniture/printer IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements B. Acoustical - Sound-proofmg for principal's office, security office and counselors' and deans' offices C. Eloor - Provide resilient tile in offices and workrooms. Provide ceramic tile in toilet rooms Carpeting is limited to principal's office. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\Ill.398 March 1998 23 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - D .walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint fInish throughout office receptions, corridors, workroom and storage Toilets with ceramic - tile, wainscot and impervious smooth fInish above E Ceiling - Acoustical throughout except toilets and clinic with smooth impervious - fImsh. F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. - G Windows - Wherever feasible, especially conference area. In administrative student services wing, windows are to be located with view to campus. Observation window - from secretary stations into clinic and reception areas H. Doors - With viewing glass in dean's and counselor's offices and clinic Security - office keyed separately Larger door in administrative storage and entrance to administration building Provide second exit from principal's office. Records room shall be fireproof. Provide solid core wood for interior; hollow metal for exterior - I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - 1 Workroom: Provide double sink with swing goose neck faucet (HW and CW) 2. Clinic: Provide water closet, lavatory (HW and CW) and shower (HW & CW) Provide shower control valve that compensates for pressure and temperature fluctuations. Provide trap primer for shower drain from water closet supply Design the shower to avoid flooding of the floor while still remaining handicapped accessible. 3 Student Activities: Provide double sink with swing goose neck faucet (HW & CW) 4. Office Toilets: Provide water closet and lavatory (CW) - - - Provide soap and towel dispensers for each sink and lavatory Provide toilet tissue dispensers for each toilet. Provide for disabled. - Provide electric water cooler near office toilets - J Communications - Provide telephone jacks throughout administrative wing. Fire alarm and intercom console to be located in a secure area of administrative suite. Two-way intercom to entire school, AM-FM radio on intercom with cassette. Master clock in combination with Energy Management System. Clocks in each office, conference room, career room, clinic and reception areas. CCTV outlet in principal's office and assistant principal's office - - K. Electrical - 120 - volt duplex outlet on each wall in all areas except toilets 120- volt duplex outlets for office machines and equipment computers, production workroom and career room. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - L. Gas and Air - N/A - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 24 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - M. Safety - Standard. N Fencing - N/A o Service Drives - Refer to TRAFFIC CONTROL P Parking - Refer to TRAFFIC CONTROL. Parking for adIDllllstrators, secretarial staff, and visitors near administrative offices with easy access at all times Q Television - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS R. Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage a. Dean, Counselor. Curriculum Coordinator - Base cabinet, approximately, 8' I x 30" h x 18" d, with laminated counter and adjustable shelves. Provide bookcases (one full wall) b. General Rece.ption (1) Reception counter with shelving; swmgmg door (2) Section of base cabinet along one wall, approximately, 10. - 15' (3) Glass enclosed trophy case. approximately, 4' x 8' c. ProductionIWorkroom (1) Base cabinets with sink along one wall, cabinets above. (2) Work counter along one wall, 40" h. (3) Mail sorting area with a minimum 235 - 250 mailboxes. d. Conference Room - Storage cabinet, approximately, 3' x 5', lockable. Marker board on one wall. e. Dean IS Reception (1) Reception counter with shelving and swinging door (2) Computer area. f Computer Area - Counter along one wall, 6'- 8' I , 30" h, with cabinets, lockable. g. Career Room - Open shelving, approximately, 12' I x 6' h x 12" d. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\Ill.398 March 1998 25 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - h. Restrooms i. j k. - (1) Smk in vanity (2) Horizontal mIrror Textbook Storage - Work counter on one wall WIth shelving below, minimum, 10' Maximum shelving on walls - Records/Vault - One wall of steel shelvmg - Clinic - Base cabinet, 8' I x 3D" h x 18" d, laminated counter, adjustable shelves, sliding doors, wall cabinets, above base, adjustable shelves, lockable. - I. Provide drop safe for deposits and collection of monies, 27 - 5/16" h, x 24-7/16" w x 25-112" d. Each safe shall be provided with a hopper to drop the monies. The hopper shall be on top of the safe and the dimensions for the type shall be 6'114" h x 7'3/4" wand 13-112" d. The safe shall be bolted to the floor This shall be located in bookkeeper's office. - - 2. Built-in Instructional Aids - a. b c d. Marker board, 4' x 8', in conference rooms & career room Tack board, 4' x 4', in conference rooms, production workroom A V screen in conference rooms Tackboard (one full wall) in guidance offices, career room, and dean's office - - s. Other Considerations - 1 Lobby and Reception Area - a. PBX b Public Address 2. Computer Area - a. Computer with printer & appropriate furniture - 3 ProductionIWork Room a. b c. - Copier station Stencil machine station Ditto machine station - 4. Security officer shall be located so that radio communications do not interfere with computer/data processing - 5 Curriculum coordinator's office shall be located near the main admmistration office complex. It shall have doors operung to the hall - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1L398 March 1998 26 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Administrative/Student Personnel Services Adm IlllstratIve Clinic R=Res croom AdmlOlS(fa{(velSruden( PersolUlel Services - - Adminim-ative/Student Person.Rcl ServIces - Student Personnel ServIces - ----- ~ajs - - - - - - - - - - / \ ~ ~ - Deans ) - ~ Bo' - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 Administrative/Student Personnel Services - ART I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY A community high school is comprised of students with a wide range of abilities, interests and social backgrounds A variety of course offerings provides many opportunities for students to develop their artistic talents The courses are designed to develop aesthetic sensitivity and to encourage the pursuit of excellence in artistic self-expression. Through the art program, students shall learn to appreciate past and present artistic expressions of others, and in so doing, expand their own horizons and develop an awareness of the role of artists in society II. PROGRAM GOALS A. To develop proficiency in the use of a variety of tools, materials and techniques B To develop understanding of the elements and principles of design. c. To develop students' abilities to judge art intelligently D To increase students' understanding and appreciation of the visual arts E. To develop accurate visual perception. F To challenge students with the responsibility of working toward excellence. G To provide opportunities for recognition of outstanding student work through participation in local, state and national competitions. H To help students learn to value both the artistic expressions of their peers and the work of historically significant artists. I. To encourage an attitude of respect for, and aesthetic appreciation of, the students' own environment. J To provide direction for students who are seeking art-related careers K. To inspire creativity so that students' lives may be enriched. III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Photography B Commercial Art c Ceramics D Fibers/fabrics E. Drawing F Painting G Crafts H. Printmaking I. Provisions to be made for the handicapped H. \DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lIl.398 March 1998 27 Art - IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period-2Q.... Total No of Teachers ~ Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used....:L:r...- - - V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES - A hard-surface patio area of, approximately, 2,000 sq ft., is being recommended. The patio shall be accessible from each laboratory and shall have planting areas for greenery and adequate drainage. A "lattice-effect" patio cover shall be provided that is stable enough to support hanging plants, sculpture (190 lbs maximum), etc. Roof overhang shall be 12' for ceramics laboratory and 8' for other laboratories Sculpture court will be used as an instructional area, square footage of sculpture court is included in the 34 % circulation allotment. - - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F ) - A. Pottery area of 350 nsf has been added to accommodate additional storage for special equipment; part of a resource room nsf has been folded into the pottery area. - - B Three darkrooms shall be combined into one space; three kiln areas shall be combined into one space. - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST I No. of I DescrifIlonoCAreas I Square Feet I Areas Per Unit I Total ART 1 Pottery Area 350 1 Ceramics Laboratory 1,590 1 DrawinglPainting 1,590 1 PrintmakinglPhotography 1,590 3 Kiln Room (combined into 1 space) 60 180 3 Project Storage 150 450 3 Material Storage 155 465 3 Darkroom (combined into 1 space) 100 300 1 Teacher Planning (@ S) 300 1 Sculpture Court - 50 % Covered - TOTAL ~ - - - - - - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 28 Art - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Drawing/Painting 1 Easel (12) 2 Art desk/stool (30) 3 Teacher's desk/chaIr 4 Light table 5 Mat cutter 6 Paper cutter table (2) 7 Paper cutter, 36" 8 Large work table (2) 9 Art horse (15) 10 Architectural horizontal storage fIle (2), five-drawer, lockable 11 Staging package -- model/still-life 12. Tote trays (210) 13 Carrel (2), wet 14 Drying rack 15 Tripod lamp (4 - 6) 16 Shrink wrap system 17 Mobile roll file 18 Projector stand 19 Painting racks 20 Paper roll storage unit, table top 21 Computer (8) printer B. Printmaking/Photogr~hy 1 Student art desk (30) 2 Architectural horizontal storage file (2), five-drawer, lockable 3 Table (2), 3' x 6' 4 Stool (30) 5 Teacher desk/chair 6 Light table (vac-u-lite) 7 Drying rack 8 Paper cutter table, 36" 9 Mat cutter 10 Air compressor 11 Air brush stations (6) 12 Ice maker refrigerator for chemicals, under counter 13 Tote tray (210) 14 Drymount press 15 Copy stand 16 Photo paper trimmer 17 Print dryer 18 Hanging safe light (2) 19 Mobile roll file H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\U1.398 March 1998 29 Art - 20 Negative dryers (3) 21 Garbage can on rollers (3) 22 Computer (8), printer - C. Sculpture/Ceramics - 1 Sculpture stands (12) 2 Garbage can on rollers (3) - 3 Potter's wheel (11 & one for handicapped) 4 Potter's wheel stools (11) 5 Teacher's desk/chair - 6 Wedging table (2) 7 Stool (25) 8 Spray booth - 9 Work benches/locker (6) 10 Slab roller (2) 11 Pug mill, with storage for chemicals - 12 Kiln (2), electric 13 Kiln, Raku -- on patio - 14 Scroll saw 15 Paper cutter - 18" square 16 Paper cutter - 30" square - 17 Tote tray (180) 18 Glaze storage unit 19 Wet-dry vac - 20 Hand vacuum, small 21 Mobile art center 22. Heat-proof kiln cart - 23 Clay extruder, with hollow disc kit 24 Kiln shelf cart 25 Drying cabinet (2) - 26 Ware cart 27 Dolly 28 Hand drill (2), with a paint mixer - 29 Shelving for greenware and bisque for 5 classes 30 Computer (8), printer - D. Darkroom - 1 Refrigerator, under counter 2 Cabinet storage 3 Enlargers plus timers - 4 Paper trimmer - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 30 Art - E. Teacher Planning 1 Teach work carrel (5), with shelf ., 2 Chair (5), padded seat and back, casters, without arms 3 Conference table, 72" x 30" 4 File cabinet (3), three drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Computer (3), printer 6 Shelving for storage of textbooks IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/V entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements 1 Ceramics Laboratory. Provide exhaust and make-up air systems for spray booth. 2 Provide emergency exhaust and make-up system for each laboratory 3 Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. B. Acoustical - Standard. C. EIoor 1 Laboratories - non-porous tile. 2. Potter's wheel area shall be concrete floor sealed with a hard resin. 3 Water shall not flow from potter's wheel area into classroom when hosing down. D. :waIL 1 Bulletin board surface where space allows, including darkroom and cabinet fronts 2 Ceramic tile or smooth surface walls 5' h in wheel area. 3 Darkroom painted flat charcoal gray 4 Prepared area for showing films in laboratories. E. Ceiling - Approximately, 12' h. DO NOT drop ceilings. Sculpture laboratory shall have a system of hooks to support, approximately, 150 pds each, used to hang weaving frames, drying lines, print plate lines, mobiles, etc. A minimum of (6) hooks are needed in the student work area. Darkroom shall have plaster ceiling, not a false ceiling. It shall be painted black. F. Lighting - Fluorescent in all areas including processing rooms, except darkroom, needs fluorescent and incandescent, 30 watt, red light, 4' above sink in darkroom, red "in use" light above door leading to darkroom. Display windows (2) in hallway shall have strip lighting across top and down both comers next to glass in front inside of window Flood lights in patio area. Area control of laboratory lighting with (2) or (3) separate switches H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 31 Art - G Windows - Visual access to patio area, 4-112 ft. to ceiling must open for ventilation. Natural north light. No skylights Complete room darkening, including interruption of emergency lighting, must be possible for effective A/V equipment and subjects for drawing - - H. Doors - Doors into laboratories to accommodate equipment and disabled students Doors leading to patio area from each laboratory Two-door arrangement leading into darkroom. Solid door with return air vent into kiln room Doors from each laboratory to patio can be single leaf One heavy duty "slop-type" sink on outside wall, with plaster trap that can be cleaned from outside the room with hose. Exterior hose connection adjacent to traps outside of each laboratory on patio - - I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures - Each laboratory shall have one, triple, stainless steel sink near entrance door and one, 8 I stainless steel sink with four individually controlled faucets Double sink outside wheel area of ceramics laboratory Hose connections in wheel area and outside of each laboratory Hot and cold water at all faucets except on patio Plaster traps on all sinks. Four drainage beds in patio area. In darkroom, thermostatically controlled hot and cold water and ice maker connection. Filter system on all water Plumbing in darkroom shall be PVC or stainless steel, not copper Provide plaster trap and sink in ceramics laboratory Drinking water fountain shall be added to sink faucet in each laboratory Floor drains with mud traps in pottery wheel area. - - - - J Communications - Standard. - K. Electrical - Panic button switches in all laboratories Outlets outside each laboratory on patio - L. Gas and Air - N/A - M. Safety - Separate air handlers in all laboratories Panic button switches in all laboratories shall be located near teacher station and away from student traffic areas Exhaust fan to outside in each laboratory, kiln room and darkroom. Small fenced area on patio for secure storage of five-gallon buckets for mixing glazes - - N Fencing - 6' fence around patio area, double swing-out gate. 6' chain link fence to enclose kiln area on patio Metal mesh fence with lockable gate to secure pug mill area. - o Service Drives - Service drive to sculpture/ceramics shall be accessible to patio area gate for delivery of heavy items and loading of art work for community display - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 32 Art - p rarking - Parking shall be accessible for commuruty school classes Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage (Do not use composition or pressed fiber board) a. All Laboratories (1) Storage, 7' h, adjustable, for seven classes, crafts and ceramics only, can be stationary in ceramICS Cabmets shall be double door with separate locks (2) Full-height teacher's cabinet. (3) Full-height example storage, adjustable shelving (4) Base cabinet with 8' stainless steel sink. (5) Base cabinet with double sink outside potter's wheel area. (6) Storage to fit specific needs as required by laboratory (a) Ceramics - shelves, large, deep, nonadjustable and damp box unit with heavy wire shelving. (b) Painting - shelves, vertical, horizontal, adjustable. (7) Tote tray, 7' h, storage for two classes (8) Shelving, 12", 18", 24" and 36" full-height, adjustable, in material storage on available wall space. (9) Open shelving, 18", in potter's wheel area on available wall, space to begin 4' from floor (10) Open shelving, 12" full-height, in kiln room on available wall space. (11) Counter, 3' d, for enlarger & paper trimmer, dark room only Provide individual spaces for enlarger, 30" x 30", separated by dividers. (12) Open shelving near classroom entrance for students personal items In all laboratories, each storage cabinet door and drawers shall be lockable, including darkroom. Formica counter tops in laboratories except ceramics laboratory where slate tops are needed. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1I1.398 March 1998 33 Art - 2. Built-in Instructional Aids - a. One marker board, at least 12 I w, in each laboratory near teacher desk area. Do not allow cabinets to obstruct view of marker board. - 3 Other Built-ins - a. Recessed display cabinet in hallway (2), approxlIDately, 6' h x 3' w x 18" d. - b Each laboratory to have 12" x 18" x 26" shelving, lockable. R. Other Considerations - 1 Computer hook-up in each laboratory shall be located in carrel - 2. Space between cabinet top, 4', and ceiling to be used for still-life objects and drying of large projects. A portion of 4 I space shall have shelving to maximize storage. - 3 The visual and performing arts shall have their facilities designed and constructed in proximity to media center and theatre/auditorium. - 4 Potter's wheel area separated by a half-wall from general classroom area. - 5 Protection from weather shall be provided for kiln on patio 6 Patio shall not adjoin areas where odor from raku kiln would be offensive, e g ,home economics, cafeteria. - 7 Provide shrubs/or hedge in front of wall around sculpture court to prevent students from sitting on wall. Wall, to be, approximately, 36" h. - 8 Provide vented storage cabinets in ceramics laboratory and solid doors with tack board in other laboratory - 9 Add overhead cabinets above the sinks in each laboratory - 10 In the darkroom, a silver recovery system shall be in accordance with the SDPBC current policy of the Department of Regulatory Compliance. - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1lI.398 March 1998 34 Art - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Art D MS Material Storage PS Project Storage Art - AUDITORIUM - I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY - This auditorium shall provIde an all-encompassing facihty whereby students and community have the opportunity to participate in and experience the multi-disciplined interrelationships of vIsual and performing arts - II. PROGRAM GOALS - To develop a state-of-the-art facility for student and commuruty use that allows performance and participation in all areas of the fme arts - ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES Program activities will be accessible to all age groups and all disciplines of the arts, e.g , assemblies, dramatic presentations, film and multi-media programs, visual art presentations, choral and instrumental programs, dance, staff and community development programs, etc - - IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE - Teacher - Student Ratio ~ Student Capacity Per Periods -83i. Total No of Teachers ~ Total No of Aides (If Applicable) .JjJA Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 and Community Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used School and Community Hours - V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES - Facility is designed for multiple use. Innovations include the following: - A. Technical construction workshop B Art gallery C Video control booth D Lobby to feature large art gallery E. Computer capability, in house intercom, audio visual ability - - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F.) - A. Technical construction workshop included for on-site building comes from two resource rooms and material storage allotment. B Video control room/projection room for technical control for theatre. C Storage for band seats and music stands. D Storage of 1,255 nsf divided into 1 @ 800 nsf; 1 @ 205 nsf; and 2 @ 125 nsf. E 830 nsf from general administrative reception space is to be incorporated into stage and wings to increase the size from 990 nsf to 1,820 nsf - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 35 Auditorium - F Approximately, 100 - 125 nsf from lobby/art gallery has been folded into increasing the video control/projection room. VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. or Square Feet Areas Description or Areas Per Unit I Total AUDITORIUM 1 Seating (835) 7,521 1 Stage and Wings 1,820 1 Technical/Construction Workshop (2 Resource Rooms) (1,140) 1 Storage 1,254 2 Dressing Room 627 1,254 1 Video Control Room/Projection Room 200 1 Lobbyl Art Gallery 1,130 1 Green roomIRecording room from music (225) 1 Concession 200 2 Ticket Booth ---3Q 60 TOTAL 13.439 VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Seating Area 1 Portable marker board, standard 2. Lectern with microphone and input to main sound system 3 Lectern, Port-a-sound 4 Chair lift for handicapped near stage 5 Seat (835), folding seat B. Stage Area 1 Concert grand piano, 9', acoustically verified and with dolly/cover 2 Portable, acoustical shell for band and choral performances 3 Curtain/scrim, manual 4 Orchestra Pit: piano, upright; piano rampllift; pit cover H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HSUII.398 March 1998 36 Auditorium C. Technical- Construction Workshop 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Radial arm saw Band saw Table saw Drill press Shop work tables (3 - 5), heavy-duty, wood, 4' x 6' Tool cabinet, lockable Storage cabinet for flammable materials, lockable D Dressing Room (2 required) 1 Finished stools as appropriate for vanity area (24) @ 13" for vanity counter, 30" h Full-length mirror in both dressing rooms Student lockers, (20 minimum) 2 3 E. Video Control and Projection Room 1 Sound board for theatre with wireless microphones & system 2 Computerized dimmer lighting board for theatre 3 Multi-image projection system, optional item 4 Intercom to ticket booth, orchestra, stage r & 1, dressing rooms, technical construction workshop, remote control units, catwalks, projection room, recording (green) room, control room 5 Interfaced movie projector (2) 6 Stool (4) 7 Slide projector with remote control for A V in booth (that has a remote control at stage also) 8 File cabinet (2), fout-drawer 9 RF outlets inion stage floor (8) and pit area (5) that can be used for video cameras that are being monitored by the person(s) in recording room. Need monitor capability in the pit and control projection room in back area of theatre. 10 Hanging microphones (4), on stage front plus outlets in stage area for standing microphones F. Green Room (See Music. Section Q.1.b. Recording room) 1 2 3 4 5 Sofa (2), three-seat Coffee table Lounge chair (2), executive-type Mirror, full-length End table with lamps H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\Ill.398 March 1998 37 Auditorium . . . - - - - - - - . . - - - - - - - G Costume Storage 1 Cedar closet (2), 8' I x 6' h x 30" d 2 Maximum racks H. Miscellaneous Items 1 Consideration shall be given to ventilation and life/safety needs (dust collectors, etc.) in the technical/construction workshop area. 2 Microphone outlets (20) throughout theatre - also five "fly" microphones in mid stage I. Lobby/Art Gallery 1 Portable easels 2 Lobby furniture 3 Benches J Ticket Booth 1 Stool (2), padded K. Orchestra Pit/Stage Area 1 Piano lift 2 Piano, upright 3 Pit cover IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heatil\g/CoolinglVentilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. At the start of Phase n design, discuss HV AC systems with the Senior Engineer, Department of Architect Services. Typically, the HV AC systems will include the following: 1. Lobby and seating area. Provide HV ACsystem with separate temperature control zones. 2. Stage and associated areas: Provide HV AC system with separate temperature control zones for stage/wings, dressing rooms and workshop 3. Piano storage: Provide small dehumidifier 4. Workshop. Provide vent for flammable materials storage cabinet. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 38 Auditorium - B Acoustical c floo!: D .'Walls E. Ceiling - 1 Acoustical treatment for natural projection of a lecturer's voice without the aid of a P A system. Portable, acoustical shell for choral and band performances - 2 - 1 2 3 4 Unfinished, right-cut pine stage floor, stained dark. Seating area sloped, carpeted concrete floor Aisles, rubberized flooring Green room carpeted. - - 1 2 Design for acoustical control. Fabric-covered, tackable vinyl wall covering in lobby/concession area. - - 1 2 3 Designed by acoustical engineer Catwa1k(s) to be lOcated over seating area for theatre light instrumentation. Ceiling above stage to be 2 to 2-112 times height of proscenium to facilitate weight/counterweight system. Ceilings as high as possible in lobby and gallery - - 4 F Lighting - 1 2 3 4 Ceiling lights in seating area attached to dimmer system. Track lighting in art gallery/lobby area. Spotlight (3), in projection booth. Auditorium, backstage and projection room - adequate lighting is necessary for each section of the auditorium. Each section shall contain adjustable spotlights, banks of fluorescent overhead down-lamps, overhead fixed-surface lighting lamps, aisle down-lamps, etc., all on separate circuits and controlled from projection room. Provide standard theatre stage lights, remotely operated. An overhead grid system with catwa1k(s) shall house the specially designed stage lighting system. A proven stage lighting engineer and working stage electricians must be consulted. Overall, three complete separate lighting systems are needed. Each shall have separate circuitry and dimmer panels. - - - - 5 - a. b c Stage lighting Incandescent general lighting in seating area Fluorescent general lighting in seating area and on stage - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HSUU.398 March 1998 39 Auditorium - Controls for these systems shall be located in the projection room. 6 Dressing rooms need special makeup lights on wall mirrors, length of wall. Multiple, small high wattage lights 7 Projection room lighting on rheostats 8 Green room - dIffused overhead lIghting G Windows 1 Vision windows from lobby to art garden and from projection room to theater 2 Slotted window on ticket booth. H. Doors 1 Overhead door at rear entrance to technical construction workshop 2. Double doors leading to seating area from lobby 3 Double glass door at entrance to art garden. 4 Double door with no center post to property storage and piano storage. 5 Piano storage - doors swing out. I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures 1 Drinking fountains in lobby 2 Sinks and toilet facilities in both dressing rooms. 3 Scrub sink in property storage and technical construction workshop 4 Drinking fountains on both sides of stage and outside of dressing rooms 5 Double sink in technical construction workshop 6 Sprinkler system in art garden for plant irrigation. J Communications 1 All items as stated in equipment needed for video projection room (VITI) 2. Five microphone inputs in orchestra pit; four microphone inputs in front stage; four microphone inputs on stage 3 Stage monitor speakers 4 Dressing room/recording, green room, monitor speakers 5 Appropriate communication, wireless system for hearing impaired. 6 Telephone jack in ticket booth. 7 Wired for ITV, with c1osed-circuit capability for stage and seating area. 8 Computer capability, in house. Intercom, audio/visual ability easily accessible throughout. K. Electrical 1 Electrical wiring designed by professional theatre lighting consultant for stage lighting in auditorium, on stage and in video projection studio H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lU.398 March 1998 40 Auditorium Wiring for technical construction workshop designed by technical design consultant. Maximum allowable receptacles in each area, including orchestra pit. Dressing room - duplex outlets 2 3 4 - - L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety Fireproof curtain. Overhead sprinkler system. Catwalk(s) shall have easy access from projection room and shall be a solid permanent structure with railings Structure shall be tall enough for standing and wide enough for sitting with safety Lights shall be mounted so as to be reached easily and safely from catwalk. Technical construction workshop shall meet all safety regulations 1 2 3 4 - - - - N Fencing - Half wall to serve as security around outside art garden. - o Service Drives - Overhead door of backstage in technical construction work-shop shall open to a ramp for deliveries and transportation of props, scenery and A V equipment. - P. Parking - Easy access to auditorium complex. - Q Built-ins - 1. Seating Area - Cushioned seats (835) - 2. Stage Area a. b c. d. e f. g Stage curtains with tormentors, teasers, laced-down cyclorama and scrim Grid Weight and counterweight system Lighting battens Rear projection system A V screen Intercom stations - - - 3. Ticket booth - Counter top with drawers for use with ticket sales. - 4. Lobby/Art Gallery a. b c. d. - Lighted, glass cases and encased shelving Hooks in ceiling for hanging art Lighted, glass case inside and outside lobby area for events displays Benches in art garden. - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\llI.398 March 1998 41 Auditorium - 5 Video Projection Room a. b c d 6. Storage a. b Counter under vision windows with shelvmg and large drawer space Secured eqUIpment storage cabinet Counter and shelves for editing systems Wall-mounted monitor shelves Open shelving on two walls One large locked cabinet, approximately, 72" h x 24" d x 72" w 7. Dressing Rooms - Vanity counter (24), 30" h with drawers and cabinets, locked wardrobe cabinet (length of one side of room), student lockers (20 minimum) 8. Technical Construction Workshop - Lumber storage area and flat storage area, student lockers (20), counter (minimum 81) with drawers around sink area, regular storage cabinets. 9. Concession - Two rows of shelving under counter, approximately, 24" d x 101 1, adjustable shelves with a 2" lip; three rows of adjustable shelving on opposite wall from counter Begin 4' from floor, approximately, 24" d X 10' I with a 2" lip R. Other Considerations 1 Choral/instrumental music rooms /building shall be located behind stage area of auditorium. 2. Video Control Projection room shall be on a second floor, accessed by ramp to facilitate movement of equipment. 3 Sunken orchestra pit with appropriate entrance with ramp for piano and instruments 4 A portion of the storage area shall be allotted for storage of grand piano This shall be a separate room with its own climate control. 5 Ceilings in lobby/art gallery shall be maximum height. 6 The art garden shall be designed for minimum maintenance. s. AudiolVisual - Equipment shall be as stated throughout above plan, state-of-the- art, designated by appropriate consultants H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\Ill.398 March 1998 42 Auditorium C = Concession C/p Control/Projection Booch C Creenroom R Res t room T Ticket Booch cdspecs\hs\gcncncU50S.hs Scpccmber - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Auditorium - - - - - - - Seat.::f.ng - - - - - - - - - Audicoflum - - COMPUTER EDUCATION Skills Development Laboratory I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY All students shall have the opportunity to gain an understanding of capabilities, applications and social impact of computer technology As our technology increases more rapidly, it is important for a person to adapt to this changing technology ll. PROGRAM GOALS Students will have an opportunity to A. Study computer capabilities and limitations B Investigate computer-related careers C. Develop problem solving ability with computers D Acquire a desire for optimum development in computer education E. Study different computer languages F Be creatively challenged commensurate with ability ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES The following courses will be taught in Computer Laboratory' A. Introduction to Computers B Computer Applications C BASIC I, II D Computer Programming II E. Advanced Placement Computer Science F PASCAL G FORTRAN H COBAL IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period~ Total No of Teachers -A.... Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-2- v. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A general purpose CEI Laboratory is planned which can be used by all departments on a scheduled basis Teachers would be able to integrate computer-enhanced instruction into their own curriculum area. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\UI.398 March 1998 43 Computer Education - IV JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQillREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) - N/ A - V PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total COMPUTER EDUCATION 2 Computer Laboratory 960 1,920 2 Material Storage 90 180 1 CEI Resource Room (included in Resource Room allotment) (570) (570) 1 Material Storage 1 Teacher Planning --200 TOTAL ~ - - - - - - VI. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Laboratory Introduction to Computer 1 Computer table (16), 3D" x 48" - 2. Chair (32), operator's 3 Student modular unit (30) 4 File cabinet (2), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable - 5 Computer (30) (selection coordinated with DMS)/printer (2) 6 Teacher desk 7 Teacher chair - 8 Interface black box (4) B. Laboratory Advanced Computer - 1 Modular unit (30), 3D" x 48" in each laboratory 2 Chair (32), operator's in each laboratory 3 File cabinet, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, two in each laboratory 4 Computer with minimum 256K RAM (30), dual floppy disks/printer (2) Network board to be coordinated with DMS 5 Computer with minimum 256K RAM 20 MB fIxed disk, Network board to be coordinated with DMS 6 DOT Matrix printer (6) speed of 200 cps 7 Interface black box (6) 8 Teacher desk 9 Teacher chaIr - - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 44 Computer Education - C. Teacher Planning 1 Teacher carrel (3) 2 Teacher chair (3) 3 Copier with stand 4 File cabinet (3), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Computer/printer IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/CoolingIV entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements B. Acoustical - Standard. C. Door - Resilient tile. D :waJIs - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint fInish. E. Ceiling - Acoustical. F. Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G. Windows - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS, secure labs. H. Doors - Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for interior I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with gooseneck faucet (CW) J. Communications - Standard. K. Electrical - One duplex outlet per station plus one surge protector per station in laboratories and resource room. L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - N/A N. Fencing - N/A 0 Service Drives - N/A P Parking - N/A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\l1l.398 March 1998 45 Computer Education ~-~---~------------- - Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage ., - a. Laboratories and Resource room - Cabinet, approximately, 3 I h x 8' I x 30" d - b Material Storage - Cabinet (2), approximately, 7'h x 4' w x 18" d - c. Teacher Planning - Counter space with cabinet below and open shelving above. - d. Bookcases - 30" h, with adjustable shelves, wall length in teacher planning - 2. Built-in instructional aids - a. Laboratories - One porcelain marker board, tack board, approximately, 12' - b. Resource room - One porcelain marker board, tack board, approximately, 6' - c. Computer Station - In Teacher Planning area. - R. Other Considerations 1 Provide bookcases in each classroom, 30" h, with adjustable shelves 2. Map rail tack strip in all classrooms above marker board. - - - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1I1.398 March 1998 46 Computer Education - HS = Material Scorage SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Computer Education Computer Education - CUSTODIAL - I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Staff and students can expect a clean healthful environment in which to teach and learn. A properly organized and trained custodial staff has the ability to ensure the sanitation and regular cleaning of any facility, if their cleaning program IS supported through the cooperation of the entire staff and student body Custodians are allocated based on the size of the school (square feet) in sufficient numbers to maintain the cleanliness of the facility and care must be exercised that cleaning is their primary function. Redirection of the custodial staff to non-cleaning functions can severely impact the cleanliness of the facility Staff and students help ensure the success of a custodial program through avoiding abuse of the facility Our investment in school facilities is protected by initial provision and utilization of sufficient, effective equipment and personnel. - - - - II. PROGRAM GOALS - To provide a safe, sanitary and aesthetically acceptable learning and work environment through proper utilization of human resources, material, equipment and methods. - ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES - A. Prepare and maintain adherence to work schedules to ensure regular, daily cleaning of the entire facility in accordance with "Instructional Handbook for Custodians. " - B Maintain personal use facilities (restrooms, water fountains, shower rooms, sinks) in clean and sanitary condition to minimum standards of State Requirements for - Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F) regulations and III accordance with the "Instructional Handbook for Custodians " - C Assure that school grounds are kept free of litter and safety hazards - D Report all hazardous conditions immediately E. Observe and adhere to all safety and fire regulations regarding storage of material and maintenance and use of equipment. - F Maintain security of buildings during non-school hours - G Report any items in facility III need of repair - H. Maintain custodial equipment so that it is clean and usable at all times. I. Use only authorized materials, methods and equipment to accomplish program goals. - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 47 Computer Education - J Maintain orderly storage and running inventory of custodial supplies and reorder as necessary for timely replacement. K. Attend training classes as provIded. IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Approximate custodial staff -2!L V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES Personnel - Desired trend is to employ more competent custodians with better organized work schedules, in-service training and supervision. Total staff shall be able to read and write and must be able to communicate in English. Custodial Foreperson must have demonstrated ability to perform in accordance with all requirements of the position. VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F.) Furniture holding area is used to hold furniture that is being returned to warehouse for repair or disposal. Equipment storage area is used to store large items of maintenance equipment. Custodial nsf of 2,758 calculated at the norm, minus 250 nsf for P .E. outdoor storage, leaves 2,508 nsf. VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST I No. of I Description of Areas I Square Feet I Areas Per Unit I Total CUSTODIAL 1 Central Receiving, Service Closets, Lockersl Restrooms (including shower), Workroom with Securable Storage (woven 2,508 wire mesh partitions), Office* 1 Flammable Storage 150 1 Furniture Holding Area 200 1 Equipment Storage JOO TOTAL ~ H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 48 Custodial - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Central Receiving Room. Office. Workroom"" 1 Metal desk with desk chair 2 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 3 ChaIr (2) 4 Table, 30" x 72" 5 Chair (12), standard 6 Workbench with 3" vise 7 Automatic time clock 9 Time card rack 1 0 Bulletin board, 3' x 5' 11 Personal lockers - one per custodial employee 12. File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, non-locking 13 Two-way radio, (minimum of 12), with chargers 14 Computer terminal/printer/furniture, coordinated by DMS 15 Refrigerator 16 Microwave oven - - - - - - B. Service Closets - 1 Mop and broom rack 2 Shelving for supplies, adjustable - C. Restroom/Locker Area 1 Fixtures as per state regulations 2 Shower 3 Apron (18), step saver - - D. Equipment - 1 Stepladder (20), -- (3 - 10',7 - 8',9 - 3', & 1- 12') 2 Custodial cart (15), flat board cart (2) 3 Vacuum cleaner (11), heavy-duty, wet/dry-type, with accessories 4 Vacuum cleaner (4), upright, high productivity with beater bar 5 Vacuum cleaner (18), back-pack type with accessories 6 Yard and leaf blower, gasoline-powered, hand-held (6) 7 Floor machine (6), high speed, 275-300 rpm, with high speed drive block 8 Floor machine (12), standard, 18" with 3M Instalock block 9 Floor machine, high speed, whirl-a-matic twin, battery-powered 10 Extension ladder, 16' 11 Sweeper, battery-powered, walk behind (2) 12 High speed burmsher, 20", AC-powered 13 Riding sweeper, gasoline-powered - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 49 Custodial - 14 Truck battery-powered 15 Golf cart (2), battery-powered 16 Walk-off mat (10 rolls), to provide protection at all entrances 17 Pressure sprayer, gasoline-powered, 1200 PSI (2) 18 Tank sprayer, plastic (16) 19 20-gallon htter receptacle (20) 20 Platform truck - 24" x 48" (4) 21 BIg Wheel (8), 44-gallon, 22" x 31" x 38" 22 Bucket dolly (16) 23 Hand truck, standard (6) 24 Hand truck with stair climber (2) 25 Hand truck (lift-a-file) 26 Billy Goat (2), gas-powered 27 Drying fan (3) 28 Desk mover (4), adjustable 29 Desk mover (4), standard 30 Desk mover (2), student 31 Panel mover (2) 32 High lift telescopic ladder, platfonn height 33 Automatic scrubber, 31-112", battery-powered 34 Automatic wax applicator (2) 35 Hand carpet sweeper (12) 36 Push sweeper (2), minitriver 37 Washer/dryer, small, commercial E. Flammable Storage 1 Appropriate shelving and cabinets IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. HeatinglCooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS B. Acoustical - Standard. C. Eloo!: - Base non-slip impervious materials in central receiving and flammable storage. Ceramic tile in toilet room. Resilient tile in office D Walls - Impervious finish in toilet and service closets. One third of central receiving shall be partitioned with wire mesh for security storage. E. Ceiling - Acoustical. Impervious finish on gypsum board in wet areas. F Lighting - Fluorescent, except explosion proof in flammable storage area. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lII.398 March 1998 50 Custodial - G Windows - Provide window from custodian's office to custodial workroom and central receIving - H. Doors - Metal, lockable, extra wide or overhead for receiving Metal for flammable storage area, with at least 5' w opening Doors to custodial closets shall swing out. Provide 4' w door to workroom and receiving room. Provide double door access to furniture holding area - - I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures 1 Central receiving: Provide floor mounted service sink (HW & CW) Provide floor drains with trap primers from water closet supplies Provide kitchenette, electric water cooler and washer/dryer 2. Service closets: Provide floor mounted service sink (HW & CW) 3 Lockers/toilets: Provide water closet, lavatory (HW & CW) and shower (HW & CW) - - - J Communications - Intercom, two-way, between main office and central receiving/workroom. Telephone in custodial office (blocked to prevent unauthorized calls) Two-way portable communication (walkie-talkie) between custodial staff and admmistration. - K. Electrical - Central recelvmg - two, 120-volt, duplex outlets in each wall, approximately, 4' from floor Service closets - one, 120-volt, duplex outlet in each. Flammable storage - vapor-proof, explosion-proof, light fixture. Outlets for recharging carts in main area. Provide electric for washer, dryer, kitchenette, refrigerator in central receiving Outlets for appliances Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - - L. Gas and Air - N/A - M. Safety 1. Central Receiving/StoragelWorkroom - a. First aid kit, wall-mounted, eyewash station, safety shower b Fire extinguishers per State Requirements for Educational Facilities (S.R.E.F ) regulations c Mesh partition to secure supplies - - 2. Flammable Storage - a Fire extinguisher b Fire blanket - N Fencing - Metal fencing in central receiving for separate storage areas Lockable fence in custodial workroom. - H. IDA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 51 Custodial - o Service Drives - Service drive to central receiving storage area with loading area and stairs P Parking - Storage and charging area for battery-powered carts Q Built-ins 1 Service closets: Adjustable, 12" d shelving, approximately, 5', mid-wall-to- ceihng 2. Central receiving: Adjustable, 18" d, steel shelving, floor-to-ceiling on all walls, plus free-standing shelving to provide storage. 3 Provide counter with sink, refrigerator and water fountain in locker area. R. Other Considerations 1 Recess fire extinguishers and drinking fountains 2. Provide door width by 3' recess, with grill, without drain, at exterior doors 3 Provide inclines instead of steps 4 Provide non-carpeted "wet areas" in front of all sinks, drinking fountains, and at entrances to all student restrooms 5 Trash compactor, located in depressed area, to accept and compact all trash and garbage for pick-up by local trash contractor H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1ll.398 March 1998 52 Custodial - - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS - Custodial - - - Cencral Rece:iving/ Service Closeb;/Lod:-ers/ Uorl::room/Resttooms/Scorage/ Office - - - - - - - - - - - - Cus(odial - DRIVER EDUCATION I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY In accordance with total school philosophy II. PROGRAM GOALS In accordance with school goals ill. PROGRAM ACTMTIES A. Teacher Activities 1 Lectures 2 Audio-visual presentation 3 Demonstrations 4 Evaluation of students 5 Maintenance of records 6 Preparation and planning 7 Driving instruction on street B. Student Activities 1 Large group discussion 2 Small group work 3 Demonstrations 4 Display models and mock-ups 5 Psycho-physical testing 6 View audio-visual materials 7 Test taking (verbal and written) 8 Demonstrate driving ability in vehicle IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period....J!L Total No of Teachers -L Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 -12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-.:J..:L.. V. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES Resource room needed for simulators, refer to section called R. Other Considerations. H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IU.398 March 1998 53 Driver Education - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) - .\ N/A VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST - No. of Square Feet Areas Description or Areas Per Unit I Total DRIVER EDUCATION 1 Classroom 810 1 Material Storage ...2Q 900 1 Resource Room (included in Resource Room allotment) (570) 1 Material Storage - TOTAL ~ - - - - - - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Classroom Student chair (30) - 1 2 Teacher's desk 3 Teacher's chair - 4 Table, approximately, 30" w x 60" I 5 Chair (6), stackable 6 File cabinet, three-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable - 7 Teacher lectern 8 Movie screen, to be determined by company and room size 9 Computer (6), printer - B. Resource Room - 1 Simulator (16), one to accommodate physically challenged. 2 Movie screen 3 Teacher lectern - 4 Table, approximately, 30" w x 60" I 5 Computer (4), printer - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 54 Driver Education - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSID- ERATIONS B. Acoustical - Standard. C. Eloor - Provide floor wiring for sixteen simulators or nsers Provide resilient tile in classroom and storage D. Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board with paint finish. E. Ceiling - Acoustical. F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Standard in classroom, observation window is needed between classroom and resource room. H. Doors - One door between the classroom and resource room is needed. Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - To wash cars, provide hose bibb J. Communications - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS K. Electrical - Wiring to adapt or accommodate sixteen simulators. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. L Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - Standard. N Fencing - N/A o Service Drives - N/ A P Parking - Provide for parking convenient to classroom for the driver education vehicle H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 55 Driver Education - - Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage - a. Classroom - Cabinet, lockable, approximately, 4' h x 6' I x 24" d, with adjustable shelves _ Bookcase on one wall, three rows, approximately, 30"h, with adjustable shelves - b. Material Storage - Cabinet along major wall, 7' h x 18" d x 8' I - 2. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Classroom - Tack board (2), approximately, 4' x 4', marker board, approximately, 16' I, wall-mounted A V screen. - - R. Other Considerations - Driver Education classroom shall be located directly next to the room that will contain the driving simulators. There shall be an observation window and a lockable door between the rooms. This will allow for the instructor to work with students using the simulators and also via the window and door supervise students working at the desks. - - - - - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IU.398 March 1998 56 Driver Education - SPATIAL RELATIONSBlPS Dnver Educatlon / Resource \ \ Room / "- --- ..-/ ial age Onvcr Educauon - EXCEPTIONAL STUDENT EDUCATION I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY - All exceptional students are entitled to receive appropriate educational services in the least restrictive environment which will enable them to have full equality of opportunity Instructional program must fully meet the educational needs of students who deviate from the average to the extent that they require special educatiOn to develop their maxmUIn potential - - II. PROGRAM GOALS - Students with special learning differences will be provided educational programs designed to meet their individual needs Diagnostic evaluation, prescriptive planning and implementation of individual student programs will be provided. - ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES - Students with special learning styles will be provided educational programs designed to meet their individual needs. Individualized and small group instruction will be provided in academic, learning strategies, pre-vocational/vocational, and daily living skills curriculum area. - - A. Specific Activities - 1. Emotionally Handicapped/Severely Emotionally Handicapped a. Behavior adjustment and group interaction. behavior management - techniques and affective curriculum b Academic instruction. remedial or regular curriculum c Functional life skills - d. Vocational preparation 2. Educable Mentally Handicapped - a. Instruction in basic academic skills, social studies and science b Social-personal skills development c Functional life skills d Vocational preparation e Community referenced instruction - - 3 Specific Learning Disabilities - a. Instruction in basic skills and learning strategies b Functional life skills c Vocational preparation d College preparation - - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlL398 March 1998 57 Exceptional Student Education - 4 Trainable Mentally Handicapped a Personal - social development, self management/home living skills b Independent daily living skills, general community functioning skills c Instruction in basic skills, functional academies d Communication, embedded communication/motor/social skills e Vocational preparation f Community based instruction 5 Itinerant Rooms a. Individualized or small group therapy b Diagnostic testing c Itinerant instruction. Hearing Impaired, Visually Impaired, Speech- Language Impaired) d. Psychological evaluations 6. Teacher Planning a. Program development b Material preparation c Conferences d. Office for department chairperson IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher-Student Ratio. Pre-Voc & Voc Lab...1..12.., Emotionally Handicapped 1.10 , Profoundly Handicapped 1.10, Specific Learning Disabilities.J...ti.., Educable Mentally Handicapped...l..l.5.., Trainable Mentally Handicapped...l...ll); Physically Handicapped.L..lO; Total Number of Teachers Varies Total Number of Aides Varies Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used 6 -7-112 V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. After school and adult education classes specific to each exceptionality, e.g, Emotionally Handicapped - day treatment B General use - Availability of interactive video with appropriate hook-ups. Access to computers in each classroom. C PrevocationalN ocational Laboratory This area will be designed as a model apartment for teaching life skills, trainable mentally handicapped. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 58 Exceptional Student Education - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) - A. One Exceptional Child Resource room and Material Storage is to be divided into two spaces each to house Crisis Intervention Office, Speech and Language Testing, Visually and Hearing Impaired Testing Storage shall be inside the Resource room. - B One Exceptional Child Resource room and Material storage is to be located adjacent to the Pre-Vocational Laboratory, storage shall be InsIde the Resource room. - C ESE classrooms and related spaces shall be disbursed throughout the campus in compliance with the School District inclusion policy - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST - No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total EXCEPTIONAL STUDENT EDUCATION 2 Educable Mentally Handicapped 975 1,950 2 Material Storage 120 240 2 Project Storage 100 200 2 Student Storage ....JQ -12Q Subtotal 1,225 2,450 1 Physically Handicapped 950 1 Material Storage 120 1 Outside Storage 45 1 Student Storage 30 1 Student Restroom and Bath ~ Subtotal 1,240 2 Emotionally Handicapped 950 1,900 2 Material Storage 120 240 2 Outside Storage 45 90 2 Student Storage 30 60 2 Student Restroom and Bath ~ ...12Q Subtotal 1,240 2,480 5 Specific Learning Disabled 975 4,875 5 Material Storage 155 775 5 Project Storage 150 750 5 Student Storage ..AU ..2.QQ Subtotal 1,320 6,600 - - - - - - - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 59 Exceptional Student Education - No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total l\'.J. EXCEPTIONAL STUDENT EDUCATION 1 Pre- Voc & Voc Lab/TMH 1,140 1 Material Storage 155 1 Student Storage 40 Subtotal 1,335 2 Exceptional Child Resource Room 672 1,344 2 Material Storage 155 310 2 Student Storage -AQ 80 Subtotal 867 1,734 TOTAL 15.839 VII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Emotionally HandicappedlPhysically Handicapped 1 Desk (10), adjustable chrome legs, laminated top 2. Chair (12), plastic, 18", stackable, sled-base 3 Table (2), trapezoidal, laminated top, adjustable legs, each 30" x 30" x 30" x 60" 4 Wet carrel (4), free-standing, with storage shelf, small projection area, opening in top for wire cord, maximum flexibility 5 Cabinet (2), general storage with four adjustable shelves on one side, marker board on other, with casters 6 Cabinet (2), cubbies with plastic trays on one side, marker board in the other, with casters 7 Bookcase, double-sided, with casters, three adjustable shelves on each side 8 Teacher desk (2), lockable, single pedestal 9 Teacher chair (2) 10 File cabinet, three-drawer, 36", legal, lateral, lockable 11 Computer (2), printer, to be selected by DMS 12. Time out rooms, portable, 6' x 6', as appropriate B. Educable Mentally Handicapped 1 Desk (10), adjustable, chrome legs, plastic-laminated top 2. Chair (20), plastic, 18", stackable 3 Computer (4), printer, to be selected by DMS 4 Wet carrel (5), free-standing with storage shelf, small projection area, opening in top for wire cord, 30" x 35" x 52" overall height 5 Cabinet (2), cubbies with plastic trays on one side, marker board on the other, 47" x 67" x 23", with casters, 5" H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 60 Exceptional Student Education - 6 File cabinet, three-drawer, 36", legal, lateral, lockable 7 Teacher desk (2), lockable 8 Teacher chair (2), operator's .\ 9 Cabinet, general storage with four adjustable shelves on one side, marker board on the other, with casters 10 Table (4), trapezoidal, 30" x 30" x 30" x 60" - - C. Specific Learning Disabilities - 1 Desk (15), adjustable, chrome legs, laminated top 2 Chair (20), plastic, 18", stackable 3 Table (2), trapezoidal, plastic, laminated top, adjustable legs, each 30" x 30" X 30" x 60" 4 Carrel (4), free-standing, with storage shelf, small projection area, opening In top for wire or cord 5 Cabinet (2), general storage with four adjustable shelves on one side, marker board on the other, with casters 6 Cabinet (2), cubbies with plastic trays on one side, marker board on the other, with casters 7 Bookcase, double-sided, 47" I x 52" h x 23" d, with 5" casters, three adjustable shelves on each side 8 Teacher desk (2), lockable 9 Teacher chair (2), operator's 10 Computer (6), printer (2) 11 Table, rectangular, plastic laminated top, adjustable legs - - - - - - D Exceptional Child Resource Room (speech and Lanpre. V"1SWll. Hearin~ Impaired) - 1 Student chair (5) 2 Teacher chair and desk 3 Table, round, 60" 4 File cabinet, three-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Braille typewriter/stand/chair 6 Computer with sound synthesizer 7 Apollo laser, enlarger reader - - - E Trainable Mentally Handi~J>ed 1 Desk (6), adjustable, chrome legs, laminated top 2 Chair (16), plastic 18", stackable, sled base 3 Rectangular table, 30" x 72" 4 Wet carrel (4), free-standing with storage shelf, small projection area, opening in top for wire or cord 5 Cabinet (2) cubbies with plastic trays on one side, marker board on the other, with casters 6 File cabinet, three-drawer, 36", legal, lateral, lockable - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 61 Exceptional Student Education - 7 Teacher desk (2), lockable, single pedestal 8 Teacher chaIr (2), operator's 9 Cabinet, general storage with four adjustable shelves on one side, marker board on the other, with casters 10 Table (10), trapezoidal, 30" x 30" X 30" x 60" 11 Computer (2), printer F Prevocational/V ocational Laboratory 1 Appropnate furniture for a one-bedroom apartment G CIT Office 1 ChaIr 2 Desk 3 File cabinet, legal, lateral, lockable IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. HeatinglCoolingN entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- ATIONS 1 PreVocational Laboratory (TMH lab) a. Kitchen. Vent hood exhaust to outside. b Laundry' Vent dryer exhaust to outside. B. Acoustical - Standard in all areas except: 1 Exceptional Child Resource Room - Acoustical treatment is required to reduce ambient noise level down to 65 db ISO C. Floor - Provide resilient tile in classrooms, storage areas Ceramic tile in toilets. D Walls - The Resource room shall be divided into three spaces, walls shall be acoustically treated for hearing testing Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat fInish on gypsum board, paint fInish. E. Ceiling - Acoustical tile and acoustical wall panels. Impervious finish on gypsum board in toilets F. Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Standard. H. Doors - Solid core wood for intenor, hollow metal for extenor H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 62 Exceptional Student Education - I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures - 1 Classrooms: Provide single sink that is located in the tiled area. Provide gooseneck faucet (CW) and water jet drinking fountain. 2. Toilets: Provide water closet and lavatory (CW) 3 PrevocationallV ocational Laboratory. a KItchen double sink with kItchen faucet (HW & CW) b DIshwasher (HW) c Refngerator (CW) d Washing machine (HW & CW) e Floor drains with trap primers in kitchen and laundry room. 4. Baths: Provide tub with shower and control valves (HW) and (CW) that controls pressure and temperature - - - - J Communications - Standard. - 1. Exceptional Child Resource Room - telephone jack. K. Electrical - 1 Two, 120 - volt duplex wall outlets over the counter; accommodations for Closed-Circuit TV, computer hook-ups, 208-volt for dryer; 120-volt for washer, dishwasher, refrigerator and microwave. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. - - L. Gas and Air - N/A - M. Safety - N/A N Fencing - N/A - o Service Drives - Prevocational/V ocational Laboratory shall be reasonably accessible for commercial delivery - P Parking - N/A - Q Built-ins 1. Built-in Work/Storage - a. Classrooms, approximately, 8' counter space, 3' h x 2' d, closed lower cabinets with pull-out shelf (4), 18" w x 4" d x 22" I drawers. Upper cabinets with adjustable shelving, 12", to begin 2' above counter space. - - b Bookcases - throughout for maximum use, adjustable shelves - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1L398 March 1998 63 Exceptional Student Education - 2. Built-in Cabinets/Shelving a. PrevocationallVocational Laboratory (Trainable Mentally Handicapped) (1) Storage umt, l' d X 3' w x 7' h, with adjustable shelves (2) Storage umt (3), 18" d x 3' w X 7' h, with adjustable shelves 3 Built-in Instructional Aids a. All Classrooms (1) 16 lineal feet of marker board on one full wall, 8' on another wall. (2) Tackboard on one full wall. (3) Map rail mounted over marker board and tack board, A V screen over marker board b. Exceptional Child Resource Room - section of mirrored wall, approximately, 4' w x 6' h. Standard tackboard. 4. Other Built-ins a. Crisis Intervention Office - Bookcases (situate below observation windows) b PrevocationallVocational Laboratory (Trainable Mentally Handicapped). Floor-to-ceiling shelves with compartments, 18" w x 12" d, approximately, 10' I, storage (1) ClothinglLaundry Area (a) Storage cabinets, 18" d x 3' w x 7' h, WIth adjustable shelves and locks (b) Washer/dryer (2) Kitchen area (optional equipment) (a) Closed base and wall cabinets, two bases with one drawer each and one base with four drawers (b) Double sink, stainless steel (c) Dishwasher (d) Hooded stove (e) Refrigerator H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 64 Exceptional Student Education - (t) Food storage cabinet, aPP!9ximately, 3' xl' x 3', over base cabinet (g) Two closed base cabinets with drawer (h) Burner island with unscratchable cutting surface (i) Oven ( j) Microwave oven (k) Garbage disposal - - - R. Other Considerations - 1 The Crisis Intervention office shall be located adjacent to the Emotionally Handicapped classrooms, provide telephone. - 2 Observation room shall be located for use with Physically Impaired and/or Autistic classrooms - 3 One Exceptional Child Resource room and Material Storage shall be divided into two spaces for housing Crisis Intervention office, Speech and Language Testing, and Hearing Impaired Testing. - 4 One Exceptional Child Resource room and Material Storage is to be located adjacent to the Pre-Vocational Laboratory - - - - - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 65 Exceptional Swdent Education - SPATIAL RELA TrONSHIPS EXceptLOual Student Educauon Pre Voc Lab SS = Studeat Storage HS = Macerial Storage OS = Outside Storage PS Project Storage R/R-B = Rest Room/Bach Exceptional Student Education - FOOD SERVICE - I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY - Refer to overall - II. PROGRAM GOALS A. School Food Services are intended to provide nutritionally adequate food necessary to maintain good health and welfare of all pupils - - B The School Food Service program shall provide gainful educational experiences for pupils - C The school lunch facilities shall also serve school and community functions. - III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Dining - 1 Student Dining - Up to 835 students will be dining at anyone time. - 2. Teacher Dining - Up to 90 teachers will be dining at anyone time. - B. Kitchen 1 Receiving - Weighing and checking in of food orders - 2 Storage a. Dry storage b Cold storage - Includes walk-in and reach-in refrigeration c. Frozen storage - Includes walk-in and reach-in freezer facilities - - 3 Preparation Area a. Bake area b General preparation area - 4 Serving Areas a. Conventional scramble line b Fast food line (6) c Salad line d Faculty servmg hne - - - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 66 Food Service - 5 Dish washing and Refuse Removal Area 6 Can Wash Area 7 Laundry Area 8 Cleaning Compound Storage Area 9 Employee Restroom Facilities 10 Office Facilities IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio N/A Pupil Capacity Per Period 835 Total number of pupils served per day 2.507 Total number of staff served per day 250 Cafeteria Staff requires -18..... Time Per Day Student Participates in Program 1/2 hour Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Total Time Required to Complete Program N/ A V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Innovations and El(J)erimental ~deas 1 Nine serving areas shall be provided. One conventional cafeteria line and seven fast-food lines A salad bar shall also be included m the scramble area. 2 The dishwashing area shall be equipped with a self-contained pulping system for refuse removal, not visible to students. 3 The preparation area shall be equipped with a self-washing hood ventilation system. B Other Planned Uses 1 Large group meetings and community school activities 2. School dances VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQillREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F ) N/A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 67 Food Service - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST Student Student No. of Sq. Ft. Stations Stations Spaces Description Per Unit Per Unit Total FOOD SERVICE 1 Dining (835 students) 10,028 1 Kitchen (including office and rest room) 11,031 1 Staff Dining 1,003 1 Staff Restroom (from allotment) 1 Chair Storage ~ TOTAL 22.564 - - - - - - VID. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Dining - 1 Dining tables, folding, a variety in size and shape. Four is regarded as the optimum number to seat at one table; 29" is maximum height. - 2 Dining chair (835), one per student for the largest service period, 18" is suggested as a suitable seat height for all age groups - B. Kitchen 1 Receiving Area - a. Back door (2),36", with automatic fly-fans overlapping 4" on each side of the entrance with minimum velocity of 1600' minute. - b Loading dock conducive to loading and unloading trucks without hydraulic lifts - c. Platform scale, 500 pounds, with half-pound graduation, dial-type, floor- level platform on heavy-duty, swivel casters - d. Receiving table - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1Il.398 March 1998 68 Food Service - 2 Storage a. Dry storage (1) Shelving - both perimeter and island shelving; shelving described as. polymer construction, open mats, and beams, adjustmg foot & socket, injection molded polyester thermoset resin w/glass fiber reinforcement, lock button, post cap, center beam to be high density polyethylene, shelving shall come complete four-tier, on 74" posts (2) One-third of all shelving shall have 40" floor clearance for storage of bulk food items All other shelving shall have 12" floor clearance. (3) Dunnage for bulk food. (4) Dry food container (6), vermin-proof, with tight-fitting lids, on heavy-duty swivel casters (5) Climate control unit. b. Cold Storage (1) Walk-in-refrigerator 10' x 12' area, normal temperature shall be 34- 40 degrees fahrenheit. Outside average-height thermometer, foot- treadle door latch. The floor level inside shall be the same as the floor level outside. Three walls will be equipped with shelving as described. Polymer construction, open mats, and beams, adjusting foot & socket, injection molded polyester thermoset resin w/glass fiber reinforcement, lock button, post cap, center beam to be high density polyethylene, shelving shall come complete four-tier, on 74" posts. The unit shall be separate from the walk-in-freezer (2) Reach-in-refrigerator - two-door, 45 cubic feet (3) Milk refrigeration - shall be provided at each serving location of, approximately, one cubic foot for 50 half pints - stainless steel, self-leveling, case loading with locks - approximately, nine are needed. c. Frozen Storage (1) Walk-in-freezer H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\11I.398 March 1998 69 Food Service - (a) 10' x 12', low temperature area shall be zero degrees Fahrenheit and below Outside average heIght thermometer, foot treadle door latch. Tile floor inside shall be at the same level as the floor outside Three walls WIll be equipped WIth shelving as described Polymer constructiOn, open mats, and beams, adjusting foot & socket, Injection molded polyester thermoset resin w/glass fiber reinforcement, lock button, post cap, center beam to be hIgh densIty polyethylene, shelVIng shall come complete four-tier, on 74" posts The unit shall be separate from the walk-In-refrigerator - - - (b) Urethane foamed-in-place panels to have a thennal conductivity, K Factor, of not more than 0 118 B T U per sq ft. per degrees - - (c) Panels shall have a fire hazard classification of ASTM-E-84 as required by Factory Mutual Insurance System Test, a flame - spread rating of 25 or less, a smoke density no greater than 450 and have Factory Mutual Label on every panel. - (d) Reinforce the door panels with a steel framework to rigidly support the door assemblies - (e) Include, 120-volt, thermostatically controlled defrosters around the entire door frame and around the entire door - (t) Entire unit of panels and door to have NSF and UL rating and carry certifying labels - (2) Reach-in-freezer two-door, 45 cubic feet. - (3) Ice cream freezers one per serving line. (4) Soft serve yogurt machine (2) - 3. Preparation Area - a. Bake area (1) 60-quart mixer with attachments, stainless steel bowls and dolly - (2) 30-quart mixer with attachments, stainless steel bowls and dolly - (3) Baker's table with space for three under counter dry food containers, with two shelves, full length spice rack with three drawers, with roller bearing channel slides, stainless steel with galvanized tubular legs, 36" h x 30" w x 7' I - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 70 Food Service - (4) Baker's aid rotating double ~@nvection oven (2) stainless steel exterior, total capacity 12 - 16 (IS" x 26") pans, porcelain mterior, glass doors (5) Warming cabinet to accommodate 18" x 26" pans with universal slides to accommodate various depths (6) Dry food container (6), portable with tight-fitting lids b. General Preparation Area (1) Vertical cutter/mixer, 40 - quart. (2) Work table (8), 6' x 30", stainless steel with one drawer having roller-bearing channel slides, stainless steel under shelf (3) Steam cooker, 2 - 3 compartment, convection, wide enough for two, 12" x 20" pans, 44" x 34" (4) Institutional microwave (5) Ice machine, storage-type. Daily capacity up to 1,050 pounds, 300 pound storage bin capacity Stainless steel bin, air-cooled condenser, heavy-duty, 1 hp compressor Standard, 230 - volt, 60 cy, 1 ph, 2 wire; 1/4" water inlet SAE Flare - 3/8" condenser water inlet NPT 5/8" bin drain aD - 3/8" water outlet OD -stainless steel exterior 55" to 55-3/4" height, with legs, 4S-1/2" w x 26-112" d. (6) Deep fat fryer (4), 55 - 60 pound capacity with automatic timing device and continuous f1ltering (7) Hand wash sink (2), with towel and soap dispensers, foot-operation, glass filler attachment included. (S) Two-burner hot plate. (9) Slicer (2), gravity-type (10) Hood with fire extinguisher system and self-washing system remote. (11) Make-up air system. (12) Utility cart (6), polyethylene, heavy duty; 24" x 40" with two shelves, 550- pound capacity H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 71 Food Service - (13) Garbage disposal (2), provide Qne disposal in soiled dish table and one disposal in vegetable preparation sink. - (14) Tilting skillet, 40-gallon, with spring faucet, spray hose attachment and floor drain. - (15) Conveyor, char-broiling unit. - (16) Vegetable cutter, hopper-type - (17) Hose reel (4), for floor cleaning - (18) Bun pan racks for 18" x 26" pans universal slides, open to two sides, to fit inside pass-through refrigerators and warmers - c. Sink Areas (1) Pot sink: three-compartment; each compartment, 35" - 38" x 24" x 14", one or two drain boards. Stainless steel. - (2) Vegetable sink: two-compartment; each compartment, 24" x 24" x 12", with at least one drain board, 24" x 24", or longer Stainless steel. - - 4. Serving Areas - a. Dual Scramble Area (1) Conventional Serving Line - (a) Place for trays and silverware - (b) Hot well (4), with 30" flat section, with bullet heat lamp (6) one, over each hot well and two, over the 30" section - (c) A 2' flat section - (d) A 6' refrigerated cold food section (e) A case-loading milk and juice section to hold 10 - 14 cases - (f) A 42" flat section with a table top dual headed soft serve yogurt machine - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlL398 March 1998 72 Food Service - (2) Self-Serve Line .,1#. (a.) A 4' flat section with a 36" table top heated sandwich display case (b) A 3 r flat section (c) A 6' refrigerated cold food section (d) A case-loading milk and juice section to hold 10 - 14 cases. (3) Cashier Station (a) An ice cream freezer (b) A flat section and cashier counter (4) Fast Food Lines (a) Fast food line (6) (b) Case-loading milk and juice box (6) (c) Unit (6), with hot well (2), with 24" flat section with bullet heat lamp (3) one, over each hot well and one, over the flat section. b Roll-through refrigerator behind serving line capable of accommodating 18" x 26" bun pans full length in each section, universal slides, two-door, 45 cubic feet, flush-to-floor c Roll-through heated cabinet behind serving line capable of accommodating 18" x 26" bun pans full length in each section, universal slides, two-<ioor, 45 cubic feet, flush-to-floor d. Faculty salad line with hot well (3), a 6' refrigerated cold food section and a 4' flat beverage section e All serving pieces in scramble area are to be separate units attached with a reinforced tray slide f Lighted menu board H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\m.398 March 1998 73 Food Service - g. Salad Line (1) Hot well, a 6' refrigerated sect~~Jl and self-leveling mdk section, a cashier stand, and a student tray and silver dispenser - (2) Full length tray slide - (3) Programming money processor - (4) Roll-through refrigerator, capable of accommodating 18" x 26" bun pans, two-door, 45 cubic feet, flush-to-floor - h. Faculty Serving Line - (1) Salad line with hot well (2), a 6' refrigerated section, a 4' flat section for beverage service. - 5. Dishwashing and Refuse Removal Area a. Dish machine - not self-busing type, circular, accessible from all sides with conveyor tray return, not visible from dining area. - b Landing area to receive dirty dishes, with overhead spray - c Clean dish table, 14' x 24"-30" Ample space needed for air-drying of dishes. Drying operation is speeded by adequate hot water supply and the use of a rinse injector If a rinse injector is used, it is possible to cut down slightly on the length of clean dish table. - - d. Self-contained pulping system for refuse removal, not visible to students - 6. Can Wash Area a. Can wash will be steam-operated and will enter into sanitary sewer with minimum of 4" drain pipe. - b Mop rack, wall-mounted - c Garbage dumpster will be provided immediately adjacent to the can wash area. Dumpsters are to have draining facilities - 7. Laundry Area - a. Washer - 25-112" x 27" x 43-118", to have automatic water level control, three-speed water temperature control, wash timer selector; delicate fabric - removal cycle; large wash basket; fabric softener dispenser; lint filter; lint - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1lI.398 March 1998 74 Food Service - remover tub, full cycle safety lid, draming for sediment removal, metered fill, unbalanced load control, porcelain enamel lid and top cover; rust- proof lid, ball hinges, corrosion-resistant, leveling legs, corrosion- resistant, zinc-coated, steel cabinet, rustproof, corrosion-resistant, poly pump, low, post-positive, power agitator drive, helical drive, special cabinet ftnish, adjustable-locking, leveling legs, perforated, self-cleaning basket; flush-to-wall installation, flush-to-cabinet installation. b ~ - 28-112" x 27" x 43-118", to have a permanent press dry cycle; lint ftlter; high-volume, exhaust fan, porcelain enamel, top cover; safety door and start switch, magnetic door latch, porcelain enamel drum, corrosion- resistant, zinc-coated, steel cabinet; air-fluff setting; full opening door; flush-to-wall installation, flush-to-cabinet installation, minimum width cabinet for large capacity dry; adjustable-locking, leveling legs, three-way venting, low temperature drying; end of cycle conditioning period, preheated incoming air; big capacity drum. 8. Cleaning Compound Storage Area - storage room and space is to be separate for dry mops, brooms, buckets, cleaning compounds, etc This room is temperature-controlled and included a mop rack and shelves for cleaning supplies 9. Employee Restroom Facilities a. Full length. mirror bLocker (20), individual, coat size, with lock c. First aid cabinet d. Soap dispensers as needed e. Towel holders as needed f Lavatory (2) g Commode (2), with tissue dispensers, enclosed 10. Office a. Desk, 60" x 35", with three drawers on one side and a drop-type, legal file drawer on one side, lockable b Desk chair, posture-type, swivel c. File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable d. Calculator with tape, ten-key, electronic e Pencil sharpener f Computer/printer g Typewriter h. Chair (2) i. Telephone with separate line H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\ll1.398 March 1998 75 Food Service - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HY.,AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - B. Acoustical - Ceilings in dining areas and office shall be acoustical tile SpecIal attention shall be given to minimizing sound between the dining areas and the kitchen area - C. Floor - Resilient tile for dining areas Kitchen floor shall be non-absorbent, non- slip, grease-proof quarry tile or seamless epoxy floor Base shall be continuation of floor surface. At dish disposal area, install non-slip quarry tile - - D Walls - Kitchen walls shall be ceramic tile, impervious to moisture and easily cleaned. - E. Ceiling - Kitchen area to be impervious to moisture, easily cleaned. Serving area ceilings shall be dropped for aesthetics. - F Lighting - Lighting in dining areas shall be restful and relaxing. However, the system shall have the capability of increasing the lighting to use the space for testing. Lighting in kitchen area shall be both of the general type and task-oriented. Concentrated lighting shall be provided over all work stations. Accent lighting shall be provided for menu boards and serving counters A master switch shall be located near the employee entrance. - - G Windows - Exterior windows provided in the dining areas shall have a means of light control. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - H. Doors - Locks shall be keyed separately from master system in order that only the School Food Service Manager and one designated person from administration have access Equip heavy-duty metal receiving doors with delivery buzzer on exterior Exterior doors shall have panic hardware and with automatic fly fans Doors to kitchen and storage must be wide enough for delivery of supplies and movement of equipment. - - - I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - 1 Kitchen: The kitchen design shall be in accordance with industry standards and the SDPBC requirements Design drawings shall show equipment locations and shall defme equipment connections for gas, electric, (HW & CW), sanitary (indirect and direct), equipment drains, supply air, exhaust air, etc. Kitchen Toilet: Provide water closet and lavatory (HW & CW) Can Wash: Provide can wash drain with spray nozzle assembly (HW & CW) Garbage Dumpster. Provide floor drain and hose bibb (CW) - 2 3 4 - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1I1.398 March 1998 76 Food Service - J Communications. Intercom in office, kitchen and all dining areas Separate telephone line in office Television outlets in the dining areas for closed CIrCUIt or educational TV Provide microphone outlets in dining area, (6) in cafetorium. Provide a bell location 7' above the finished floor in kitchen with conduit from the nearest telephone termmal cabinet. K. Electrical - Electrical outlets shall be placed approximately every S' around the kitchen and preparation area. Electrical outlets will be provided in the teachers' and students' dining area at 15' to 20' intervals The lighting control cirCUit panel for all food service areas and power circuit for the kitchen shall be easily accessible to the kitchen and not placed in the storeroom. Special outlets and wiring are provided for heavy equipment. (See. VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT) Spare circuits shall be provided for future needs A minimum of two extra 20S - 230 volt, three-phase lines to the main panel box of the kitchen will be provided over and above minimal requirements for making initial equipment operative. Area switches shall be provided for future needs Storerooms shall be kept free of electrical distribution panels, uninsulated pipes, water heaters, refrigeration condensing units or other heat producing devices. Any wall between storeroom and boiler room shall be insulated. Outlets shall be provided for Vertical CutterlMixer - used by both cook and baker Storeroom, refuse, office and locker areas shall have at least two standard outlets Milk shake machines require 208 - 230 volt, three-phase lines. Dryer needs same. Provide conduit with a pull string from cash registers to Food Service Manager's office. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS L. Gas and Air - Refer to the Plumbing System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements M. Safety - Particularly hazardous equipment shall be clearly designated by bright red color Portable steam generator shall be provided for all-purpose cleaning Total facility shall meet all local, state and sanitation codes. Particular attention shall be given to extinguishing of flue fires (emphasis given to ventilation equipment above deep-fat fryers) N. Fencing - Enclosed mechanical/electrical equipment. O. Service Drives - Easy access to back entrance for delivery of food and supplies. P. Parking - Space (20) provided for food service employees near service entrance. Parking shall be ample for delivery vehicles near service entrance. Q Built-ins - Storeroom to have both perimeter and island shelving, leaving 3' aisle space For commercial size can and dry goods - see Desi~n Criteria - Food Service Facilities Student dining to have wall shelving for books and materials that students may have with them during lunch period. Tack board - 4' X 8' in dining area, 4' x 4' in kitchen, preparation area. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lH.398 March 1998 77 Food Service - R. Other Considerations - 1 Equipment must comply with standards Identified by seals of approval of the following - a Amencan Gas Association for gas eqUipment. b American Society for Mechanical Engineers for steam equipment. - c. National Sanitation Foundation. d Underwriters Laboratory for electrical equipment. - 2 Before final specifications are written by an architect, consult with SDPBC School Food Service authorities to include only those brands listed on the - approved manufacturer's list. 3 Equipment for receiving, preparation and serving of food shall be on wheels - vvhere feasible. 4 Equipment shall be of good quality, recognized brands, stainless steel, 14 to - 16 gauge, number 4 finish, 18 - 8, type 32, to be used for sinks, counter tops, work tables - 5 Consideration shall be given to modular combination. For example, equipment shall be designed for use of standard sized pans, 12" x 20" and 18" x 26" - This includes 30" sink compartments 6 The architect shall utilize an FCSI approved Food Service Consultants - Guidelines and Recommendations of Design Criteria School Food Services Facilities published by the SDPBC - 7 Office area to be separate from storage room. - - - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 78 Food Service - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Food Service Dining -----------------~---~.~---- Food Service - FOREIGN LANGUAGE - I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY All students shall be given the opportunity to learn to communicate 10 a foreIgn language - and to learn something of the cultures of our neighbors around the world II. PROGRAM GOALS - Promote the development of the four skills of language, speaking, hstening, and reading to a level commensurate with the ability Of the student, on each level of Instruction. - III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES - A. Curriculum - 1 Spanish I, II, ill, IV, V 2 AP Spanish Language 3 French I, II, ill, IV - 4 AP French Language 5 Latin I, II, ill, 6 German I, II, ill - 7 Spanish for Spanish Speaking Students I, II, ill, IV B. Teacher Activities - 1 Work with individual students, small groups, and classes on discussions and projects 2 Plan bulletin boards, learning center activities 3 Recommend purchase and use of materials and equipment. 4 Coordinate classes within the department. 5 Plan and lead field trips 6 Provide opportunities for comprehension activities. 7 Provide opportunities for oral practice in the target language. 8 Present subject matter in the classroom in a variety of ways. 9 Utilize community resources. 10 Provide the means and techniques for teacher and student evaluation of subject materials 11 Conduct conferences with students, parents and admini~trators. - - - - - C. Student Activities - 1 Think - Creative thinking, problem solving, logical deductions - 2 Listen - Tape recordings, lectures, records, discussions, radio, TV, movies, guests, classmates, teacher - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 79 Foreign Language - 3 Speak - Text materials, reference books, reports, magazines, fiction, cultural material, newspapers 4 Read - Text materials, reference books, reports, magazines, fiction, cultural material, newspapers 5 Write - Summaries, outlines, conversational materials, poetry 6 View - Films, filmstrips, slides, pictures, works of art, TV, maps, charts, globes, overhead transparency materials 7 Inspect - Artifacts, regalia from the foreign cultures, relief maps, pictures and paintings, works of art. 8 Make - Booklets, displays, posters, scrapbooks, bulletin boards, maps, replicas, dioramas, mobiles, murals. 9 Visit - Local cultural presentations, historical sites, ethnic enclaves. IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period 120 Total No of Teachers --2... Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used--1.:l:.. V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Classroom areas may be used for community school activities. B Related areas adjacent to classrooms will provide space for small group instruction, committee work and computer-assisted instruction. VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F.) A. Central storage, 150 sq ft., for storage of materials and supplies. B One-half of Resource room and Material Storage of 285 nsf is to be used as a related classroom space and is out of Resource room allotment. C. One Skills Development Laboratory is to be utilized as the Computer Networked Foreign Languages Laboratory H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\ill.398 March 1998 80 Foreign Language - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total FOREIGN LANGUAGE 3 Classroom 810 2,430 3 Material Storage 70 210 1 Material Central Storage 150 1h Resource Room L.WJ Sub-total 2,790 1 Computer Networked Foreign 1 Languages Laboratory (Skills Development Lab) 960 1 Material Storage ~ Sub-total 1,030 TOTAL ~ - - - - - - - VITI. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Classroom - 1 Chair desk (30) 2 Teacher desk, standard 3 Teacher chair, standard - 4 Student chair (6) 5 File cabinet (2), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Computer table (2), 30" x 48", mica top - 7 Computer (8), printer (2) 8 Teacher podium 9 Bookcase - maximum - B. Resource Room & Material Storage ((lh) of Resource Room) - 1 Computer table (2), 30" x 48", mica top 2. Student chair (10), 18" 3 Folding table, 3' x 6' - 4 Computer (2), to be coordinated with DMS/printer C. Language Laboratory/Skills Development Laboratory - 1 Teacher Console and (30) student positions 2 1 file server, 80486, to be coordinated with DMS - 3 Computer (16), networked to file server and interfaced with the language laboratory to be coordinated with DMS - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 81 Foreign Language - 4 Student chair (30), IS" 5 Cabinet, non-magnetic, for storage of audio cassette tapes, video cassettes and computer software 6 Counter top, IS" d, to accommodate student books -- to run the length of the aisle wall with lockable storage cabmets underneath. 7 Teacher chair 8 VCR IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements B. Acoustical - Standard. C. floor - Provide resilient tile. D lYalls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. E. Ceiling - Acoustical. F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Vision window, 48" off floor x length of available wall, large enough to see complete room. In Resource room with blinds to close off window from classroom. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H. Doors - Provide with viewing window Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - N/A J Communications - Provide wiring and jacks to receive video tape player and camera/video playback in each classroom from a centra11ocation within the school. Provide wire molding to accommodate the electrical wiring and cabling required for the networking and interfacing of the language laboratory and its computers and file server Provide cabling and electrical upgrades as needed. Provide appropriate networking software as needed, to be coordinated with DMS Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS K. Electrical 1 Each classroom must have 120 - volt duplex outlets spaced every S' to 10' on each of the four walls, with a minimum of duplex outlet (2), per wall. 2. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 82 Foreign Language - L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - N/A N Fencing - N/A 0 Service Drives - N/A P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins - - - - 1 Built-in work/storage - a. Classrooms - work counter with lockable storage cabinets below, approximately 12' One wall of bookcases, 30" h, with adjustable shelves - b. Resource Room (lh) - 24" d, counter below the observation window, with lockable cabinets below - 2. Built-in storage - a. Resource Room Ph) Materials Storage Rooms - 12" d shelving, adjustable, floor-to-ceiling, approximately, 10' Lockable cabinet, 30" d, approximately, 5' 1. - c. Central Storage Area - shall have floor-to-ceiling bookcases, 12" d, with adjustable shelves, approximately, 20' 1. Lockable storage cabinets, - approximately, 10' I x 30" d, floor-to-ceiling, with adjustable shelving 3. Built-in Instructional Aids - a. White board (2) and bulletin board (2) in each classroom and in the language laboratory, 8' x 4' - b White board and bulletin board in each related area, 8' x 4 ' - c Map rails over each white board and bulletin board. d. Tack strip above front, rear, and at least one side of the classrooms and - language laboratory R. Other Considerations - Refer to Foreign Language Laboratory Manual housed in - the Department of Curriculum & Instruction. - - H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 83 Foreign Language - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Foreign Language ~e ~ B The Laboracory should be located adjacenc Co che classrooms Co enable students co move freely from classrooms co l~~oracory CMS MS = Central t~terial Storage Material Storage Foreign Language ------ ---- -------- - GENERAL CLASSROOM~ '. - I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY - The high school program is organized around, and focused on, personal and societal goals that help students become effective participants in the SOCIal world - II. PROGRAM GOALS The high school program goals center around the preparation of students for more - reflective and effective participation in their society The program goals would include the following - A. Socialization - aimed at helping the student become an effective member of social groups - B. Decision-making Processes - aimed at helping students to make effective use of intellectual skills n reaching decisions about hislher social concerns - C. Citizenship - aimed at helping the students to use more effectively the processes of a representative-democratic government. - D. Knowledge ACqJIisition - aimed at helping the student to acquire and utilize information and intellectual skills provided through the curriculum. - In addition, the program will stress the assimilation of three important components. subject, learner and society - ill. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Curriculum - 1 Government 2. Comparative Political Systems 3 Economics 4 Law Studies 5 Psychology 6 Sociology 7 Anthropology 8 History 9 Advanced Placement Courses - - B. Teacher Activities - 1 Confer with individual students. 2. Consult with small groups on activities, discussions or projects 3 Lead large or small discussion groups 4 Plan bulletin boards and interest centers 5 Make recommendations as to selection of materials and equipment. 6 Plan with team of teachers for class and inter-level group activities 7 Assist WIth assembly programs 8 Sponsor enrichment programs. - - - H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\UI.398 March 1998 84 General Classrooms - 9 Provide demonstrations 10 Help to plan and lead field trips 11 Lecture. 12 Interview resource people 13 Provide techniques for teacher and student evaluation of learning 14 Conduct teacher, parent, and pupil conferences 15 Utilize computer lab activities C. Student Activities 1 Think - Creative and critical thinking, problem solving, associations 2 Listen - Tapes, lectures, records, speeches, discussions, radio, TV, movies, guests, classmates 3 Speak - Speeches, explanations, dramatizations, demonstrations, simulations, class and panel discussions 4 Read - Textbooks, reference books, reports, magazines, newspapers, fiction, trade books 5 Write - Creative writing, reports, research papers, outlines, summaries, speeches, comparisons. 6 View - Films, filmstrips, slides, pictures, TV, maps, charts, globes, overlays, field trips and other projected materials. 7 Inspect - Relief maps, roads maps, globes, artifacts, samples, pictures, charts, graphs 8 Construct - Booklets, displays, posters, scrapbooks, graphs, bulletin boards, maps, charts, diagrams, time lines, pictures, replicas, dioramas, mobiles, murals. IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period-200. Total No of Teachers --3!L Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-1.:L V. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Areas may be used for night class and community school activities H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1lI.398 March 1998d 85 General Classrooms - B The architect shall study the shape of typical classrooms to provide for efficient operation and communication, utilizing marker board and wall-mounted illustrations The spaces must also provide flexibility for large and small group instruction as well as the capabIlity for individualization. Computerized lab activities will be incorporated mto mstructional program. - - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) N/A - - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Student Stations Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total Per Unit I Total GENERAL CLASSROOMS 30 Classroom 810 24,300 30 900 30 Material Storage 70 2,100 1 Teacher Planning -ROO TOTAL 27.200 - - - - vm. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Classroom - 1 Chair/desk (30) 2. Teacher desk 3 Teacher chair 4 Chair (6), stackable, 18" 5 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Table, 30" x 72", mica top 7 Teacher podium 8 Stool 9 Maps/globe 10 Computer (8), printer (2) - - - - B. Teacher Planning 1 Carrel (8), electric, with lockable cabinet that includes shelves and tackboard surface 2 Teacher chair (8), operator 3 Chair (8), stackable, 18" 4 Laser VIdeo/dIsc player - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 86 General Classrooms - 5 File cabinet (S), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Computer (S), printer (2) 7 Copy machine with stand 8 Folding table (2), 30" x 72" 9 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design RequIrements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- TIONS B. Acoustical - Each classroom and the Teacher Planning area must be designed and constructed to prevent voice and noise transmission. Consideration shall be given to the following. 1 Partitions from floor-to-ceiling with closure around penetrating ductwork. 2 Partition materials that will arrest chalk tapping and voice sounds 3 Acoustically lined ductwork to prevent classroom to corridor noise transmissions C. ElooI - Provide resilient tile D Walls - Provide concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. E. Ceiling - Acoustical. F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H. Doors - Sufficient glass for safety in classroom doors and Teacher Planning door Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior \ I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures. In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) J. Communications 1 Teacher Planning area shall have a connection for Closed-Circuit TV and a clock. 2 Provide for open-circuit TV reception in each classroom. H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 87 General Classrooms - K. Electrical - 1 2 3 4 " Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS One duplex outlet in center of back wall in classroom. Teacher Planning area shall have (8), 120-volt, duplex outlet. Stagger outlets, not back-to-back. - L. Gas and Air - N/A - M. Safety - Standard - N Fencing - N/A - o Service Drives - N / A P. Parking - N/A - Q Built-ins - 1. Built-in work counter a. Classroom shall have one wall with counter and lockable storage cabinets below and above, approximately, 15' - b Teacher Planning area shall have a stainless steel sink in a 10' work counter, formica top, and cabinets below - - 2 Built-in cabinets/shelving - Classroom shall have cabinet with adjustable shelving and lockable doors, 3' h x 18" d x 8' 1. - 3 Built-in Instructional Aids a. Each classroom shall have: - (1) Marker board (2), 8' x 4' (2) Bulletin board (2), 8' x 4' (3) Projector screen (4) Map rail continuous around room, except where in conflict with windows or cabinetry (5) Bookcase on one wall, 30" h, with adjustable shelving - - - b Teacher Planning shall have a 8' x 4' bulletin board and computer station with shelving - R. Other Considerations - N/A - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIL398 March 1998 88 General Classrooms - SPATl.AL RELATIONSHWS General Classrooms Gei1enl QassrooOlS - LANGUAGE ARTS I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY - Language Arts encompasses an extensive range of communicatiOn SkIlls and of artIstic expression, as well as the body of knowledge about the English language and literature Although the development of commumcatiOn skills IS a lifelong process, the extent to which students become proficient in these skills whde at school is vitally related to their future abilities to function independently and productIvely in life Language expresses human imagination and is a primary vehicle for transmitting culture LIterature study provides students with insights into human values, experience and potential, and enables them to acquire familiarity with, and appreciation for, literary masterworks Since language itself is an important means of giving shape to experience and knowledge and of expressing human hopes and feelings, students shall be instructed in the ways in which language functions and in ways of controlling and using language. - - - - II. PROGRAM GOALS - Instruction in Language Arts involves the skills of reading, writing, speaking, listening and observing Goals of the English program include the following: - A. Development of skills which are basic to most other subjects studied and useful, if not vital, to success in our highly verbal culture; - B Close acquaintance with the literary tradition which comprises the subject matter unique to English, the broad cultural heritage of the English-speaking people- religious, technological, political, sociological and artistic, - - C Enhancement of critical judgment through practice in and awareness of, the ways language shapes our world, - D Development of the powers of comprehension, of critical thinking and of coherence and fluency in expression, - E. Presentation of literary works that promote hllmani~tic attitudes, aesthetic appreciation, critical evaluation, and positive leisure and civic pursuits - ill. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Curriculum - 1 2 3 4 5 6 Composition--imaginative/expressive, informative, expository, persuasive Literature--American, British, world, classical, contemporary Humanities Semantics and logic Mass media--publications, film, video, radIO Journalism - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 89 Language Arts - 7 Speech 8 Debate 9 Reading B. Classroom Activities 1 Classrooms a. Lecture b Lecture/discussion c Demonstration d. Supervised study e Small group discussions f Role-playing g Simulation gaming h. Individual skills development i. Testing j Viewing of films, filmstrips, and video tapes k. Listening to records and audio tapes 1. Developing skills - multimedia. computers, laser disks, CD-Rom 2. Publications a. Lecture b Demonstration c. Supervised study d. Small group/committee work e. Individual skills development f Testing 3. Publications Resource Room (lh) a. Production b Typing/typesetting c. Art work d. Layout/design e. Filing and sorting f. Teacher/pupil conferences g Computer work/word processing 4. Speech Classroom a. Lecture b Lecture! discussion c. Demonstration d. Small group discussion e Panel discussion H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\UI.398 March 1998 90 Language Arts - f Delivenng individual speeches g Debating, mdividual and team h. Viewing films, filmstnps and videotapes Listening to records and tapes J Audio and vIdeo taping k. Testing I Supervised study m. Role-playing n. Performing skits, broadcasts and commercials o Community school classes and meetings p Guest performers/speakers q Rehearsal r Staging/blocking s Oral interpretation - - - - - 5. Speech/Debate Resource Room for Rehearsal - a. Individual rehearsal b Individual and group skill practice c Audio taping d. Small group discussion e Debate strategy planning sessions - - 6. SpeechlDebate Resource Room - a. Research for debate preparation b Storage of debate materials c Sorting and filing d. Individual speech preparation e Small group work/discussion - - 7. Reading Laboratory - Remedial, Corrective, and Developmental a. Individual and small group skills development b Listening to records and tapes c Reading with controlled readers d. Computer use, teacher and students e Testing f Individual and parent conferences g Demonstration h. Supervised study 1. Detailed record keeping - - - - 8. Writing Resource Room a. Diagnostic testing b Individual skills development c Demonstration - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\Il1.398 March 1998 91 Language Arts - d Small group discussion/tutoring e Supervised study f Record keeping IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period 210 Total No of Teachers JL Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used--2..:t:... V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Performing Arts suite B Computer terminal hook-ups for innovative reading skills programs C Sharing of facilities with community school VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F.) Teacher Planning area needs to accommodate (11) teachers even though only (10) classrooms are being provided. Language Arts teachers may be teaching in other types of classrooms throughout the school but will still require a planning space. VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST I No. of I IlescrI('lIon of Areu I Square Feet I Areas Per Unit I Total LANGUAGE ARTS 5 Classroom (General) 810 4,050 5 Material Storage 70 ~ Subtotal 4,400 1 Classroom (Publications) 810 1 Material Storage 70 ~ Resource Room and Storage 128Sl Subtotal 880 1 Skills Development Laboratory (speechlDebate) 960 1 Material Storage 70 ~ Resource Room and Storage 1llil Subtotal 1,030 H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1ll.398 March 1998 92 Language Arts No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas . . Per Unit I Total ., LANGUAGE ARTS (continued) 1 Skills Development Laboratory (Reading) 960 1 Material Storage 70 1 Resource Room and Storage .illID Subtotal 1,030 1 Resource Room and Storage (Writing) (570) 1 Teacher Planning JQQ Subtotal 600 TOTAL 7.940 - - - - - - - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Classroom (General) - 1 Student desk (30) 2 Teacher desk with chair 3 Teacher lectern 4 Stool for teacher, 30" 5 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Book rack (2) 7 Bookcase with adjustable shelving (2) 8 Table, 30" x 72" 9 Chair (6) 10 Computer (8), printer, determined by DMS - - - - B. Publications 1 Classroom a. Student desk (30) b Teacher desk with chair (2) c. Stool for teacher, 30" d. File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable e. File cabinet (2), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable f Bookcase (2) g Lectern with storage h. Computer (S), printer - - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\Ill.398 March 1998 93 Language Arts - 2 Resource Room for Publications a Art desk (2) b Stool (6), 30" c Chair (22) d Computer (6), word processor (2), printer 3 Material Storage a. Table, 30" x 72" b Light table c. Waxer d. Developer e Typesetter c. Speech/Debate 1 Skills Development Laboratory a. Student desk (30) b Teacher's desk with chair, operator-type with carpet casters c. Lectern (2), adjustable, sound in one unit only d. File cabinet (4), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable e. Table (2), 20" x 72" f Marker board g Stool for teacher, 30" h. Computer (S), printer (2) 2. Resource Room for Speech/DebatelReadinglWriting a. Lectern, adjustable b Bookshelf, 42" x 36" x 12" c Student desk/chair (12) d. Teacher desk/chair e. Computer (6), printer f Bookcase (2), free-standing on casters with shelving D. Reading 1. Skills Development Laboratory a. Chair (30), stackable, sled base b Teacher's desk with two side drawers, center drawer, double-pedestal with two-drawer, legal file on one side, lockable c Teacher's chair, operator-type on carpet casters d. Table (5), 30" x 72" e Wet carrel (S) f Pile cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 94 Language Arts -------- -~------- ~--~_._--~. - g Controlled reader (10) h. Language Master, optional Computer (S), printer, as recommended by DMS ,\ - E. Material Storage - a Shelving units, free-standing F Teacher Planning - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Carrel (11) with chaIr Couch (2) Lounge chair (4) Table, round Chair (6), straight File cabinet (4), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable Computer (4), printer - - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS - A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements - for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSID- RATIONS - B. Acoustical - Speech Resource Room shall be soundproof. Care shall be taken to assure good acoustics in Speech Skills Development Laboratory C. Eloor - 1 Publications Resource room shall have stain-resistant tile floors - 2 Speech Skills Laboratory shall have platforms from ground level upward to the rear of the room. The speaker(s) would stand in the front on the ground level. Each of the five platform levels shall be slightly curved so attention would be focused on the stage area. The platform shall be wide enough to accommodate student desks safely - - 3 Teacher Planning, classrooms, storage, skills labs to have resilient tile. - D. Walls - Speech Resource room shall each have one mirrored wall. Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat gypsum board, paint finish. - E.Ceiling - Acoustical. - F Lighting 1 Overhead lighting attached to art desks in Publications Resource room. - 2 In Speech Skills Laboratory, spotlights located over the stage areas, lekos, fresnels Special electrical hook-up required. - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 95 Language Arts - 3 In make-up areas, incandescent lighting around built-m makeup mirrors 4 Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows 1 Vision windows into Speech Resource room for supervision from Speech Skills Laboratory 2 Vision windows between Reading Resource room and Reading Skills Laboratory 3 Areas secured for computers shall be inaccessible through the windows 4 Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H. Doors 1 In Publications, Dutch/split door between the Resource Area and Material Storage for distribution of materials. I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) J. Communications - Standard. Telephone wiring for modem access to information retrieval systems either direct or through the Media Center K. Electrical 1 Wiring for telephone/modem and computer terminal shall be provided in Teacher Planning 2 Publications: 120-volt wiring in Resource room. Special circuit for each piece of typesetting equipment. Also, outlet (4), per wall, for special equipment. 3 Speech Laboratory. 120-volt wiring in stage area. Also, outlet (3), 120 - volts, each wall. Stage area. electric batten (2), dimmer with master, microphone jack (3) 4 Reading Laboratory. Sufficient wiring to handle microcomputers, possible future mainframe computers, and other special equipment; 120-volt outlet at each carrel (wet) 5 Writing Resource Room. Sufficient wiring for computer (S), around perimeter of laboratory 6 Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 96 Language Arts - L. Gas and Air - N/A - M. Safety 1 Publications Classroom and Writing Resource room - surge protectors on each piece of electrical eqUipment. Stage curtains shall be fireproof - 2 - N Fencing - N/A 0 Service Drives - N/A P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins - - 1 Built-in work/storage - a. Publications Resource Room and Material Sto~e - "flat" tables along one wall. Slanted counter, 36", with lockable 30" d storage cabinet underneath. - b Publications Classroom - student mail box (30) - c Speech Laborato(y - extemp file work table shall be made in U-shape in the back of the classroom, 12' 1 x 29" h x 30" w Shelving above the table for reference books Work counter for props - d. Teacher Planning - locked storage space for each teacher, computer station, shelving/printer - 2. Built-in cabinets/storage - a. General Classrooms and Laboratories - locking, separately keyed, storage cabinet (2), each 4'-5' w; bookshelves, approximately, 6' wide. - b Speech Storage - open, adjustable shelves, except in storage areas for flats - 3. Built-in Instructional Aids - a. Classrooms and Laboratories (1) Bulletin boards shall be placed near exits and also at back. (2) Map rails shall be provided above marker boards (3) Provide standard marker boards. (4) One wall of bookcases, 30" h, adjustable shelving - - - H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 97 Language Arts - b. Speech Laboratory - A V storage sta~~, in the center of the laboratory for storage and use of heavy A V equipment. c. Writing Resource Room (1) Marker boards, 4' h x 8' I (2) Bulletin board (2) on available walls, 4' x 4' 4 Other Built-ins R. Other Considerations 1 The Speech Laboratory shall be located near the English, Music and Art departments as well as near the Auditorium. 2 Writing Resource room shall be adjacent to the Media Center 3 Security for computer equipment. 4 If a two-story structure is contemplated, provision shall be made for book elevators so that books and A V equipment may be transported safely and easily 5 Resource rooms allotment for Language Arts a. One-half Resource room for Publications 285 nsf b One-half Resource room for Speech/Debate 285 nsf c. One full size Resource room for Writing, 570 nsf d. One full size Resource room for Reading, 570 nsf H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 98 Language Arts SPATIAL RELATIONSHlPS Language Arts / Resource ( FDoml I Material ~ '\storage I '- .../' RR = Resoucce Room "\ RR ) '- Teachec Planning! Storage - - - - - - - - - - - S1d..1.l.s Deve10pmen Labora tory (Reading) - - - - - - - Language Arf5 - MATHEMATICS I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Mathematics is man I s attempt to quantify his environment. The language of mathematics provides a medium to translate the physical world into a system to facilitate recordmg, manipulation and generalization. As the world progresses rapidly in the technologIcal areas, it becomes increasingly Important for a person to master the highest level of mathematics possible II. PROGRAM GOALS Each student will have an opportunity for- A. A basic foundation of mathematics B An awareness of changing mathematical techniques C A desire for further mathematical studies D A meaningful and logical study of mathematics E. A challenge of mathematical creativity commensurate with ability F A desire for mathematical optimum development and self-evaluation G A meaningful relationship between the pure mathematics and the application of mathematics through the changing technological field. ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Curriculum The following courses offer a spectrum of mathematical knowledge from consumer arithmetic skills to abstract concepts developed in calculus The purpose of these courses is to provide maximum opportunities for students with varying abilities and goals 1 Explorations I, IT 2 Consumer Mathematics 3 Pre-Algebra 4 Algebra I and IT (Regular and Honors) 5 Informal Geometry 6 Geometry 7 Computer Applications in Mathematics I & IT 8 Integrated Mathematics 9 Liberal Arts Mathematics 10 Probability and Statistics 11 Trigonometry 12 Analytic Geometry 13 Mathematical Analysis 14 Mathematical Studies 15 Calculus 16 AP Calculus H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 99 Mathematics - 17 Business Mathematics 18 Applied Mathematics I, II - B Teacher Activities 1 Utilize lecture/class discussion 2 Use audio-visual aids such as ITV, films, video cassettes, and overhead calculators 3 Demonstrate on marker board, overhead projector and with computer simulatiOn 4 Teach, test, and remediate individuals, small groups and large groups 5 Lead group activities 6 Plan in teams and individually 7 Answer indIvidual student questions 8 Prepare students local, state and national mathematics competitions 9 Confer with individual students 10 Plan bulletin boards and interest centers 11 Make recommendations as to selection of materials and equipment 12 Assist with assembly programs 13 Sponsor enrichment programs 14 Help to plan and to lead field trips 15 Participate in teacher, parent and student conferences 16 Use manipulatives in the instructional process 17 Coordinate student use of manipulatives to facilitate the learning process 18 Provide for co-operative team learning - - - - - - - - c. Student Activities 1 Work and study independently 2 Study in groups of two or more 3 Complete small group assignments 4 Complete large group assignments 5 View ITV, video cassettes, overhead calculators and computer simulators in groups and individually 6 Complete assignments on marker board and computer 7 Complete homework assignments 8. Utilize computer assisted instruction 9 Work in a computer lab setting a minimum of one day per week - - - - - IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio -L.3.Q.. Student Capacity Per Period..l.8D.. Total No of Teachers ....a.. Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-1.I.... - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIL398 March 1998 100 Mathematics - V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Area may be used for night classes and communj.ty school activitIes B The architect shall study the shape of typical classes to provide for efficient operation and communication utilizing various electronic media, as well as traditional teacher/student communications utilizing marker board and wall-mounted illustrations The spaces must also provIde flexibility for large and small group instruction as well as well as the capability for individualized. Electrical outlets shall accommodate use of computers as instructiOnal tools VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F ) .. N/ A Teacher Storage shall be built-ins and located inside Teacher Planning VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST I No. of I DacriplloD of A- I Square Feet I Areas Per Unit I Total MATHEMATICS 6 Classroom 810 4,860 6 Material Storage 70 420 1 Teacher Planning 450 1 Teacher Storage (in Teacher Planning) TOTAL 5.730 VID. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Classrooms 1 Table desk (30), 30" x 29-112", with plastic coated metal work basket 2. Teacher desk, lockable, 36" x 72" 3 Teacher chair 4 Computer/table, 30" x 48" x 26" 5 Operator's chair, adjustable height 6 Chair (36), stackable, 18" 7 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 8 File cabinet, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 9 Table, 30" x 72", mica top 10 Teacher lectern, with shelf underneath 11 Stool, 24" h, backless 12 Flag holder H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 101 Mathematics - 13 Cartesian plane, mounted 14 Computer (8), printer - B. Material Storage 1 Adjustable shelving, 36" x 84" units, mmimum 12" depth, Industnal Grade, maximum amount - C. Teacher Planning - 1 Carrel (8), electric, 24" x 48", accommodate two legal, two-drawer files, suited for left- or right-handed indiVIduals 2 Teacher chair (8) 3 Side chair (6) 4 Conference table, 30" x 72" 5 Typewriter (2), mathematics 6 Typewriter table (2), on casters 7 File cabinet (4), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 8 File cabinet, lateral, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 9 Computer (2), printer 10 Bookcase (4), 72" h x 36" w x 12" d, steel, with adjustable shelves 11 Paper cutter 12 Step stool, 13" h - - - - - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS - A. HeatinglCooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSID- ERA TIONS. - B. Acoustical - Each classroom and Teacher Planing area must be designed and constructed to prevent voice and noise transmission. - C. EIoor - Provide resilient tile in classrooms, Storage and Teacher Planning. - D. Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. - E. Ceiling - Acoustical. - F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - H. Doors - Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior - I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures - In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 102 Mathematics - J Communications - Standard with telephone jack in Teacher Planning Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS K. Electrical 1 Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 2. Teacher Planning a 120-volt duplex outlets b Provide for electric carrels and computer hook-ups L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - Standard. N Fencing - N/A O. Service Drives - N/A P. Parking - N/A Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage a. Teacher Planning area shall have a stainless steel sink in a 10' work counter, formica top, and cabinets below b Classrooms shall have adjustable bookshelves with doors and locks, 30"h. 2. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Each classroom shall have marker boards on all available walls. b Each classroom shall have bulletin board (2), 4' x 6' c. Each classroom shall have one projection screen. d. Teacher Planning shall have a bulletin board, 4' x 4' R. Other Considerations N/A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 103 Mathematics SPATIAL RELATIONSHlPS M ~thematics Class room . . - - . . . - . - - - . - MS= TS Material Storage Teacher Storage - - - - Madlcmallcs - MEDIA CENTER I. PROGRAM PIDLOSOPHY The school library media program supports the District's Mission, Fundamental Beliefs and Priorities for educational excellence. The number one priority, "To increase literacy for all students in reading, writing, listening, speaking, viewing and presenting," is also the number one priority of each school's library media program. The media center is the school's center for information and inquiry, for students, faculty and the school community The center provides services, instruction, materials, equipment and personnel to assist the faculty in developing an effective educational program. Primary goals of the library media program in Palm Beach County schools are imbedded in the concepts of collaboration, access, literacy, inquiry and diversity Today's media center is designed for flexible use and electronic adaptability, ready for new technologies as traditional methods are changing for delivery of instruction. Effective instruction today requires audio, video, and electronic digital resources, including access to information available on the Internet. The media center is part of the local school area network (LAN), and the district-wide area network (WAN) so that information can be exchanged electronically within the school, within the district, and with the world. Provisions for students and staff to use this wide network at multiple locations within the center require full consideration when designing library media space. II. PROGRAM GOALS CRITICAL IN THE DESIGN OF MEDIA CENTERS A. Collaboration Provide physical quarters of sufficient size and flexibility to allow large, class-size, small groups and individuals of students to work in an aesthetically appealing atmosphere. Provide space for consultative services with teachers. Provide electronic capacity for effective utilization of media materials and equipment by teachers and staff. B. Access Provide access to the media facilities, media staff, resources and equipment at the time of need for all, regardless of abilities or disabilities. C. Literacy Provide a selection of multi-media materials and the electronic capability of utilizing these resources in varied formats Provide guidance to students and faculty for effective selection and utilization of resources and equipment. H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 104 Media Center - Provide current information about emerging technologies and how to incorporate these new developments into effective instructional practice - Provide for continuous evaluation and updating of the resources available in the media collection to assure that the school's mission, goals and objectives are being met. - D Inquiry Provide purposeful instruction for students in research skills - Provide opportunities for on-line searching and media-oriented expenences - Provide opportunities for faculty to keep up-to-date and current with instructional techniques and with their specialized curricular area. - E. Diversity Provide guidance in the use of school, community, and global resources for the enrichment of individual experience. - Provide an environment encouraging multi-cultural and global experiences. - ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES - The school media center serves students, teachers, adults on the staff, admini~trators, and people in the local community The center's space serves as a meeting place for students, staff, and community groups, requiring flexible access for activities during the school day, - after school hours, and during the evening hours A. Activities for Students - 1 Receiving instruction in large, class-size and small groups - 2 Using the Closed-Circuit TV, small projection equipment or digital computer technology - 3 Displaying creative activities. - 4 Participating and interacting in lectures, demonstrations, and other instructional activities. - 5 Preparing media productions and presentations. 6 Browsing and leisure reading of books, periodicals, newspapers, computer _ programs and the Internet. 7 Engaging in inquiry with reference resources books, CD-ROM and the - Internet. Printing search results - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 105 Media Center - 8 Engaging in individual study for career information. community resources, college information, and self-improvement.. 9 Printing and publishing individual reports, resumes, letters, and other documents related to educational purposes 10 Searching, identifying and requesting information or resources from other library or information locations B. Activities for School Faculty and Staff All ten capabilities listed above for students are also applicable for faculty and school staff Other staff activities are' 1 Previewing materials for classroom use. 2 Preparing instructional materials 3 Meeting with media director and staff or other colleagues for collaboration purposes 4 Utilizing the media center's resources and other external resources via !TV or the Internet for professional development. c. Activities for Media Center Specialist and Media Staff 1 Providing Technical Services selection, acquisition, receiving orders and donations, cataloging and database maintenance, processing, binding, and other functions required to organize the collection of a library media center 2. Functioning as school leader for technology development through providing new resources and technologies in the center and by providing technical expertise as a member of school improvement and technology committees. 3 Providing instruction for students and faculty in inquiry methods, library research, and presentation of the results. 4 Assisting students, faculty and staff in selecting and effectively using instructional media in all formats. 5 Planning with teachers, team coordinators and paraprofessionals for curriculum development and use of instructional media for various school disciplines. 6 Maintaining accurate financial records and budgeting effective use of resources and time H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1I1.398 March 1998 106 Media Center - 7 Supervising media staff, student aides an4 volunteers - 8 Coordinating media center functions with school administrators, faculty, community leaders, students and school staff, mcludmg custodial and secretanal personnel - - IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Media Specialist-Student Ratio 1 per 1000, 2 over 1000 Student CapaCIty Per Period --2.5..Q.. Total No of Media Specialists -2- Total No of Clerical Stations ----L Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used ~ - - - V. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES - A. New developments in educational programs, instructional methods, developing technologies and scheduling patterns, with the utilization of media resources which accompany these new developments, dictate flexibility for the media program. _ Physical facilities must be flexible in order to meet the changing needs of the school program. - B Expanded individual and group use of new digital media and computer capabilities requires adequate facilities that are adaptable for varied viewing and listening activities - C Future trends include full networked access, LAN and WAN, including the Internet. - D Community schools are growing rapidly with the media center integral to that initiative. Access from outside needs to be considered in design. - E. Both students and faculty require publishing and production capabilities, including video production, computer publishing, and multi-medialmulti-image presentations. - F Multi-functional use of Closed-Circuit TV studio facilities includes previewing, editing, broadcasting, and Distance Learning activities for groups of students and school staff - G Training and inservice requirements for both faculty and student are increasing in all technical areas, and flexible space is necessary for these activities. Computer lab access is critical and should be adjacent to Closed-Circuit TV Production. - - - H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 107 Media Center - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) A As recommended by the Committee for Media Center Specifications, facilities shall be merged as follows A V storage and repair, closed-clrcUlt TV and storage, media production and copy room. B Conference rooms at 340 nsf, each, is taken from Admmistrative Conferences The configuration of these areas are. 625 nsf for Administration, 200 nsf for Student Services and 680 nsf for Media Center Each of these areas need conference space to better serve the school. C Staff restroom shall be accessible to all staff and not located inside the director's office D The need for large numbers of printed materials is declining and the need for additional technology facilities and computer stations is increasing, therefore, the dimensions of the reading/stacks area requires modification. 600 nsf from the reading/stack area shall be used as a room for technology instruction, this room shall be located adjacent to the Closed-Circuit TV Studio 9,225 nsf of reading/stacks calculated on the S.R.E.F norm, minus 600 nsf for this room leaves 8,625 nsf for reading/stacks area. E. Group projects room shall serve the school as a computer research laboratory VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST I No. of I Description of Areas I ~u:rf Feet T"tal I Areas Per t I otal MEDIA CENTER 1 Reading Room/Stacks 8,625 1 Technical Processing 850 1 Professional Library 850 1 A V StoragelMaintenance Repair 1,375 1 Periodical Storage 375 2 Conference 340 680 1 Closed-Circuit TV Production 1,750 1 Technology Instruction Room 600 1 Closed-Circuit TV Storage 1,254 1 Media Production/Copy Room 1,500 1 Small Group Listening 180 1 Group Projects 1,254 H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 108 Media Center No. of Areas Descri tion of Areas S(r.qare Feet Total Per unit I Total - - MEDIA CENTER (continued) 1 Media Specialist's Office 150 - 1 Restroom TOTAL 19.443 - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Reading Room - 1 Chair for circulation desk (2), adjustable, 24" x 31", swivel, padded with back, with five extra large caster legs 2 Depressible book truck on springs (2) - one at circulation desk/front drop, one - at Technical Services area 3 Chair (184), 18" 4 Book truck (4), three slant shelves, 12" h x 12" d, double-faced, four swivel - wheels 5 Atlas stand with shelves 6 Dictionary stand (3), portable - 7 Globe, 24" with floor stand 8 Wall clock (2) 9 Newspaper stand/current periodical shelving - 10 Portable marker board (2), heavy-duty 11 Pencil sharpener (4), electric 12. Table (40), rectangular for four student with two tables for six - 13 Table, 31" h, handicapped height 14 Lounge furniture to seat 20 15 Copy machine (2), coin-operated - 16 Automatic time stamp (2) 17 Step stool (5), kick-step type 18 Stapler, electric - 19 Art work-posters, graphic art, lithographics, flags, etc. 20 Book security system 21 Instructional computer area with 20 - 40 stations, CD-ROM included, and at - least (5) printers and cluster equipment. Option. Print to remote location for control of student printing. 22. Computer tables, wet for the number of stations in Item #21 - 23 Computer chairs for every station 24 Multimedia station, including stand alone PC with CD-ROM drive, laser disk player, printer, SVHS output, TV monitor, on a single large wheel cart for - mobility 25 Signage for various areas, stacks, and services in the reading room. 26 Security camera system - 27 Television (2), 30") on A V carts - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 109 Media Center - Stack Area Shelving is standard, manufactured adjustable libr,l;lry shelving, with standard heights between 42" and 84" Shelving should be accompanied by readily usable book ends. Backing is required Provide linear footage for the high school collectIon at either l' per ten books or 1 5 linear ft. per student. B Technical Processing 1 Telephone with FAX unit 2 Secretary's desk (3) and work table, computer adaptable, with 60" return 3 Secretary's chair (5) 4 File cabinet (4), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Adding machine 6 Book truck with swivel wheels (2), utility truck 7 Electric pencil sharpener 8 Saddle stapler, electric 9 Electric three-hole punch 10 One-hole punch 11 Chair (4) 12 Computer (3), with printer and UPS unit, connected to school LAN, one designated for library media management system, SirsilUnicom, two with word processing and publishing software 13 TV with VCR (2), for broadcast monitoring, on a movable A V cart 14 Memory typewriter, electric, long carriage, 10/12 pitch 15 Doors on built-in cabinetry must be lockable C. Media Production and Copy Room 1 Personal computer, with printer and UPS unit (2 - 4) with word processing, publishing, and presentation software programs, connected to school LAN, one with color scanner and color printer 2 Paper cutter (2) one, 36" x 48", one, 12" x 12" 3 Stapler, electric, heavy-duty 4 Copying machine (3 - 4), with collator and stapler 5 Spiral binder, plastic comb, with assorted supplies 6. Automatic test corrector, Scan-Tron (2 - 3) 7 Bulletin board 8 Bulletin board paper rack, portable 9 Pencil sharpener, electric 10 Programmer/slide dissolver, with cassette recorder/sync feature 11 Laminator, roll, 24" 12. Laminator, roll, 12" 13 Refrigerator, film storage 14 Chemical storage cabinet, lockable, fire resistant 15 Rizzograph copier machine H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 110 Media Center - 16 Poster-making machine, computer compatible 17 Table (3), 72" 18 Chair (8) 19 Copy stand 20 Combination compact disc/tape player, recorder and speakers, not portable 21 35 mm camera(s) 22 Eraser, electric 23 Typewriter, electnc 24 Thermofax 25 Light table, portable 26 Dry mount press (optional) - - - - D Professional Library - 1 Lounge furniture, combination of sofa chair(s) and table 2 Large work table 3 Chair (8) for tables and computer station 4 Computer table, wet 5 Telephone 6 Personal computer, with printer, connected to school LAN 7 Television/VCR connected to school CCTV network, on portable cart - - E. A V Storage - 1 Carousel slide projector (5), three with 8" lens, 8"fl.8 2 Carousel slide trays (15) 3 Overhead projectors - one per teaching station desirable (40 minimum) 4 Compact disc/cassette recorder/player, classroom model (40) 5 AMIFM radio/cassette player with audio output (2), battery-operated 6 Projection cart- one per teaching station (10 kept in A V Storage for circulation) 7 Portable projection screens (4), tripod, rear projection, varying sizes 8 Pencil sharpener, electric 9 Speaker/amplifier (2), with 15' - 20' cord with audio plug 10 Portable sound/microphone systems (6), compact disc and cassette, two in professional podium stands 11 VCRs, table models, one per teaching station (40 minimum) (5 kept in A V Storage for circulation) 12. SVHS Camcorder (8), package complete with tripod 13 Table, 72" 14 Chair (4) 15 Extension cords, (50) at 25', (100) at various lengths 16 Surge protector (10) 17 Video laser disc player (5), SVHS output 18 Portable data/video projector (4), with video data input and hard shell 19 Overhead projector panel (3) for computer screen projection 20 Video tape, VHS, rewinder 21 Video data adapter, Elite (3) with one per teaching station 22 Map, wall-hanging, variety (20) - - - - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 111 Media Center - 23 Map storage unit 24 Opaque projector 25 Overhead/Computer cart 26 Television, 27", one per teaching station (5 kept in A V Storage for cIrculation F Periodical Storage 1 Concealed storage area for server and CD-ROM tower G Closed-Circuit TV (production and Control) and Storage 1 Camera (3), studio model with dollies, tripods and cables, 6" monitor viewfmders, manual focus, manual zoom control, remote control, heavy-duty tripod 2 Teleprompter system with monitor, computer or manually driven, on each camera, optional, and must conform to G.1. 3 Computer electronic character generator with surge protection 4 Hand-held microphone (5), with table stands and cables 5 Hand-held microphone (2), wireless 6 Microphone (5), lapel-directional with cables 7 Microphone (5), lapel wireless/battery operated 8 Flat table microphone (2), with cables 9 Shotgun microphone (2), with large boom stands with cables 10 Microphone mixer, eight-channel, with appropriate transformers 11 Switcher, video with ability to key video over video 12 Monitor (4), color, thee on rack mounted tri-pac 13 VCR (2) 14 CD audio system, broadcast quality, cueable 15 Cassette audio tape deck, broadcast quality with cables, cueable 16 SVHS editing system, including: character generator, video/audio switcher that can key video over video, 1h" editing VCR (3), monitor (3), CD audio system of professional quality, cassette audio tape deck of professional quality , with cables (separate from control room video production system) 17 Camcorder (12), inexpensive; one: SVHS, all with tripods 18 Mini-video light adapters for camcorders with battery charger (2) 19 Preview station with television and VCR 20 Portable sound system including: 200w audio amplifier, 8-channel audio mixer, compact disc player, cassette deck, rack-mounted and all in protective case, plus speaker (2) and appropriate cables 21 Extension cord (8), one retractable 22 Extension cord, auto XLR (8), 25' (4), and 50' (4) 23 Cable extension for camera (3) 24 Rectangular table, 60" with chair (5) 25 Adapter kits for audio and video, including digital connectors 26 Professional electronic tool kit 27 Headset with microphone (7), hardwired or wireless communication 28 Speaker (2), professional quality, one powered H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 112 Media Center - 29 Step ladder, 6' (8-10) 30 Quartz 6" light on tripod with barn door (3) 31 Flood/spotlight with barn door and clamp (3) 32 Personal computer with broadcast and character generator software for editing 33 Surge protector UPS unit 34 Equipment rack and AC power strips 35 Headset for audio system 36 Channel combiner for channels 3 and 4 37 Cable assortment, BNC, RCA, SVHS, 9 PIN 38 Audio monitor speaker (2), small 39 Doors on built-in cabinetry to be lockable 40 Router switch, when more than three video origination points are provided - - - - H. Group Project/Technology Instruction Room - 1 Personal computer work station (30) 2 Computer (30), printer (4) - I. Director's Office - 1 Desk (2), lockable, six-drawer, one drawer should be file size with secretarial return for personal computer 2 Chair (2), padded swivel 3 Guest chair (2) 4 Filing cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Adding machine (2) 6 Wall clock 7 Personal computer (2), with printers, connected to school LAN and WAN 8 Television/VCR player/recorder on A V cart - - - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS - A. Heating/Cooling/V entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. At the start of Phase II design, discuss HV AC system and control of relative humidity during unoccupied times with the Senior Engineer, Department of Architect Services, SDPBC. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - B. Acoustical - Provide sound-absorbing ceiling. TV production to be soundproof. Conference rooms to be acoustically treated. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERA- TIONS - C. EIoor - Provide resilient tile for easy cleaning. - D Walls - Provide book drop from outside into media center by main entrance. Closed-Circuit TV Studio shall be equipped with double scrim curtain. - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 113 Media Center - E Ceiling - Standard. Major ceiling areas shall be, approxunately, 12' Rooms under 250 nsf shall have lower ceilmgs Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERA- TIONS F Lighting - Color-balanced fluorescent lightmg evenly distributed to all areas of the reading room. Area shall have a master control switch with separate switches in each area. Lights above outside doors to conference rooms, and TV production room to alert visitors that rooms are "in use" Row lighting for studio ceding Place exit lights as appropriate Mounted racked theatrical lighting for studio ceihng Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Adequate exterior windows so that media center can be functional during power failure Interior wmdows from media specialist's office to reading room, conference rooms to reading room, technical processing to reading room and listening room to reading room. Angled window between TV production and TV control with bottom at 30" above floor Glass door in small group listening room. Window treatments to darken reading room for presentations. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H. Doors - Standard. Provide a door from the TV control to TV production room and a door between the media specialist's office and the technical processing room, as close to the reading room as possible. Provide a set of double exterior doors for loading purposes, as close to the TV production room as possible. Provide a Dutch door or a door with a box-office type window between periodical storage room and the reading room. The A V storage room door shall have a solid core. Group projects shall have outside entry for community use and a dead bolt into the media center Interior doors shall be half glass where appropriate. Secondary exits with local buzzer alarm shall be provided. Closed-Circuit TV Studio shall have emergency doors exist to outside, with panic bar No exterior hardware. Theft detector devices shall be located immediate to exit(s) of reading room. Refer to GENERAL CON- SIDERATIONS I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures 1 Media Production. Provide single sink with goose neck faucet (HW & CW) 2. Technical Processing: Provide single sink with goose neck faucet (HW & CW) 3. Reading Room: Provide electric water cooler 4. Darkroom. Provide single sink with goose neck faucet (HW & CW) Provide soap and towel dispensers for each sink. J Communications 1 Intercom from central administration to all areas except CCTV studio 2 Intercom to CCTV control room and reading room have a lock-out feature WIth emergency override H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lIl.398 March 1998 114 Media Center - 3 Telephone jacks at the circulation desk, in dIrector's office, technical processing room, TV control room, professional library and media production room. - - 4 Independent low-power sound system located m reading room. 5 Voice data, network commumcation and ITV reception m the followmg areas CIrculation desk, director's office, technical processing room, professional library, A V storage, CCTV control room, media production group projects, and throughout the reading room where computer stations will be located. - - 6 Voice data and network lines require built-m surge protection. - 7 ITV broadcast capability from technical processing room, reading room, CCTV control room, cafeteria, auditorium(s), principal's office, main sporting field, courtyards, and gym. - K. Electrical - Reading room - retractable floor outlets to be placed for wet carrels DO NOT locate wall outlets behind or above stacks However, outlets could be placed in baseboard below bottom shelf. Two duplex outlets per wall, or current building code, whichever is greater, shall be located in conference room, periodical storage room, professional library, media production room, media specialist's office, technical processing room, and group projects room. Locate 125 volts, 20 amp receptacles near every ITV outlet. - - - Above counters in darkroom, media production and copying room and technical processing room, provide strip outlets. Power in the media production and copying room shall be sufficient to run laminator, ditto machines, dry mount presses, copy machines Etc., simultaneously; all outlet shall not be on same circuit. Provide wiring for library book security system. Provide conduit and wiring for !TV /CCTV and Media Management System. There shall be duplex outlets placed near the center of the reading room. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - - L. Gas and Air - N/A. - M. Safety - Standard. Display cases shall be constructed of shatterproof safety glass. If glass in ITV, it shall be tempered 1/4" - 5/8" - N Fencing - N/A. o Service Drives - A service drive shall be reasonably accessible to the media center - P Parking - Adequate parking for media personnel, visitors, and the community shall be provided in close proximity - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 115 Media Center - Q Built-ins I Built-in work/storage space a. Reading Room (1) Circulation desk, with book drop, to include cIrcuitry for automated circulation and security system. (2) Display case, lockable, 4' x 8', optional b Stack Area (1) Bookcases, 12", with backing and adjustable shelving for 25,000 volumes of varying heIght. (2) Adjustable shelving with backing for 4.000 reference books and A V materials These shelves need to be deeper than regular shelves, 15" , and shall not exceed 80" in height. (3) Adjustable shelving, 15", for 1,000 kits of varying heights c. Technical Processing (1) Base and overhead cabinets with sink on one wall. (2) Work counter along one wall with cabinets and drawers below Drawers shall vary in depth. 6", 9", 12" with drawer stops (3) One typewriter/computer station shall be built-in. (4) Shelving adjustable with backing for books. compact discs, videos, oversized books, varying in depth from 10" - 15" (5) Shelving for videos, compact discs, laser discs. d. Professional Library (1) Standard library shelving on two walls. (2) Built-in counter for computer work station. e. A V Storage and Repair (1) One wall of counter space with lockable cabinets above and below, and stainless steel sink with laboratory-type faucet. (2) Upnght storage for maps and A V screens H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 l!6 Media Center - (3) Pegboard, approximately, 6' x 6', for storage of cords, headsets, etc - (4) Storage for projection cart (75) f Periodical Storage (Optional) - (1) Standard library shelving with backing, adjustable, enough to accommodate 675 magazine files - (2) Work counter along one wall, approximately, 30" h - g. Conference Room - Counter with lockable cabinets below, approxi- mately, 8' I, on one wall - h. Closed-Circuit TV (l>roduction and Control) and Storage - (1) Control room has counter on available walls with adjustable shelving above and cabinets below, lockable. - (2) Pegboard, 4' x 7', for cord storage on back wall of control room. - (3) Cabinet for hanging costumes, lockable, in storage area, approxi- mately 30 lineal feet. - i. Media Production and Copy Room These areas could be combined to provide one large area - (1) Counter-height working area along one wall with cabinets above and below Counter shall contain sink with laboratory-type faucet. Provide electrical power strips above the counter - (2) Base cabinets with drawers along one wall. Some drawers shall be 36" w for posters, etc., drawer stops on all drawers - - (3) Island work area with open shelving to store large tag board, construction paper, posters, etc. Electrical outlets shall be placed on the counter top edge, not at baseboard. - j Small Group Listening Room - Counter along one wall, with electrical outlets to accommodate chair (2), and seated students - k. Group Projects - Counter along walls, with electrical power strip above for computer station (20-30) - - H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 117 Media Center - l. Media Specialist's Office (1) One wall of base cabinets with open shelving above, one sectiOn designed for computer workstations with electncal outlets (2) Windows to observe reading room charge desk, technical processmg, WIth vertical bhnds m. Media/Faculty Restrooms - Counter with sink, mirror above, small storage cabinet. 2. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Bulletin Boards (1) Reading room, technical processing, AV storage, 4' x 8' (2) Media Specialist's office, 2' x 3' (3) Reading room, entry area, 3' x 6' b. A V Screens - One each in Professional Library, Group Projects, Conference room, Media Production, one, 70" x 70", powered, in Reading room. c. Signs - Interior - directional and informational. i.e., Fiction, Non- Fiction, loo's, 200'8, 300's, etc. 3. Other Built-ins a. Reading Room - Book/magazine security system R. Other Considerations 1 When designing Closed-Circuit TV, be aware of contiguous areas and noise levels, e.g , lavatory facilities, common halls. 2. An independent low power sound system shall be provided for the reading room. The amplifier shall be placed in the vicinity of the circulation desk with speakers located throughout for even sound distribution. 3 !TV head-in amplifier shall be located in CCTV control if cable run is less than 500' from base of ITV tower H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 118 Media Center - - SPATIAL RELATIONSIIn>S - Media Center - - - - - c - ./ - - ~d:1.ng S 6 Room - - - - C ~ Circulation Arua S == Stacks - - - - Media Center - MUSIC I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY The purpose of the Music Education program is to develop in students the sensItivities, feelings, understandings, cultural values, enjoyment and skills necessary for them to have an aesthetic response to utilize and enjoy music as part of everything they do throughout life The development of creativity can be greatly enhanced through music education. The high school music program must offer those experiences which enable a student to listen to, write and perform music. Only through these three experiences can objectives of music education be achieved. II. PROGRAM GOALS Instructional Programs - The high schools shall have a music curriculum which includes experiences in singing, playing, composing, arranging, studying general music (literature, history) and performing in the student's choice of media. ill. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. General Music 1 Exploratory courses in vocal, electronic, compositional, history and literature, and social instruments electronic pianos, baritone ukes, guitar, melodicas, auto harps and percussion instruments. 2. Music history/theory B. Vocal Classes 1 Mixed chorus 2. Intermediate mixed chorus 3 Vocal solo and ensemble 4 Advanced chorus C. Instrumental Classes 1 Beginning band instrument 2 Intermediate band 3 Advanced band 4 Beginning orchestra 5 Intermediate orchestra 6 Advanced orchestra H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 119 Music - IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE - Teacher - Student Ratio 1.50 (Average) Student Capacity Per Penod ~ (Average) Total No of Teachers..l Total No of Aides N/A Grades Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used 7 + - - V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Piano laboratory for 18 students per class - B Green Room/Recording room with facilities to tape and play back vocal, band and orchestra rehearsals and performances. - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) - A. One Resource room and Material Storage out of allotment @ 570 nsf for piano keyboard. - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST - II I'!o. of Square Feet Description of Areas Per Unit I Total MUSIC 1 Vocal Music Classroom 1,596 1 Ensemble Room 300 3 Practice Room (combine into one) 70 210 1 Reference Room 100 1 Material Storage 155 1 Robe Storage 150 1 Teacher Planning JOO Subtotal 2,611 1 Band Classroom 2,000 1 Ensemble Classroom 300 3 Practice Room 70 210 1 Reference Room 100 1 Instrument Storage 600 - - - - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 120 Music ..... No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total MUSIC (continued) 1 Material Storage 155 1 Uniform Storage 175 1 Studio 180 1 Teacher Planning --.l.OO.. Subtotal 3,820 1 Recording Room 225 1 Resource Room (piano Keyboard) (570) 1 Instrument Repair Jlll TOTAL ~ VITI. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Classrooms 1 Special music chairs, no racks, plastic backs with desk attachment for music theory class a. Vocal - 100 b Orchestra - 60 c Band - 110 d. Ensemble stools - 8 2 Storage trucks (2), for chair removal 3 Music stands (125) 4 Acoustical shell, folding (1 set for performance group) 5 Conductor system (3), podium - optional 6 Tables, 30" x 72" (6) 7 Sound equipment (2), portable 8 Choral risers, seven sections - Vocal Classroom seated risers and portable stage optional 9 Tablet arm chairs (15) - Orchestra Classroom 10 Grand piano, 6' - Vocal Classroom NOTE. CHORAL ROOM to have small Grand or studio upright at director's discretion 11 Seated risers, optional 12. Portable staging, optional 13 Band folio cabinet with wheels 14 Choral folio cabinet with wheels 15 Percussion cabinet with wheels 16 Photocopy machine, recommended 17 Portable rack to move music stands 18 Piano dolly to move pIano/with cover H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 121 Music - B. Piano Laboratory/Resource Room (optional) 1 Piano for 18 students - C. Teacher Planning - 1 Teacher desk and chair (2) 2 Student chair (4) 3 File cabmet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Computer (2), pnnter (2) - D Reference Room - 1 2 3 File cabinet (15), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable Card catalogue (3), six-drawer Paper cutter - E. Ensemble Room - 1 Upright piano for ensemble rooms and practice rooms - F. Instrument Inventory - To be designated at time of construction. G. Miscellaneous Items - Speakers built into classrooms that can be utilized with or - without recording room equipment. IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS - A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HVAC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. At the start of Phase II design, discuss HV AC system and control of relative humidity during unoccupied times for instrument storage and robe storage with the Senior Engineer, Department of Architect Services - - B Acoustical - Provide optimum acoustics in rehearsal and teaching areas For detailed information, refer to Chapter VI of the MENC publication, MUSIC BUILDINGS, ROOMS AND EQUIPMENT (Washington, Music Educator's National Conference, Current Edition) The maximum recommended background noise level is 25 decibels with the optimum somewhat lower Refer to "R. 6 Hearing Conditions " - - c. EIooI - Provide carpet in practice rooms, recording room and piano keyboard room. Provide rubberized flooring in all other areas. - D .wans - Treat walls acoustically to prevent sound transfer to adjacent spaces used for instruction. Walls shall be constructed to roof deck. Walls and ceilings shall be acoustically treated to provide maximum acoustical effect in each classroom, ensemble room and mUSIC practIce room. - - - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 122 Music - E. Ceiling - Acoustically treated for best musical sound in each classroom, ensemble room and music practice room. For minimum ceiling heights see DOE. 6A-2 033 F Lighting - Standard G Windows - No outside windows No w1Odow 10 or near entrance doors View windows 1Oto classrooms and practice area. H. Doors - All storage, ensemble practice and other inside doors must be lockable for security Doors must be secure against break-in to protect eqUipment. Doors between teacher stations shall have two-way locks Doors in instructional area shall be acoustically treated to reduce sound transmission. Doors leading from the rehearsal area to the outside shall be designed so that large instruments can be moved and groups of students can enter and exit quickly In piano storage (off stage), where 9' concert grand piano is stored, doors are to sw10g out. I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures Material Storage. Provide single sink with goose neck faucet (HW & CW) Provide soap and towel dispensers. Provide electric water cooler that is accessible to the music area. J Communications - Connect instructional areas and practice rooms to master intercom system. Offices shall be equipped with telephone jacks. Locate clocks at rear of the rehearsal area to reduce the number of "clock-watchers" Provide buzzers, not bells Provide speakers adequate for large spaces K. Electrical - Provide master switch for instrumental and choral areas inside and near the entrance Provide multiple outlets for use of audio-visual equipment, amplified instruments, and other general needs. Each side wall and the back wall to have minimum of three outlets Front wall to have a minimum of four outlets, placed at convenient intervals. Provide microphone jack in the front of the room. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. L. Gas and Air - N/ A M. Safety - N/A N Fencing - N/ A o Service Drives - Because of the heavy use of music facilities at night, and also because of the need to transport students and equipment by bus and truck, the following shall be considered. 1 Provide access to street. 2 Convenient, well-lighted access for a large bus. 3 Convenient, well-lighted service access to the loading doors H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\llI. 398 March 1998 123 Music - P Parking - N/A - Q Built-ins - 1 Built-in work/storage space a. Classrooms - (1) Teacher cabinet, lockable, approximately, 6' h x 3' w (2) Shelves for student textbook storage near entrance doors, floor to mid-wall height (3) Uniform storage cabinets, lockable, full height with louvered doors for, approximately, 200 uniforms - Band Classroom (4) Flag and banner cabinet, lockable, full height, approximately, 50 sq ft. - Band Classroom (5) Marching band folio cabinet - Band Classroom (6) Percussion cabinet - Band Classroom (7) Choral folio cabinets with caster base (2) - Vocal Classroom - - - - b. Recording Room (Green Room) (1) Base cabinet for sound equipment, lockable, on one wall (2) Storage cabinets, full height, lockable, on two walls (3) Shelves, 24" d, on one wall, to begin 4' from floor - - c. Material Storage (1) Base cabinet, lockable, approximately, 8', with sink and counter Lockable, wall-hung cabinets above counter (2) Shelving, full height, on available walls and in center of room for maximum storage. - - d. Instrument Storage - (1) Shelving, full height, maximum amount, appropriate to the size of each instrument case. (2) Cabinets with doors of cellos and string basses - e. Robe and Uniform Storage - (1) Maximum hanging space. - f Teacher Planning (1) Base cabinets with open shelves above, on one wall. - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\UI.398 March 1998 124 Music - 2. Built-in Instructional Aids a Each classroom shall have speaker (2) built mto the front wall to play back music from recordmg room. b Bulletin board, in each classroom (2), piano laboratory (1) c Marker boards m each classroom and pIano laboratory R. Other Considerations 1 Practice Field and Drill Field - Provide stabilized, grassy area the size of a football field, convenient to the building for use of daytime band drills Night drills would require the use of the lighted football field. 2 Music building shall be connected to the other buildings of the campus by well- lighted covered walkways 3 Campus planning shall minimize sound transmission from other areas into music areas 4 Building to be designed so that transmission of sound is contained within the separate sections of the music department so as not to interfere with other music activities. 5 Restrooms to be accessible to all students 6 Hearing Conditions a. Reverberation time to allow for the separation of successive sounds is a critical problem in designing rehearsal facilities The optimum reverberation time for a large rehearsal room is 1 1 seconds. If the time falls below 8 seconds for the band area, or 1 0 seconds for the choral area, the room becomes too dead for effective use. If the time is much greater than 1 1 seconds for band or 1.2 seconds for chorus, the boom, echo, and over-loudness will result, causing severe distortion of sound and producing a difficult rehearsal situation. It shall be noted that the reverberation time for band and choral rehearsal rooms are different and shall not be planned in the same way b Proper distribution of sound depends upon the uniform diffusion of all sounds throughout the room. c Frequency levels, throughout the full spectrum of audible sounds, must be allowed to be diffused equally A proper balancing of materials is essential to eliminate the obvious distortion caused by lack of attention to this detail d. Expert advice shall be sought in designing a music room. e Soft wall finish materials shall be limited to locations higher than students can bump into or reach, i.e , a minimum of six feet above the floor f Classrooms shall be in close proximity to their related areas H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1lI.398 March 1998 125 Music - . SPATIAL RELATIONSBJPS Music - - - . - - / - -.. - Freen Robm Scoragc """ "- / ;;., Uno -- - \ { Laboracory - \. / '- --- - - - - - PR PracCice Room RR == Reference Room - - Music - PHYSICAL EDUCATION I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Physical Education is an integral part of the total educational structure of the Palm Beach County School District. It provides significant contributions toward the total well-being of each child The overall aim of the curriculum for physical education is to offer progressIve, sequential instruction which begins with appropriate baSIC skills and continues to its logical conclusion - physical activities of a lifetime nature We, as physical educators, believe that physical education shall provide each student with sufficient physical activity to maintain an optimal level of fitness and develop acceptable social, emotional and physical traits II. PROGRAM GOALS A. To make a major contribution to the personal fitness of each student including cardiorespiratory fitness, endurance, flexibility, agility, balance, muscular strength, speed, power and coordination. B To develop in each student a positive attitude toward his/her personal involvement in physical activity C To help students understand the nature of rules, skills and strategies as they relate to physical education activities at the appropriate grade levels. D To provide opportunities to help individual students develop a wholesome self- concept and an acceptable perception of others E. To develop an interest and a desire to participate in lifelong recreational sports F To develop healthy attitudes concerning winning, losing and fair play G To develop the ability to identify options available in making personal decisions ill. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Semester courses listed below Schools select the courses they wish to offer 1 Personal Fitness* 2 Fitness Lifestyle Design 3 Fitness Issues for Adolescence 4 Aerobics (3) H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 126 Physical Education - 5 Weight Training (3) 6 Gymnastics (3) 7 SWImming (3) 8 TennIS (2) 9 Golf (2) 10 Paddleball/Racquetball/Handball 11 IndIvidual and Dual Sports (2) 12 Wrestling (2) 13 Track and Field 14 Basketball 15 Soccer 16 Softball 17 Volleyball (2) 18 Self Defense Activities 19 Recreational Activities 20 Outdoor Education 21 Care and Prevention of Athletic Injuries 22 Team Sports (2) 23 Dance Courses (15) 24 Adaptive Physical Education (6) 25 Health-I Life Management Skills* 26 Comprehensive Fitness 27 Racquet Ball (2) - - - - - - - - * Required courses for graduation - B. Course Activities 1 Student Activities - a. Dressing in physical education clothes and tennis shoes b Reporting for roll call - c Participating in class exercises and activities d. Participating in class drills and master skills e. Participating in individual practice or assignments - f Taking fitness, skills, and written tests g Listening to lectures, instructions and taking notes h. Watching demonstrations and other audio-visual instruction in the form of - pictures, diagrams, charts, films, f1lmstrips and slides 1. Going on field trips j Reading and written work - k. Participating in the scheduled class activities I Taking a shower m. Officiating class activities - 2 Teacher Activities - a. Lecturing b Leading exercises c Demonstrating skills, methods and officiating - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 127 Physical Education - d. Organizing squads and learning groups e Supervlsmg squads and groups f Organizing teams and supervising team activities n. Orgarnzing tournaments o Instructing leaders and game officials p Usmg marker board for instruction q Showing films, filmstrips and other audio-visuals r Assembling, organizing and displaying bulletin board materials s Working with test scores, grading and locker assignments 1. Canng for and distributing equipment u. Supervising the use of facilities v Purchasing equipment w Checking attendance, dressing and participation x. Preparing written lesson plans, tests, and skill tests y Organizing special services including towel services, clothing, locks, and lost and found z. Administrating first aid IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.40 Student Capacity Per Period 320 Total No of Teachers -1.0.- Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used.J..i.. V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Design facility to comply with appropriate handicapped accessibility rules. B Adult and Community Education programs will use facilities after regular school hours and weekends Equipment design and purchase shall recognize these uses. C Equip trophy cases with shatterproof glass D Outdoor, P A system speakers shall be strategically located to cover all outdoor teaching areas VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) Outdoor storage building is necessary to complete facility design for storage of equipment used only outside: archery, track and field, tennis, etc. Square footage of 250 is taken from Custodial allotment. Restrooms and office required for community use of outdoor facilities. H :\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 199R 128 Physical Education - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total PHYSICAL EDUCATION 2 Dressing Room 1,504 3,008 2 Locker 125 250 2 Shower 125 250 2 Drying 125 250 2 Storage 564 1,128 2 Restroom 125 250 ~ 2 Teacher Planning 250 500 2 Teacher Planning 100 200 2 Teacher Restroom/Shower 66 132 1 Weight Room 1,000 1 Training Room 250 1 Multipurpose 1,050 1 Wrestling Room 1,680 1 Gymnastics/Dance 1,050 1 Gymnasium Floor 6,500 1 Gymnasium Seating 8,022 1 Gymnasium Storage 376 2 LaundrylTowel 125 250 1 Gymnasium Lobby 1,254 1 Concession 200 2 Ticket Booth 30 60 1 Outdoor Storage 250 1 Public Toilet 502 * 250 SF from Custodial Allotment TOTAL 28.662 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1lI.398 March 1998 129 Physical Education - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Teacher Planning (2) 1 Teacher desk (8) 2 Teacher chair (8) 3 File cabinet (8), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, 4 Chair (8), stackable 5 Computer, printer B. Teacher Planning Advanced P.E. (2) 1 Teacher desk (2) 2 Teacher chair (2) 3 File Cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Shelves, adjustable 5 Computer, printer c. Multipurpose 1 Teacher desk 2. Teacher chair 3 Pile cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Table, approximately, 30" w x 6' I 5 Charr (4), stackable 6 Student desk (40) 7 Teacher lectern 8 Computer (8), printer D Weight Room (6 individual stations) 1 Dumbbell stand, rack (8) with a pair of 2 lb and 5 Ib dumbbells. Continue in 5 lb increments to 35 lbs (8) pr, free-standing 2. Six-station universal gym, free-standing 3 Chin-up bar (4), adjustable, wall-mounted (staff to locate with architect/ contractor) 4 Olympic weight set and bench (4),400 lb set, free-standing 5 Power sled, bolted to floor 6 Weight rack (5), free-standing or attached to floor 7 Curling bar and seat (2), fIXed 8 Pile cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable * All equipment shall operate mechanically H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 130 Physical Education - E. Training Room - 1 WhIrlpool, approximately, 26" d x 22" x 4', permanently fixed to floor with seat 2 Ankle whirlpool with chair 3 Refngerator, 20 C F with adjustable shelves and ice maker 4 Thermo-pad (2), hot 5 Padded table (3), approximately, 30" w x 30" h x 78" I 6 Ice machine, make crushed ice, approximately, 400 Ib capacity - - - F Wrestling Room 1 Wresting mat, 40' x 40', divided into three or more sections with mat - transporters G Gymnasticsffiance - 1 Pommel horse 2 Balance beam (3) I-beginner, I-intermediate, I-advanced 3 Vaulting horse 4 Beat board (2) 5 Parallel bars 6 Uneven parallel bars, fixed 7 Climbing ropes 8 Horizontal bar, fixed 9 Crash and landing pads for each piece of equipment. - - - H. Gymnasium - 1 Glass lexon basketball backboard (2), with give-away rims, forward swing, main court 2. Fiberglass basketball backboard (4), forward swing, side, cross court 3 Each backboard (6) is to be raised and lowered electrically and shall retract away from bleachers 4 Regulation volleyball standards (4), with net (2) for game use in athletic competition with official stand (2) 5 Portable volleyball standards (8) 6 Tumbling mat (12), with velcro on each end, approximately, 4' x 6' 7 Mat truck 8 Bleachers, electric, see 0 3 d. - - - - I. LaundrylTowel (2) - 1 Commercial clothes washer 2 Commercial clothes dryer - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\UI.398 March 1998 131 Physical Education - J Ticket Booth (2) 1 Stool, approximately, 30" h K. Concession Stand 1 Refrigerator, approximately, 18 CUbIC feet 2 Ice machine, small cubes, 200 Ib capacity IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heatil\g/CoolinglV entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements At the start of Phase II design, discuss HV AC systems with the Senior Engineer, Department of Architect Services, SDPBC Because the locker/dressing areas are air-conditioned, these areas shall be separated from the shower/drying areas which are ventilated. Provide ventilation systems for concession stand and outdoor storage building Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS B. Acoustical - Adequate for this type facility Provide for sound damping in locker rooms and gymnasium. C. ElD:m: - Gymnasium floor to be maple or equivalent wood. Uncarpeted hardwood floor for gymnastics/dance and wrestling. Provide floor drains in locker rooms, restrooms, concession stand, training room and laundry rooms. Gym floor to be marked with regulation basketball lines to recognize school colors. Volleyball court lines painted white, 2" lines. The center court line for volleyball and basketball shall be a 4" w white line Weight room to have rubberized flooring Provide resilient tile in offices and storage spaces D Walls - Gym walls shall be masonry with epoxy fmishing paint extending, approximately, 6' from the floor Paint will be extended, approximately, 4' from the top of the bleachers. Mirrored wall in gymnastics/dance. Privacy partition in training room to separate whirlpool from rest of room. E. Ceiling - Acoustical in lobby and office. Impervious finish in lockers, showers and restrooms Acoustical treatment of gym and classroom ceilings. Ceiling in gymnastics must be same height as gym. F Lighting - High-intensity light fixtures with protective covers for gym. Basketball backboards must not cover light fixtures when in stored position. Standard lighting for all other areas Master switch to control lights for locker and shower areas located in teacher's office. Control switch for gym lights located near an exit. Spot lighting for special events Two light fiXtures with protective covers for outdoor storage building Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 132 Physical Education - G Windows - Standard Provide a one-way window between each teacher planning office and the dressing areas - H. Doors - Double-wide doors with removable mullion for gymnasiUm, all storage areas, storage building, weight room and wrestling room. Extra wide doors for - laundry rooms One double-wide door to gym shall be located dIrectly across from the wresthng room to provIde for transporting of wrestling mats - I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures 1 Gymnasium Provide electnc water coolers 2 Student Locker/Dressing Rooms Provide electric water coolers 3 Student Showers. Locate temperature control valve and master shutoff valve for showers in teacher planning 4 Student Toilets Provide water closets, urinals (boys) and lavatories (CW) 5 Teacher Planning Toilets/Showers. Provide water closet, lavatory (CW) and shower (HW & CW) 6 Laundry. Provide (HW) and (CW) to clothes washer 7 Concession Stand, Outdoor Storage Building and Court Areas: Provide water-jet drinking fountains - - - - J Communications - Wall clock (2) located in gymnasium and locker rooms. A clock in each classroom and in each teacher planning office. Telephone jack in each teacher planning office Telephones shall ring in each office. Two-way intercom systems in gymnasium, locker rooms, weight rooms, classrooms and offices. Sound system in gymnastics/dance. Telephone jack in storage room near gymnasium. Utility conduit shall be off center to avoid installation of volley ball floor plates (sleeves) All instructional areas shall be wired for ITV and computer use. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - - - K. Electrical - Locate as per code or as indicated. A control outlet in the middle of the gym on one side of building for electrical scoreboards (2) 208 - volt and (4) 120- volt outlet in each physical education and gym storage room and weight room. (4) 120 - volt outlet in training room with a GFI outlet for whirlpool. (4) 120 - volt outlet in each large teacher planning office. (4) 120 - volt outlet in wrestling room. A 208 - volt and (4) 120 - volt outlet in each laundry room. (2) 120 - volt duplex outlet for outdoor storage. USE GFI IN ALL WET AREAS Locate control box for electrically controlled bleachers where operator can see both sets of bleachers while operating controls Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - - Provide floor and wall plugs for microphone and sound systems A floor plug included with scoring equipment outlet and the other floor plug located on opposite side of gym. Locate a wall plug on each wall in gym, but not behind bleachers - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 133 Physical Education - L. Gas and Air - Natural gas shall be used for domestic water heaters Where natural gas is not available, propane shall be used. Refer to GENERAL CONSID- ERATIONS M. Safety - First aid kit and stretcher located in each large teacher planning office and in the outside storage building Provide security for P E lockers N Fencing - Tennis and racquetball courts shall be fenced Attach a 12' x 30' x 6' fenced enclosure with a double-wide gate to one side of outside storage building Baseball and softball regulation fields shall have a 10' h fence extending from the backstop to 5' beyond first and third base with an access gate o. Service Drives - Locate for delivery of equipment and loading and unloading of teams P Parking - Allow enough spaces for after school and weekend uses, including community school use. Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work counter a. Laumb:ylTowel (2): Counter space for sorting and folding towels, etc., approximately, 30" d x 5' 1. b Concession Stand. Counter space, locate at opemng for serving, approximately, 4' h x 24" d x 10' 1. 2. Built-in cabinets/shelving a. Teacher Planning (4): Shelf (2) for each teacher, approximately, 3' I x 18" d x 24" apart. b MultipuIJ)OSe (2)' Material storage cabinet (2), lockable, approximately, 4' h X 6' w x 24" I with adjustable shelving. Use cabinets for storing Resusci Annies, textbooks, audio-visual, etc. c Physical Education Storage (2): Shelving on three walls, each storage room, begin 3' from the floor, run length. of wall, four rows each wall with adjustable shelving, approximately, 24" d with a 3" lip d. Gymnasium Storage (2): Shelving on one wall, each storage room, begin 3' from floor, run length. of wall, four rows of adjustable shelving, approximately, 24" d with a 3 "lip H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 134 Physical Education e Training Room (2) Shelf above sink, approximately, 18" d x 3' I, storage cabinet, lockable, with adjustable shelving, approxlffiately, 4' h x 6' x 24" d f Gymnastics/Dance: Cabmet for storage of sound eqUipment, lockable, approximately, 72" h x 24" d x 48" w g Laundry/Towel Room (2) Storage cabinet each room, lockable with adjustable shelving, approximately, 3' h x 3' I x 24" d. Locate adjacent to machmes Wall-length shelving on two walls, 4' from floor, three rows each on wall, adjustable shelving, approximately, 24" d h. Ticket Booth (2). A built-in shelf, approximately, 12"-15" d to facilitate handling of tickets and money in ticket window A built-in, lockable, drawer for use with ticket sales i. Concession Stand: Two rows of shelving under counter, approximately, 24" d x 10' I, adjustable shelves with a 2" lip, three rows of adjustable shelving on opposite wall from counter; begin 4' from floor, approximately, 24" d x 10' I with a 2" lip J Outdoor Storage: Shelving on one wall, three rows, length of wall, 24" between rows, shelf 24" d with a 3" lip; begin shelving 4' from floor; on opposite wall, 5' from floor, locate a 2" x 6" X 15' pegboard with 3/4" x 6" pegs inserted at a 60 degree angle at 2' intervals 3 Other Built-ins a. Teacher Rest Room (2). Locker (15), each area, (5) - P.E., (10) - Advanced P.E., approximately, 12" w x 18" d x 72" h. A stainless steel mirror, each area, approximately, 4' x 4' A shower curtain/rod each area. A sanitary napkin dispenser and disposer for female teacher restroom area. b Weight Room: Stainless steel mirror (2), approximately, 4' x 6' Locate on one wall, approximately, 3' apart. c GymnasticlDance: Locate 40' of stainless steel mirror on one wall, approximately, 6' h. Locate 40' of dance bar on opposite wall. Pegboard (2) mounted, approximately, 7' from the floor for climbing Install floor plates for gymnastic equipment. One horizontal bar d. Gymnasium. Install gym divider, ceiling-mounted, electrically operated. Locate above center court marking Collapsible bleachers, located on both side of gymnasium, electrically operated. One separate set of bleachers located at end of gym opposite main entrance Install floor plates for H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 135 Physical Education - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - gymnastic equipment and regulation volleyball standards. Floor plates for the competition volleyball courts shall be located 3 '6" outside of the court markings, directly in line with the center line (4") Additional plates may be installed for practice courts (length of main basket ball court) as space permits Climbing rope (3), approximately, 24' I, fastened to ceiling girders, adjacent to bleachers on each wall Install with pulley system and security lock. Combination basketball, volleyball and wrestlmg electric scoreboard (2) located at each end of gym. Safety wall mats installed where needed Refer to "VIII. FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT (Gymnasium)" H-1, 2, 3,4 are built-ins e Drying Area. Towel hook (40) f LaundQrrowel (2) A row of hooks or pegs, approximately, 18" apart located under lower shelf of each side of room. A sink in each room with hose bibbs and (HW) and (CW) g Training Room (2). Sink with hose bibbs and (HW) and (CW) h. Concession Stand: Sink with (HW) and (CW) Water spigot for hose to clean floor i. Locker Room Restroom (2): Stainless steel mirror, each rest room, approximately, 4' x 8' Do.n2t locate over sinks j Physical Education Locker Room (pEAK LOAD - 160) (2): Locker (1,120), each area, approximately, 12" w x 12" h x 16" d, with a combination lock for each locker Locker (160), each area, approx- imately, 12" w x 36" h 16" d, six-and-one locker combination. Fasten lockers to floor or wall, approximately, 6" to 8" above floor Install benches in front of lockers, approximately, 30" away from lockers Security mirrors as required for visibility in blmd spots k. Physical Education Locker Room (pEAK LOAD - 100) (2). Locker (120), each area, approximately, 15" w x 18" d x 36" h with combination. locks for each locker Fasten lockers to floor or wall, approximately, 6" to 8" above floor Install benches in front of lockers, approximately, 30" away from lockers. This locker room area shall be separated from the main locker room area by means of a wire mesh fence or similar partition. Security mirrors for visibility in blind spots may be installed. 4 Built-in Instructional Aids a. Audio/visual Equipment Needs: All instructional areas wired for ITV and other audio/visual uses Standard A V screen. b Teacher Planning: A tack board, each office, approXImately, 4' x 4' , wall-mounted A wall-mounted pencil sharpener, each office H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 136 Physical Education - c Gymnasium. Tack board (2), approximately, 4' x 4', wall-mounted, visible by all. - d Classroom. Tack board (2), approximately, 4' x 6', wall-mounted, Visible by all Wall-mounted pencil sharpener - e Locker Room (4) A tack board, each locker room, approximately, 4' x 6', wall-mounted and visible by all A marker board, each locker room, approximately, 8' I, visible by all . f Weight Room. A tack board, approximately, 4' x 6', wall-mounted. A marker board, approximately, 4' x 6' - R. Other Considerations - Lockers shall be installed to insure that maximum utilization of room space is made. Locate as many lockers as possible on the walls of the locker rooms. Any and all rows shall be designed so that Instructors will have an unobstructed view of the locker and dressing areas, as well as entrance doors. Showers in each locker room shall be carousel-type Stall dividers and shower curtains for privacy shall be installed in the female shower rooms - - - Locate one spit fountain in the wrestling room, weight room and gymnasium. Pennanently installed metal floor grates in front of all entrances to physical education facilities (locker rooms, gymnasium, etc.) for students and visitors to clean off shoes before entering Locate training room adjacent to partitioned area of Physical Education locker room. - - 1 Outside Facilities - a. Tennis court (8) (1) 21' clearance at each end of court (2) 12' clearance between courts and/or fence, court size, 36' x 78' - Utilize a smooth, hard surface, with appropriate court markings All courts shall be illuminated, fenced, with wind screen and access gates - b Three-wall HandballlPaddleballlRac<lJletball court (6) - (1) playing area, 20' x 40', each court (2) total area, 20' x 50', each court - Playing surface must be of smooth concrete with appropriate court markings A 3' h wire fencing shall be installed on top of each service - wall for ease of ball return. The courts shall be located directly adjacent to tennis courts to facilitate use of both areas for InstructiOnal use and fenced with access gates Court areas shall be lighted for evening use. - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1ll.398 March 1998 137 Physical Education - c. Combination BasketballNolleyball court (4) (1) court surface, 50' x 84', each court (2) clearance, 10', on all four sides Playing surface must be of a suitable smooth, hard surface, marked for basketball and volleyball with contrasting colors Courts shall be illummated for evening use d. Track/field Events Regulation 400 meter, eight -lane running track, with all proper lane markings for standard and metric events Also include the areas for the field events shot put, discus, low jump, triple jump, pole vault and high jump e. Regulation size soccer field located within the track area with locations for portable goals Permanent football goals posts shall be in place for regulation football field. Enough land space shall be provided for softball field (2), 65' bases, one for practice and physical education use and one regulation field with a clay infield. Backstops included in each field. A regulation baseball field (90' bases) shall be built with regulation backstop Include fenced dugout for both regulation softball and baseball fields Enough land space shall be available for large grassed area (3), 150' x 300' minimum, for field games and practice areas for athletic teams and band use. All of the areas above shall be sodded, properly drained and provisions made for proper irrigatiOn. Consideration shall be given to the following. Tennis and basketball courts shall be designed for play by participants facing north and south to diminish the amount of sun in the players' faces Regulation baseball and softball fields shall be designed so that the afternoon sun is over the back and shoulders of the first baseman during practice and games Provider portable aluminum bleacher sections (4), five-row minimum, capacity, 40 - 50 students Install a fitness trail inside fenced area, adjacent to playing fields to be used by physical education classes, athletic teams, faculty and community Irrigation and lighting to be controlled at outdoor storage building Outdoor storage bUilding H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I11.398 March 1998 138 Physical Education . I Description I Sq. Ft. Total I Storage (from P E.) 400 Storage (from Custodial) 250 Restroom -.2Q2 TOTAL Llli . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1ll.398 March 1998 139 Physical Education - SPATIAL RELATI9NSHlPS Physical Education C Concession L Laundry/Toyels R = Rest room S Storage T Ticket Booth TP "~;>rher Planning TR = Training Room Physical Education - RESOURCE ROOMS - I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY - All students are entitled to receive appropriate educational services designed to achieve two major objectives (1) the development of skills and competencies common to all citizens, (2) the development of skills and competencies unique to the students' individual potentialities - II. PROGRAM GOALS - Students will be provided educational prQgrams designed to meet their individual needs - III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES Instruction will be provided in academic, vocational, living skills and enrichment curriculum areas - - IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.15 Student Capacity Per Period 150 Total No of Teachers -1!L Grade Levels For Which Program Is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-1.:t.. - - V. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES - N/A VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F.) - - Vll. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST I No. of I Description of Areas I Square Feet I Areas Per Unit I Total RESOURCE ROOMS 10 Resource Room 480 4,800 10 Material Storage 90 --200 TOTAL ~ - - - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March i998 140 Resource Room - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQillPMENT A. Resource Room 1 Student desk (16) 2 Teacher desk and chair 3 Lectern 4 Stool, 30" 5 Table, 30" x 72" 6 ChaIr (6) 7 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 8 Computer 6, printer B. Material Storage - Material storage is part of classroom. Storage is free-standing IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/CoolingN entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- A TIONS B. Acoustical - Standard. C. Eloor. - Provide resilient tile. D Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint fmish. E Ceiling - Acoustical. F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G. Windows - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS and sections in document that locate resource rooms adjacent to specific areas; see R. Other Considerations. H. Doors - Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - N/A J. Communications - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS K. Electrical - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. L. Gas and Air - N/ A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1I1.398 March 1998 141 Resource Room - M. Safety - N/A N Fencing - N/A 0 Service Drives - N/A P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins - - - 1 Built-in work/storage space - a. Resource Room - (1) Standard storage cabinet, lockable, 5' w x 18" d x 7' h (2) Counter space with cabinets below, approximately, 12' I x 30" h x 30 n w, unless otherwise noted. - 2. Built-in Instructional Aids - a. Resource Room - (1) Marker boards, on two walls, totaling 8' x 24' (2) Tack board, 4 t X 4' - R. Other Considerations 1 Part of a Resource room, 350 nsf shall be utilized for a Pottery area in Art and has been calculated in the Art section. - 2 A Resource room shall be utilized for Computer Enhanced Instruction. See Computer Education. - 3 One-half Resource room and Material Storage, 285 nsf shall be utilized for related classroom instruction in the Foreign Language program. - 4 One-half Resource room, 285 nsf shall be utilized in Language Arts for Publications. - - 5 One-half Resource room, 285 nsf shall be utilized for SpeechlDebate in the Language Arts program. - 6 One-half Resource room for Language Arts, 570 nsf shall be utilized for Readmg Laboratory - 7 A Resource room shall be utihzed in Language Arts for Writing Resource room. - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 142 Resource Room - 8 A Resource room shall be utilized as a Simulator room for Drivers Education. 9 One Resource room and Material Storage, 570 nsf shall be utihzed for Piano Keyboard In Music. 10 Two Resource rooms and Material Storage, 1,140 nsf each shall be utilized as Technical Workshop/Construction in Auditorium. 11 One-half Resource room and Material Storage shall be utilized in the Business Computer Operations Laboratory for instructional purposes in communication and technology H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 143 Resource Room - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS - Resource Rooms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Resource Rooms - - R.O.T.e. I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY The mission of R. 0 T C is to acquaint secondary students with the aerospace age, develop informed citizens, strengthen character, promote an understanding of the role of the citizen in a democratic society, and motivate students for careers m the United States military II. PROGRAM GOALS The R.O T C curriculum integrates a minimum of 120 hours of course work and Leadership Education. The goals of the R. 0 T C program include the following A. Development of personal and leadership skills, B Provide instruction in heritage and requirements of military; C Provide positive examples of careers in civil and military careers. D Provide instruction in military marching and ceremonies, E. Provide instruction in appropriate individual and group behavior; F Present information in communication management. ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Classroom Activities 1 Classroom a. Lecture b Lecture/Discussion c Demonstration d. Supervised study e. Small group discussion f Role playing g Individual skills development h. Testing 1. Viewing of films, videos, and slides j Listening to records and audio tapes k. Display of trophies 1. Bulletin boards for activities H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 144 R.O.TC. - 2 Arms Room (Secure) - a Storage of sIdearms and nfles b Storage of sabers c Storage of flags d Storage of ceremonial urnform items - 3 Material Storage (Secure) - a. Fitting of uniforms b Storage of uniforms and all associated items for 200 cadets c Storage of military films - 4 Conference Room/Teacher Planning - a. Storage of teaching materials b Computer for program management c Storage of US military required publications d. Bulletin board for management notices e Teacher planning and typing - - IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE - Teacher Student Ratio 1.25 Total Number of Teachers ~ Grade Levels 9-12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used. 7 + Student Capacity Per Period. -25..... . - v. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES - A. Simulator used for instruction. B Computers used for merits/demerits - C Military Academic Honorary - D A dressing room in material storage area for fitting and activity preparation, approximately, 16 sq ft. - E Use electronic bulletin board to advertise activities - F Weather station. G Material storage requires separate area for male and female uniforms - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 145 R.OTC. . VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F ) " N/A VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total R. 0 T C. 1 Classroom 1,050 1 Anus Room 150 1 Material Storage 155 1 Conference -225. TOTAL ~ vm. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Classroom 1 Student desk (25) 2 Lectern (wooden) 3 Projection screen 4 4' X 6' enclosed trophy case 5 Clock, battery operated 6 Electronic bulletin board 7 Chair (5), straight back 8 Trash can 9 Bookcase (2) 10 Teacher desk 11 Teacher chair 12. Computer (8), printer B. Arms Room 1 Teacher desk (small) 2 Chair, straight back 3 Pile cabinet, four drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Computer, printer H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 146 R.OTC. - C Material Storage - 1 File cabinet, four drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 2 Mirrors, full length on dressing room door 3 Fire extinguIsher - D Conference Room - 1 Computer, printer 2 Table, 6' 3 Arm chaIr (5) 4 Trash can 5 Telephone - - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS - A. Heating/CoolingIV entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSID- RATIONS - B. Acoustical - Standard. - C. Eloor. - Provide resilient tile. D Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. - - E. Ceiling - Acoustical. F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - G Windows - Standard, except arms room and material storage rooms require bars over windows to protect equipment. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. - H. Doors - All rooms must have dead bolt locks, except dressing room. Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior - I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures - Provide single sink with (CW) - J Communications - Standard. Conference room requires telephone extension for counseling, scheduling of numerous school activities and contact with military representatives Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - K. Electrical - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 147 R.OTC. - L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - Standard N Fencing - N/A 0 Service Drives - P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins Material storage room to be located near service dnve 1 Built-in cabinets/shelving a. Material Storage Room. Counter (1) 24' I x 32" w x 38" h (2) Formica top (3) Adjustable rows of shelves under counter, approximately, IS" x 15", accessible from one side only (4) Electrical outlet in the counter b Adjustable shelving, 16" w, where appropriate c. Full length mirror (2) (1) One will be in the dressing room and one on any convenient wall. d. Storage bin for dirty uniforms (2) (1) Bins shall have a hinged top that swings up and a hinged door in front that swings out (2) Approximate dimensions, 32" h x 32" w x 32" d e. Gun rack to hold simulated rifles (24), exact dimensions will be provided f Classroom. Shelf (5), l' vertical separation, 14"d 2. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Projection screen in classroom b Magnetic board (2), 10' w c Bulletin board (2) H. \DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 148 R.OTC. - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS R.OTC. - - - - - - - - Classroom - - - - - - - - R.O T C. - - SCIENCE I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Today's society requires scientifically literate and laboratory-skilled high school graduates Therefore, it is imperative that they participate in a dynamic science education program with considerable laboratory opportunitIes Such a program will encourage student understanding of the experimental nature of science, increase the level of students' technical skills, and enhance student enthusiasm. II. PROGRAM GOALS A. Maximize laboratory use and provide a laboratory-centered science experience for all students Laboratory experiences include at least 72 class hours (per year) of student laboratory activities, 40% of which may be pre- and post-laboratory preparation by students A minimum of 32 laboratory activities must be scheduled. B Provide a cost-effective laboratory program through more efficient utilization of materials and equipment. C To eliminate equipment duplication. ill. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Courses Offered 1 Earth Science 2 Biology I 3 Biology II 4 Advanced Placement Biology 5 Marine Biology 6 Chemistry I 7 Chemistry II 8 Advanced Placement 9 Chemistry 10 Physical Science 11 Physics I 12 Advance Placement Physics 13 Science Research 14 Anatomy and Physiology 15 Botany 16 Zoology 17 Astronomy 18 Environmental Science 19 Ecology The facilities must be adaptable to all these curricula. It is planned that all courses will be taught with an emphasis on investigation. B. Teacher Activities 1 Conduct lecture/class discussion. 2. Demonstrate for single and double classes in lecture room. 3 Demonstrate on marker board and with overhead projector 4 Plan, provide and lead laboratory actiVities H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 149 Science - 5 Use ITV, films, filmstrips, Closed-Circuit TV, etc 6 Teach, test and remediate individuals, small and large groups 7 Prepare students for science fair competitions 8 Answer individual student questions 9 Plan individually and departmentally 10 Team two teachers with single and double classes in teachmg/lecture room. 11 Use models, charts, whiteboard, in addition to A V projectors and screens 10 Conduct outdoor instructional activities for classes and individual students - - - C Student Activities . 1 Classroom/Laboratory - a. Perform activities in small and large groups b Listen to lecture and participate in class discussions - c. Watch audio-visual and ITV presentations and overhead projections - d Participate in small group activities with display equipment, such as aquarium models and other apparatus for class projects not requiring laboratory facilities - e Maintain animals and plants. - f. Observe specimens under a microscope. Plan, prepare, demonstrate, and exhibit science fair projects - g h. Perform activities which involve the use of gas, water, air and electricity - i. Utilize counter space to read earth science maps, operate, computers, etc. - j Study and experiment individually k. Collect and identify rocks, minerals and soil. - 1. Perform scientific experiments in groups of two These experiments will apply, prove and/or test basic theories which have been presented in the classroom. - m. Use a variety of microscopes This is the only laboratory activity requiring the use of seating. - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 150 Science - n. Utilize apparatus and equipment in performing scientific experiments requiring electricity, water, air, and gas o View ITV, films, and/or filmstrips individually and in groups p Interface the computer with basic laboratory equipment. IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.24 Student Capacity Per Period 168 Total No of Pupils Served Per Day 2.507 Total No of Teachers ~ Teacher Schedule Teaching -6- Planning -L Period Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-1:X.... V. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Provide for inter- and intra-departmental Closed-Circuit TV which will allow for the transmission of appropriate lectures, films, and demonstrations to selected classrooms/laboratories The opportunity for centralizing signal origination shall be available. Selective switching of programming to points of signal origination shall include the classroom/laboratories. B Community School utilization in science-related interest areas, e.g , electricity, astronomy C Science suite shall have a lockable, equipment maintenance room with hose bibb to allow cleaning and storage of wet equipment after field trips. D All science spaces will be a combination classroom/laboratory Rooms will be set up for biology (2) chemistry (2), physics (1), and earthlphysica1 science (2) programs. VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F.) A. Central Material Storage of 400 nsf which includes Chemical Storage is necessary to meet the current state safety standards for the storage of chemicals and for the preparation of chemicals for laboratory/classroom use. B Project storage shall be combined into one space called equipment storage H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 151 Science - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total SCIENCE 7 Science Laboratory/Classroom 1,224 8,568 7 Material Storage 155 1,085 1 Material Storage (Central) (Includes Chemical Storage) 400 7 Project Storage 150 1,050 1 Teacher Planning ~ TOTAL 11.553 - - - - - - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Classroom/Laboratory - 1 Podium 2 Teacher stool, high-back, adjustable, cushioned 3 Student chair (30), standard, with backs 4 Safety container for disposal of contaminated paper and cloth materials and broken and/or contaminated glass 5 Wastebasket (3) (I-tall, 2-plastic) 6 Computer (2), printer 7 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable - - - B. Material Storage 1 Teacher desk 2. Chair on wheels 3 Computer, printer 4 File cabinet, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable - - C. Biology Laboratol'Y (2) - 1 Monocular microscope (30) 2 Stereoscopic microscope (15) 3 Blanket (4), buckets - D Chemistry Laboratory (2) - 1 Fume hood 2 Blanket (4), buckets - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 152 Science - E. Earth/Physical Science Laboratories (2) 1 Stream table (portable) .,.. 2 Weather station with Barograph, Thermograph, etc F Physics Laboratory 1 Standard laboratory equipment G Central Storage 1 Step stool, standard 2. File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 3 Stainless steel laboratory ,cart (5) -- one per two laboratories 4 Dishwasher 5 Refrigerator, explosive-proof, with icemaker for chemicals H. Chemical Storage 1 Step stool 2. Fireproof steel storage cabinet (3), lockable - one cabinet each for caustics, acids and flammables I. Teacher Planning 1 Standard carrel (8), with bookshelf 2. Standard chair, teacher (8) 3 File cabinet (8), in carrel, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Computer (2), printer 5 Bookcase, approximately, 8' w x 6' h xl' d, movable 6 Rectangular table, 30" x 72" 7 Lockable storage area for department chairman IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/CoolingNentilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for .specific requirements. At the start of Phase IT design, discuss HV AC systems with the Senior Engineer, Department of Architect Services, SDPBC Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 1 Chemistly Laboratory. Provide emergency exhaust system. 2. Material Storage: Provide exhaust system to outside. Provide separate make-up air systems for occupied and unoccupied times. 3 Fume Hoods. Provide vent to outside. 4 Chemical Storage Cabinets. Provide vent to outside. B. Acoustical - Standard. H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 153 Science - C. floor - Laboratories to have chemical and damage-resistant surface. Storage area to be chemical-resistant. Chemical storage room to be treated concrete All laboratory rooms to have floor drains under the.shower Resihent tile - D Walls - Construction of chemical storage room shall provide "one-hour" fire rating Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, pamt finish. - E Ceiling - Standard . F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - G Windows - Provide window between material storage and classroom/laboratory Black out curtains in classroom/laboratories - H. Doors - Chemical storage room shall have a one-hour fire rated door All doors must be lockable Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior - I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - Provide (HW) and (CW) at teacher station and in Material Storage. Provide (CW) at student stations Provide towel dispensers in classrooms (one for teacher and minimum of two for students) and in Material Storage. Provide master shut-off valve for water Provide cold water to the deluge shower and eye wash. Based on program furniture and equipment, provide water as required. In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) - - J. Communications - Closed-Circuit ITV control located in central storage area. Telephone wiring in teacher planning. - K. Electrical - 120 - volt electrical service will be provided as specified in "Q .B.uilt:- ins. II In addition, 208 - volt service will be supplied to each classroom/laboratory by one properly designated outlet. Master shut-offs to all electrical outlets in an area will be provided and located in a secure area near the demonstration tables in classrooms and near the exit doors of other areas, with the exception of the chemical storage room where the master shutoff will be located externally and marked. Heat and smoke detectors connected to central alarm system in chemical storage room. Electrical outlets for phone communications for computer stations are necessary in classrooms Electrical power is needed in central storage for dishwasher and refrigerator Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - - - L. Gas and Air - Provide gas at teacher station and at student stations For chemistry laboratory, provide compressed air at teacher station and at student stations. Provide master shut-off valves for gas and compressed air Based on program furniture and equipment, provide gas and compressed air as required. - - M. Safety - Deluge shower, drain and eye bath (double spout wall fountain) One in each classroom and in chemical storage - N Fencing - N/A - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 154 Science - o Service Drives - Provide nearby access to main storage room for deliveries P Parking - N/ A Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage a. All Laboratories/Classrooms (each to have) (1) Teacher demonstration table with 1-112" aCId-resistant top, full service (gas, air, water, electricity) with sink and provisions for rod framework support; storage below including drawers (2) Four-student laboratory table (8), with service station (2) per table including double gas cock, sink (2) with single faucet, rod assemblies and electrical outlet. (3) A wall of counter space with double sink and full service station (gas, air, water, electricity), drawers and base cabinets below; lockable cabinets above. (4) Double-sided fume hood with full service (gas, air, water, electricity), ventilated. (5) Germicidal cabinet for safety goggles. b. Laboratories, Chemical Storage. Central Storage - Drying rack for glassware over sink. c. Laboratory/Classroom - position counters on both side walls with lockable cabinets below and glass-fronted cabinets above. Leave at least 2' of space between counter and upper cabinets to accommodate computers and other equipment. Also provide computer hook-up (6), including phone modem and lock down capability Bookcases, 30"h, adjustable shelves d. Material Storage (Central) - acid-resistant counter on two walls with double, deep sink (2) with residue traps, full service (gas, air, electricity, water), lockable drawers and open, adjustable shelf base cabinets e. Material Storage - acid-resistant counter and sink on one wall, lockable drawers and base cabinets Shelving on cabinets f. Chemical Storage - stone top counter, approximately, 10', with acid- resistant sink and full service; lockable storage below and above H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 155 Science . g. Teacher Planning - base cabinet with counter top and smk, along one wall or island-type Include space for computer, copy machine and paper cutter; provide counter-level electrIcal outlets - 2. Built-in Storage - a. All Laboratories/Classrooms (1) Microscope cabinet to house microscope (60), and stereoscopic microscope (15), lockable, except in physics and chemistry laboratories - - (6) Bookcase with locking, hinged, glass doors and adjustable shelves, approximately, 83" h x 42" w x 16" d. - b Material Storage (Central) - wall cabinets, glass-front doors, lockable, with adjustable shelves on available wall space - c. Material Storage - floor-to-ceiling, adjustable shelves, 12" d, on available wall space - d. Chemical Storage - (1) 100 lineal feet, 14" d, chemical storage shelving, non-corrosive (2) Full-height, adjustable shelving on available wall space, with lip, - non-corrosive 3. Built-in Instructional Aids - a. Provisions for Closed-Circuit TV - b. Wall-mounted A V screens in each teaching station. c. Wall-mounted, stackable, white board/marker board in each teaching station, 12' minimum. - d. Bulletin boards, 12' minimum, adjustable chart-mount away from board in each teaching station. Tack board panels on cabinets doors - - 4. Other Built-ins a. Laboratories/Classrooms - fIre blanket in wall-mounted canister - b. All Laboratories/Classrooms and Chemical Storage (l-regular and 1- CO2 - fire extinguisher - c. Chemical Storage - Explosion-proof refrigerator With ice maker - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1I1.398 March 1998 156 Science - R. Other Considerations 1 Grease traps, where necessary 2 Chemical storage to have outside wall in case of explosion. 3 Student activities taking place in the perimeter areas of the laboratory/ classroom. Classroom will require adequate standing height work surface 4 A dispensing area located in the laboratory will be necessary to issue supplies and eqUipment. H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 157 Science . - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS - Science - - . - - - - - - - - - - - - SCIence - SOCIAL STUDIES I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY The high school social studies program is organized around, and focused on, personal and societal goals that help students become effective participants in the social world. Additionally, the program provides an understandable framework for integrating knowledge from history and the social science disciphnes and for explicating the major knowledge, skills, values, and participation goals of social studies II. PROGRAM GOALS The high school social studies program goals center around the preparation of students for more reflective and effective political participation in their society The program goals would include the following. A. Socialization - aimed at helping the student become an effective member of social groups B. Decision-making processes - aimed at helping students to make effective use of intellectual skills n reaching decisions about his/her social concerns. C. Citizenship - aimed at helping the students to use more effectively the processes of a representative-democratic government. D Knowledge AcqJlisition - aimed at helping the student to acquire and utilize information and intellectual skills provided through social science curriculum. In addition, the program will stress the assimilation of three important components of social studies - subject, learner and society III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. Curriculum 1 American Government 2 American History 3 Comparative Political Systems 4 Economics 5 Law Studies 6 Psychology 7 Sociology 8. World Geography 9 World History 10 Anthropology 11 African-American History 12. Advanced Placement Courses B. Teacher Activities 1 Confer with individual students 2 Consult with small groups on activities, discussions or projects. 3 Lead large or small discussion groups H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 158 Social Studies - 4 Plan bulletin boards and interest centers 5 Make recommendations as to selection of .~aterials and equipment. 6 Plan with team of teachers for class and inter-level group activities 7 Assist with assembly programs 8 Sponsor enrichment programs 9 Provide demonstrations 10 Help to plan and lead field trips 11 Lecture 12 Interview resource people 13 Provide techniques for teacher and student evaluation of learning 14 Conduct teacher, parent, and pupil conferences 15 Utilize computer lab activities - - - - - c. Student Activities 1. Think - Creative and critical thinking, problem solving, associations - 2. Listen - Tapes, lectures, records, speeches, discussions, radio, TV, movies, guests, classmates - 3 Speak - Speeches, explanations, dramatizations, demonstrations, simulations, class and panel discussions - 4. Read - Textbooks, reference books, reports, magazines, newspapers, fiction, trade books - 5. Write - Creative writing, reports, research papers, outlines, summaries, speeches, comparisons - 6. View - Films, fllmstrips, slides, pictures, TV, maps, charts, globes, overlays, field trips and other projected materials - 7 Inspect - Relief maps, roads maps, globes, artifacts, samples, pictures, charts, graphs. - 8. Construct - Booklets, displays, posters, scrapbooks, graphs, bulletin boards, maps, charts, diagrams, time lines, pictures, replicas, dioramas, mobiles, murals. - - IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE - Teacher - Student Ratio 1.30 Student Capacity Per Period 180 Total No of Teachers ~ Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used ~ - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 159 Social Studies - V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A Areas may be used for night class and community school activities. B The architect shall study the shape of typical classrooms to provide for efficient operation and communication, utilizing marker board and wall-mounted illustrations The spaces must also provide flexibility for large and small group instruction as well as the capability for individualization. Computerized lab activities will be incorporated into instructional program. VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACll..ITIES (S.R.E.F) - N/A VII. PROGRAM F ACll..1T1ES LIST I No. of I Description of Areas I Square Feet I Areas Per Unit I Total SOCIAL STUDIES 6 Classrooms 810 4,860 6 Material Storage 70 420 1 Teacher Planning ~ TOTAL ~ VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Classroom 1 Chair/desk (30) 2. Teacher desk 3 Teacher chair 4 Chair (6), stackable, 18" 5 File cabinet, letter, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 6 Table, 30" x 72", mica top 7 Teacher podium 8 Stool 9 Maps/globe 10 Computer (8), printer B Teacher Planning 1 Carrel (8), electric, with lockable cabinet that includes shelves and tack board surface 2 Teacher chair (8), operator H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\UI.398 March 1998 160 Social Studies - 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Chair (8), stackable, 18" Laser videodisc player File cabinet (8), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable Computer (2), printer Copy machine with stand Folding table (2), 30" x 72" File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable - - - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HVAC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERA- TIONS - - B. Acoustical - Each classroom and the teacher planning area must be designed and constructed to prevent voice and noise transmission. Refer to GENERAL CON- SIDERATONS - C. floor - Provide resilient tile. - D Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. - E. Ceiling - Acoustical. - F Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. G Windows - Blinds on windows. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - H. Doors - Sufficient glass for safety in classroom doors and teacher planning door Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior - I. WaterlPlumbing Fixtures - In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) - J Communications - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - K. Electrical - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - Standard. - N Fencing - N/A - - H:\DAT A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 161 Social Studies - o Service Drives - N/A P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins 1 Built-in work counter a. Classroom shall have one wall with counter and lockable storage cabinets below and above, approximately, 15' b Teacher planning area shall have a stainless steel sink in a 10' work counter, formica top, and cabinets below 2. Built-in cabinets/shelving - Classroom shall have cabinet with adjustable shelving and lockable doors, 3' h x 18" d x 8' 1. 3. Built-in Instructional Aids a. Each classroom shall have: (1) Marker board (4), 8' x 4' (2) Bulletin board (2), 8' x 4' (3) Projector screen (4) Map rail continuous around room (except where in conflict with windows or cabinetry) (5) Bookcase on one wall, 30" h, with adjustable shelving b Teacher planning shall have a bulletin board, 8' x 4', and computer station with shelving. R. Other Considerations - N/A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 162 Social Studies SPATIAL RELATIONSlDPS Social Studies Cla:isroom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SOCIal Sludies - BUSINESS EDUCATION I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY A well-trained business education student will fmd it possible to secure employment in any city in the world. There are many opportunities for the business-trained young man or young woman. Of particular value will be skills in operating electronic office machines, keyboarding, bookkeeping, calculating, accounting, communicating (writing, listening, speaking) and in records management, reprographics, mathematics, economics, and business law II. PROGRAM GOALS A. Fundamentals Area - The purpose of this program is to develop competencies common to business and office occupations The competencies are those that are minimal skills and preparation necessary for all business and office occupations. Instruction is designed to develop skills, attitudes, and knowledge for success and advancement in a specialized job preparatory program in business. Instructional experiences received in this program do not necessarily prepare students for entry- level employment. B. Accounting Area - The purpose of this program is to prepare students for employment as accountants and auditors, bookkeepinglbilling machine operators, tellers, accounting clerks, general, or bookkeeping clerks. This program prepares individuals to compute, classify, and record numerical data, to keep financial records and ledgers, prepare monthly statements, verify accuracy of data, operate bookkeeping machines and pay and receive money c. Business Administration Area - The purpose of this program is to prepare students for employment as employment interviewers, credit authorizers, messengers, shipping and receiving clerks, statistical clerks, manager assistants, fIrSt-line supervisors, and credit managers. This program prepares individuals to become proficient in the planning, organizing, and controlling of a business, including organizational and human aspects, with emphasis on various theories of management, the knowledge and understanding necessary for managing people and functions, and decision making. D. Clerical Area - The purpose of this program is to prepare students for employment as clerk typists, correspondence clerks, receptionists, records supervisors, transcribing machine operators, and reprographics clerks. This program prepares individuals to record, duplicate and retrieve data, including classifying, sorting, and filing correspondence, records, and other data. Instruction also includes shipping and receiving procedures, stock and inventory maintenance, and operation of office machines H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 163 Business Education - E. Computer Operations Area - The purpose of this program is to prepare students for employment as data entry type-operators, a~d peripheral equipment operators - This program prepares individuals to monitor and maintain data processing programs and operate computers, peripherals, and data entry equipment. - F Secretarial Area - The purpose of this program IS to prepare students for employment as secretaries or stenographers This program prepares individuals to carry out general office duties in a support capacity The content mcludes oral and written communications, scheduling appointments, recording and transcribmg dictated information, keyboarding, and relieving officials of administrative and business details - - III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES - All students in the business education area will be in grades nine through twelve, including special needs students. - A. Fundamentals Area - Performance of the following activities is included in this area. keyboarding, business records, mail handling, telephone, math computations with and without machines, copying machines, communications, filing and retrieving, consumer economics, data processing, and job application. In addition, the student will develop the following skills human relations, leadership, and appropriate grooming - - B. Accounting Areas - Perfonnance of the following activities is included in this area. telephone, math computation with and without machines, keyboarding, duplicating, filing and retrieving, business records, communications, job application, data processing, consumer economics, mail handling, decision making, and bookkeeping/accounting In addition, the student will develop the following skills. human relations, appropriate grooming, and leadership Further, the student will comprehend specific business law concepts. - - - C. Busin~ Administration Area - Perfonnance of the following activities is included in this area. keyboarding, math computation with and without machines, communications, telephone, business records, job application, and decision making. In addition, the student will develop human relations and business management skills and demonstrate knowledge of the free enterprise system. - - D. Clerical Area - Performance of the following activities is included in this area. telephone, math computation with and without machines, keyboarding, duplicating, filing and retrieving business records, mail handling, communications, job application, data processing, consumer economics, machine transcription and decision making. In addition, the student will develop the following skills human relations, appropriate grooming, and leadership - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIL398 March 1998 164 Business Education - E. Data Processing Area - Performance of the following activities is included in this area. telephone, math computations with and without machines, keyboarding, filing and retrieving, reprographics, business records, communication, job application, data processing, consumer economics, bookkeeping/accounting, decision making, and mail handling In addition, the student will develop the following skills human relations, appropriate grooming and leadership F Secretarial Area - Perfonnance of the following activities is included in this area. telephone, math computations with and without machines, keyboarding, filing and retrieving, business records, communications, job applications, information processing, consumer economics, mail handling, decision making, reprographics, machine transcription, and stenographic. In addition, the student will develop the following skills human relations, appropriate grooming and leadership IV. ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.20 Student Capacity Per Period-6Q... Total No of Teachers ~ Grade Levels for Which Program is Intended 9 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-Li::... V. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Information processing equipment and procedures shall be included in all areas of instruction. Information processing is the combination of people, procedures and equipment to produce communications more effectively B Florida has instituted a program-centered, competency-based education. Competency-based education, by its nature, demands instruction be individualized. The perfonnance level that demonstrates competencies is the same for every individual learning a certain job c. Vocational programs will be reviewed by D O.E. to see if this approach is being taken and if the programs qualify for vocational funding. Learning areas shall be planned to facilitate individualized approaches to meet the vocational standards outlined above D Most businesses today use computers for one function or another As funds become available, each business-related laboratory will be equipped with computers and peripherals Multi-purpose equipment, electronic typewriters, furniture (on casters), and wiring (self-contained in computer table) will be supplied, where possible, for the sake of economy as well as creating flexibility and versatility in presentation of class content. E. All areas may employ the cooperative method of instruction. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 165 Business Education - F Networking of all computers in a business education instructional area is desirable Networking may be added at any time - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F ) - A. B C E. office shall be housed in project storage and is needed for the coordinator of the Vocational Programs - B One-half Resource room and Material Storage shall be utilized as a related instruction space and located adjacent to the Computer Operations Laboratory - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST - I Description of Areas I Square Feet I Per Unit I Total BUSINESS EDUCATION Accounting Operations Laboratory 1,460 Material Storage 120 Project Storage -100.. Subtotal 1,680 Computer Operations Laboratory 1,460 Resource Room (112) (285) Material Storage 120 Project Storage -100.. Subtotal 1,680 Clerical/Secretarial Occupations Laboratory 1,460 Material Storage 120 Project StoragelB C.B. Office --1SQ.. Subtotal 1,730 Teacher Planning -2.5!l TOTAL ~ - - - - - - - - - VIll. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Accounting/Operations Laboratory - 1 Table (25), adjustable keyboard pad, left, 48" x 30" x 29" - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 166 Business Education - 2 Posture chair (25), adjustable seat and back, secretarial, with casters 3 Teacher desk, 60" x 30", 6-drawer, executive 4 Teacher chair, with casters, 241h" w, 25" d, adjustable 5 Side chair for teacher desk, no casters 6 Computer work station (25) 1 44 mg, single high density disk drive, networked (keyboard, processor, color monitor, power switching system) with mice 7 Computer work station, teacher with overhead palette, both 3%" and 5 ~ " drives, with mouse 8 Network server (hard drive, 8 mg, network board, battery backup, printers attached, inexpensive monitor) 9 Printer, high quality, networked 10 Printer, laser networked 11 Stand for printers (2) 12 Calculator (25), with memory and percentage capability, both display and print 13 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 14 Table, 72" w x 30" d, laminated plastic top, adjustable, folding 15 Paper cutter, small 16 Stapler (2) electric 17 Stapler, heavy duty, long arm 18 Pencil sharpener (2), electric 19 File cabinet (2), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 20 Lectern, roll away, 2-piece 21 Bookcase (2), two shelf, 6' w, match counter top in height 22. Punch, 3-hole 23 Paper shredder 24 Storage cabinet (2) B. Computer Operations Laboratory 1 Table (25) adjustable keyboard pad, left, 48" x 30" x 29" 2 Posture chair (25), adjustable seat and back, secretarial, with casters 3 Teacher desk, 60" x 30", 6-drawer, executive 4 Teacher chair, with casters, 24~" w, 25" d, adjustable 5 Side chair for teacher desk, no casters 6 Computer work station (25), 1 44 mg, single high density disk drive, net- worked (keyboard, processor, color monitor, power-switching system), with mice 7 Computer work station, teacher, with overhead palette, both 3%" and 5 ~ " drives, with mouse 8 Network server (hard drive, 8 mg, network board, battery backup, printers attached, inexpensive monitor) 9 Printer, laser, networked 10 Printer, high speed, networked, dot matrix 11 Stand, printer (2) 12 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 13 Table, 72" w x 30" d, laminated plastic top, adjustable, folding H:\DATA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1l.398 March 1998 167 Business Education - 14 Stapler, electric 15 Stapler, heavy-duty, long arm 16 Pencil sharpener, electric 17 Pile cabinet (2), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 18 Bookcase (2), two shelf, 6' w, match counter top in height 19 Lectern, roll away, 2-piece 20 Punch, 3-hole 21 Paper cutter, small 22 Storage cabinet (2) - - - C. Related Classroom (112 Resource Room) - 1 Table (4), 72" x 30", adjustable 2 Surge suppressor (4), to be attached to each table 3 Chair (20), stackable, no casters 4 Teacher desk, 60" x 30", 6-drawer, executive 5 Teacher chair, with casters, 241h" w, 25" d, adjustable 6 Side chair, for teacher desk, no casters 7 Lectern, roll away, 2-piece 8 Copier 9 Cassette player (15), with mini-plug headpiece 10 Cassette player/recorder (5), with mini-plug headpieces 11 File cabinet (2), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 12. Computer work station, teacher, networked, with overhead palette and mouse 13 Table, adjustable keyboard pad, individual, 48" x 30" x 29" 14 Printer, local high quality dot matrix, networked 15 Stand, printer (optional) 16 Punch,3-hole 17 Paper cutter, small 18 Stapler, electrIC - - - - - - - D. Clerical/Secretarial Occupations Laboratory 1 Posture chair (25), adjustable seat and back, secretarial, with casters 2. Table (25), adjustable keyboard pad, left, 48" x 30" x 29" 3 Teacher desk, 60" x 30", 6 drawer, executive 4 Teacher chair, with casters, 241h" w, 25" d, adjustable 5 Side chair, for teacher desk, no casters 6 Computer work station (25) 1 44 mg, single high density disk drive, networked (keyboard, processor, color monitor, power switching system) with mice 7 Network server, hard drive, RAM, network board, battery backup, printers attached, inexpensive model 8 Power station, with local hard drive and overhead palette 9 Printer, laser, networked, with envelope feeder and sheet feeder 10 Printer, color, networked 11 Printer, high quality dot matrix, networked 12 Stand, printer (3) 13 File cabinet (2) two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable - - - - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 168 Business Education - 14 File cabinet (2) four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 15 Table, 72" w x 30" d, laminated plastic top, adjustable, folding 16 Transcribing machine (25), foot pedal, mini-plug headphones, cassette 17 Dictating/transcribing machine, foot pedal, mini-plug headphones, cassette, microphone 18 Scanner, page 19 Typewriter (5), electronic, basic 20 Stapler, electric 21 Stapler, heavy duty, long arm 22 Pencil sharpener, electric 23 Lectern, roll-away, 2-piece 24 Bookcase, (2) two shelf, 6' w, match counter top in height 25 Calculator (25), with memory and percentage capability, both display and print 26 Punch, 3-hole 27 Fax machine 28 Paper cutter, small 29 Paper cutter, large 30 Storage cabinet (2) E. Business Cooperative Education Office \ PrQject Storage 1 Teacher desk 60" x 30", 6-drawer, executive. 2 Teacher chair, with casters, 24~" w, 25" d, adjustable 3 Side chair for teacher desk, no casters 4 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Computer work station, 1 44 mg, single high density disk drive, networked (keyboard, processor, color monitor, power switching system), with mouse. 6 Printer, high quality, dot matrix, networked 7 Stand, printer (optional) 8 Table, adjustable keyboard pad, individual, 48" x 30" x 29" 9 Bookcase, six shelf, wall-mounted above-desk level and higher 10 Punch, 3-hole 11 Stapler, electric F. Teacher Planning Area 1 Carrel (4), wet 2. Chair (4), teacher, with casters, 24~" w, 25" d, adjustable 3 Table, 72" w x 30" d, laminated plastic top, adjustable, folding 4 File cabinet (4), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 5 Copier, high speed 6 Computer work station, 1 44 mg, single high density disk drive, networked (keyboard, processor, color monitor, power switching system), with mouse 7 Table, adjustable keyboard pad, left, 48" x 30" x 29", printer, local laser, with envelope capability and with sheet feeder and with sheet H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 169 Business Education . 8 Printer, local, high quality dot matrix, networked 9 Stand (2), printer 10 Storage cabinet (3), 7' h 11 Chair (4), stackable, no casters 12 Modem 13 Tape backup system 14 Fax machine 15 Laptop work statiOn (6) 16 Laptop/network adaptor (3), specIal 17 Scantron, computer-linked 18 Punch, 3-hole 19 Paper cutter, small 20 Stapler, electric 21 Vacuum and blower . - - - - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS - A. Heating/Cooling/V entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- ATIONS - B. Acoustical - Standard. Consideration shall be given to containing the sound of machines in operation within the business laboratories. - C. EImn: - Provide resilient tile. - D. Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. - E. Ceiling - Acoustical. - F. Lighting - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G. Windows - Standard. All business-related areas shall face to the interior of the campus or be on the second floor to reduce risk of theft. Window panes shall be narrow enough to prevent entry and shall be tinted and equipped with closable, dark shades so that reflection on computer screens may be controlled. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. - - H. Doors - Solid core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior - I. Watertplumbing Fixtures - In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) Provide soap and towel dispensers - J Communications - Phone jack in BCE Office. Three (3) phone jacks in Teacher Planning area. Outside, modem and fax. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- A TIONS. - - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 170 Business Education - K. Electrical - Maximum utilization of walls for duplex outlets, but no less than three duplex outlets on each wall, and ceiling wiring for four poles (location to be determined later) in all instructional areas If more economical and just as effective, an electrical strip of outlets might be affixed to all walls rather than the three duplex outlets mentioned above Must be equipped with a master toggle switch (with red light power indicator) to control current into the adjacent classroom. Teacher planning area to be cabled for three additional network hookups Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS L. Gas and Air - N/ A M. Safety - Standard. N Fencing - N/ A o. Service Drives - The business education area shall be reasonably accessible to a loading area. P. Parking - Standard. It is desirable that the business education area be located in close proximity to student parking because of its heavy population in evening and community programs Q. Built-ins 1 Built~in work/storage - Base cabinets described below provide the work counter required for any business education area. 2. Built-in storage a. Teacher cabinets, with coat cabinet space and adjustable shelving, lockable, approximately,S' w b Base cabinets, approximately, 18' I x 36" h x 24" d, lockable, with sink. c Overhead cabinets, 12" d over base cabinets, lockable, adjustable shelving 3 Built-in Instructional Aids a. Marker boards - approximately, 16' b. Tack boards - at least one section, 8' x 4' 4. Other Built-ins - All storage areas shall have adjustable shelving around entire area from floor-to-ceiling, 12" d. R. Other Considerations - The business education areas shall be located near all other vocatiOnal areas H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 171 Business Education - .'fl', . SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Business EducatIon - . Accounci.n.g Opera.tions Laboracory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Business Education - DISTRIBUTIVE/DIVERSIFIED EDUCATION I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY A well-trained marketing student will find it possible to secure employment in any city ill the world There are many opportunities for the market-trained young man or young woman for many and varied jobs available in this area. II. PROGRAM GOALS The purpose of this program is to prepare students for employment in a wide range of jobs that direct the flow of goods and services, including their appropriate utilization, from the producer to the consumer or user Through individualized instruction, students progress in the specific occupations chosen as their career goals The content includes, but is not limited to, selling, buying, transporting, storing, advertising, displaying, fmancing, and market research. Emphasis is on the development of skills, knowledge, and attitudes related to the fulfillment of the demand for goods and services in a private enterprise economic system. III. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES All students in the marketing area will be in grades ten through twelve, including special needs students Student selection by instructor will be based by student need and career goals In completing the programs, students will have demonstrated the human relations skills necessary for success in marketing occupations, demonstrated the ability to communicate skillfully, utilized effective selling techniques and procedures, applied sales promotion techniques and demonstrated knowledge of merchandising activities, performed merchandising math operations unique to marketing, demonstrated a knowledge of basic economic principles, gained an understanding of the importance of marketing operations, demonstrated knowledge and application of product and service technology, selected career objectives in the field of marketing, and demonstrated basic employability skills IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1:20 Student Capacity Per Period~ Total No of Teachers -L Grade Levels for Which Program Is Intended 10 - 12 Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used-2- V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES Cooperative vocational education programs are designed to prepare students with wide variances in abilities for a broad range of occupational clusters. The cooperative program serves as an incentive for some students to complete their education. H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 172 Distributive Education - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) - The school/store classroom for Related Instruction provides a service to the entIre school and also serves as a training area in which the distributive/diversified education students - may apply the basIc theories of salesmanship, advertising, sales promotion, and display The 250 nsf for school store comes from the administration area. - VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total DISTRIBUTIVE EDUCATION 1 Laboratory (DCT DE, Work Experience) 900 1 Material Storage 155 1 Project Storage 150 1 Classroom for Related Instruction 500 1 School Store (from Administration) 250 1 Teacher Planning -100 TOTAL ~ - - - - - - VllI. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. DistributivelDiversified Education LaboratoJ.:Y/Classroom 1 Table (24) 2 Chair (24), stackable, all one color, sled base 3 Deluxe magazine display, approximately, 48 II x 24 II x 28 II 4 Computer and color adapter, DMS recommended (4) 5 Color display (4) 6 DOS 2.1 (4) 7 Printer adapter (4) 8 Printer (4) 9 Typewriter, electronic 10 Carrel, wet, double-size 11 Table, 30" x 72" 12 Chair (6), standard, sled-base 13 Pile cabinet, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 14 Teacher desk 15 Teacher chair 16 Cash register (2) - - - - - - - H:\DAT A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 113 Distributive Education - 17 Mirror, three-way, full size, folding 18 Magnetic sign machine 19 Assorted display props kit (mannequin) 20 PodIUm B. School Store/Classroom for Related Instruction 1 Merchandise display (3), 7' adjustable sections, pegboard back, with adjust- able shelvmg, stainless steel bars, dIVIder, header WIth hghting, white frame, white pegboard and walnut trim 2 Cash register 3 Stool (2), high-backed 4 Hanger umt (2), stainless steel or chrome 5 Computer, pnnter C. Teacher Planning Area 1 Teacher desk 2 Teacher chair 3 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Typewriter, electronic 5 Computer, printer IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. HeatinglCoolingN entilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- A TIONS B. Acoustical - Standard. C. Eloor. - Provide resilient tile. D Walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. E. Ceiling - Acoustical. F. Lighting - Four drop spotlights with track lighting, on a timer, shall be installed at the display window of the school store. Provide lighting for display case and showcase in classroom. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G. Windows - Supervision window for Teacher Planning to Laboratory There shall be a display window in the school store; preferably on an inside wall, floor-t<Keiling height and 12' w Since this is a display window, there shall be minimum separations, frames, mullions, or tinting (unless placed on an outside wall) Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 174 Distributive Education - H. Doors - SolId core wood for interior, hollow metal for exterior . I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures - In Teacher Planning and in laboratory, provide single sink wIth goose neck faucet (CW) Provide soap and towel dispensers - J Communications - Phone jack in the teacher planning area. An mtercom system shall be Installed which would allow two-way commumcation among teacher planning area, school store, and laboratory Refer to GENERAL CONSIDER- - A TIONS K. Electrical - Each storage area to be equipped with a master toggle switch (with red - light power mdicator) to control current into the adjacent classroom. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - L. Gas and Air - N/A M. Safety - Standard - N Fencing - N/A - o Service Drives - N/A - P Parking - N/A Q Built-ins - 1 Built-in work/storage - School store shall have a service counter behind which inventory may be stored. Unit shall be 30' w, or distance from wall to wall, x 30" d X 48" h, with hinged section for entrance, recessed shelf for cash register Counter shall contain three drawers, open adjustable shelves - - 2. Built-in storage a. Teacher Planning - Open, adjustable shelving for textbooks _ b Laboratory - Teacher cabinet, floor-to-ceiling height, coat space and adjustable shelving, lockable; approximately,S' w - c Base cabinet, 8' - 10' w x 36" h x 24" d, lockable, with sink. - d. Overhead cabinets, 12"d, over base cabinet, lockable, adjustable shelving. e Bookcases, 30" h, one wall, adjustable shelving - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSP ECS\HS\III. 398 March 1998 175 Distributive Education - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS OlStributiV"e/DlV"C('S(fied Education D.C.T.. D.E.. t.lorl:: Experience Labo ra to ry OIS(nUU(l"C Cduca\lOIl - HEALTH/LIFE MANAGEMENT SKILLS . HOME ECONOMICS/FAMILY and CONSUMER SCIENCES - I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY - Family and Consumer Sciences Programs assist students m developmg realIstiC self- concepts and a sense of pnde in their own abilIties Programs, services and activIties should be designed to prepare youth for occupations m FamIly & Consumer sCiences and the occupation of homemaking Subject matter and practlcallearmng expenences m the clusters of - - . Food sCience and nutrition Blue pnnt for success/school-to-worklfamily technology/clothmg Child development and parenting Commercial foods/food service Life Management Skills/Health - . . . . - All Family & Consumer Sciences Programs are committed to encouraging all students enrolled (including gifted, talented, emotionally/mentally/physically handicapped) to develop to their fullest potentials as they learn skills for daily management of life and job preparatory skills The basic intent of the Family and Consumer Sciences Program is to help each student develop problem solving/decision making skills and to adopt a philosophy of life-long learning. Opportunities are available for participation m activitIes at school, at home, in the community, and in our nation which will help prepare students for the roles they will play in society - - - Leadership, application of academics and community serVIces opportunities are prOVIded through the appropriate vocational student organization, Future Homemakers of America/Home Economics Related Occupations in the followmg courses - - II. PROGRAM GOALS - A. Life Management Skills - The purpose of this course is to provide students with essential life management skills to enhance the quality of personal and family life. The content includes, but is not limited to, positive emotional, social, physical and intellectual development of self and others, nutrition, consumer education and resource management substance abuse, hazards of smoking; breast self-examination and breast cancer detection, cardiopulmonary resuscitation, roles and responsibilities of families and family members, decision-making and coping SkIlls, and public and private agencies and services affecting mdividuals and families - - - - H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lll. 398 M~r("h lQQR 176 I-lame Economics - B Tech Prep Pre-requisites for Job Preparatory/Wage-Earning Program Clusters 1 Blueprint for Professional Success The purpose of thIS course is designed to prepare students for the workplace m the twenty-first century The course mcludes developmg human resources, work ethIcS, decIsion making, balancing work and famIly, as other skills ExploratiOn of a variety of careers through the Internet and WIth Job shadowing rotatiOn expenences Development of a portfolio ThIS course IS recom- mended as a pre-requisite for all wage-earning programs 2 Child Development The purpose of this course is to provide knowledge, attitudes, and skills in the development, care, and guidance of children to the students The content includes, but is not limited to, understanding children's physical, mental, emotional, and social growth and development, as well as their care and guidance in parenting The course draws on aspects of the social and biological sciences of which home economics is a component. Observation and actual experiences with children and their parents are integral parts of the course. This course is recommended as a pre-requisite for wage-earning programs in the Early Childhood Education Cluster 3 Family Dynamics The purpose of this course is to prepare students to understand the nature, function, and significance of human relationships within the family/individual units The content includes, but is not hmited to, concepts and principles related to various family-living conditions, estabhshment and mamtenance of relationships, preparation for marriage, parenthood, and family life; the development and socialization of individuals, the uruqueness of families and indIviduals, and needs and interests of individuals and family members 4. Family. Home and Consumer Technology The major emphasis of this course is placed on the latest technology as it relates to the home and family It includes future trends in food and consumer technology; personal fmance - using computer software programs, technology equipment, careers, innovative resources, environmental - ecological - society issues with its impact on the family This course is recommended as a pre- requisite for wage-eaming programs in Decor rind Design, the Clothing Design and Production Cluster and the Environmental Services Cluster H:\DA T A \ARC\M EMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lIl. 398 IT'I Hnfnl" Frnnomics - 5 Food Science Technology - The purpose of this course IS to provide a sCience-based foods and nutntiOn currIculum The content should mclude - . Food microbiOlogy lab that use microscopes Conduct expenments and observations of physical and chemical changes in food Identify the structures and functiOns of nutrIents Food chemistry lab to include emulSions, mixtures, addItives, and other chemical reactions - . . - . - This course is recommended as a pre-requisite for wage-earning programs in the Food Production and Management Cluster - 6. Nutrition and Wellness - The purpose of this course is to prepare students to l!nderstand the principles of nutrition, the relationship of nutrition to health and well-being; th selection, preparation and are of food, meal management to meet individual and family food needs, patterns of living; good economics and ecology, and optimal use of the food dollar; use of computer software programs to compare person/group nutritional data. This course is recommended as a pre-requisite for wage-earning programs in the Food Production and Management Cluster - . - 7 Parenting Skills The purpose of this course is to develop an understanding of a parenting and related skills mvolved. This course is recommended as a pre-requisite for wage-earning programs in the Early Childhood Education Cluster - - 8. Principles of Clothing Construction - The purpose of this course is to prepare students to identify the characteristics of fibers, fabrics and textiles; and to interpret consumer protection laws related to clothing and textiles, and to construct a simple garment(s), and to develop skills with designing software using digitizer and additional software/technology programs This course is recommended as a pre-requisite for wage-earning programs in the Fashion Design and Construction Cluster and the Decor and Design Cluster - - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\l-lS\III.398 March 1998 118 Home Economics - 9 Principles of Food Preparation The purpose of this course IS to prepare students to understand the prIncIples of food preparatIon, selectIon and storage, basic food preparatIon, and selection of food services To mtroduce students to the computer software programs available for menu plannmg, food preparation, and addluonal areas ThIS course is recommended as a pre-requisite for wage-earning programs in the Food Production and Management Cluster C. Job Preparatory/Occupational Proficiency/Wage Earning 1 Food Management, Production and Services Cluster The purpose of this program is to prepare students for imtial employment as bakers' helpers, bakers, bread and/or pastry cooks, restaurant cooks, institutional food preparation and service workers, fast-food restaurant cooks' helpers, or all other food service workers The content includes, but is not limited to, an instructional program that prepares individuals to select, purchase, prepare, or produce food m quantities, preserve nutritive values of food, follow standard recipes for quahty control, prepare and serve quantity foods; receive, store and issue foods and supplies, select and use commercial equipment for production and serVIces, observe safety precautions and sanitation regulations, store and handle food and equipment; clean food preparation and service areas, take inventories, and work in, or manage food service establishments using various computer software programs and hands- on techniques 2. Environmental Services Classroom and laboratory activities re an integral part of training to prepare students for employment as environmental service providers or technicians for residential homes and institutions These activities include training in the general maintenance and safe use of all institutional resources 3 Early Childhood Education Cluster The purpose of this program is to prepare students for initial employment as child care aides, child care workers, attendants in children's institutions, nursery school attendants, or playroom attendants, 'Or to provide supplemental training for persons previously or currently employed in the occupations H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1Il.398 I,() Home Economics - The content Includes, but is not lunited to, conductIng aCtiVities which promote phYSical, mtellectual, emotiOnal and social growth and development of children, clean and healthy environment; nutntlon, health and safety, chlld abuse and neglect, rules and regulations which govern child care, Interper- sonal relations - - 4 Decor and Design Services Cluster - The purpose of thIS program IS to prepare students for employment or advanced training m the residential and commercIal decoratiOn and design industry Classroom, shop, and laboratory activities and computer-aIded design systems are an integral part of this program. Students will develop competencIes in the areas of housing environment, the principles of color and deSIgn, the basic interior-design components, and basic employabilIty skills - - - 5 Dietetic Management, Supervision, Technician - The purpose of this program is to provide learning activities in a laboratory and clinical setting using hands-on-expenences with diet kitchen equipment computers, software, table settings, sanitizing equipment and other experiences. Students are prepared to utilize nutritional knowledge in preparing food and in serving individuals with specific dietary needs under the supervision of a registered dietitian. . - 6 Family and Consumer Sciences Cooperative Education - OJT - The purpose of this course IS to prOVIde a work station which reflects equipment, skills and tasks which are relevant to the occupation which the student has chosen as a career goal. The student must be paid for work. - ID. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES - Instruction and learning activities in all family and consumer sciences programs are provided in a laboratory setting using hands-on experiences with the tools and materials appropriate to the program content and in accordance with current technology Each program area does, however, require learning activities that are unique. - - A. Life Management Skills - This course 15 required of all ninth or tenth grade students. Activities provide instruction in the use of equipment, including large kitchen equipment, small appliances, laundry equipment, infant child-care equipment, small apphances, laundry equipment, infant and child-care equipment, CPR mannequins, audio-visual equipment and materials, home technology equipment and software, general classroom equipment and storage eqUIpment. The use of computer software for related research, study and activities - - - H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1Il.398 March 1998 180 Home Economics - B Job Preparatory/Occupational ProficiencY/Wage-Earning - Pre-requisites - Practical Arts - The courses are taken by male and female students In grades nIne through twelve SpecIal education students are enrolled m these courses so special attention shall be gIven as facIhtIes are deSIgned 1 Blueprint for Professional Success ActiVIties for this course mvolve using computer research strategIes for exploring career opportunities Exploration of a variety of careers through job shadowmg experiences, rotatmg Jobs, spending a mlmmum of four weeks at each rotation. Using software programs to produce an individual portfolio, producing personal resume, and other related work .place skills These activities are recommended as a pre-requisite for all Job Preparatory wage- earning programs 2. Child Development Activities provide instruction in the use of equipment, including audio-visual equipment, media matp.rials, personal computers, and child-care equipment. These activities prepare students for the Early Childhood Education Job Preparatory Cluster 3 Family Dynamics Activities provide instruction in the use of equipment, including general classroom equipment, kitchen and laundry equipment, infant care equipment, dramatic play equipment, audio-visual and computer equipment. Computer and software technology for research and study of the family and family genealogy These activities proVIde a focus on the family as needed m today's society 4. Family, Home & Consumer Technology Activities provide instruction in the use of equipment, including automobiles, checkbooks and budgeting software programs, file cabinets, check cashing cards, credit cards, grease guns, car jacks, squeegees, vacuum cleaners, whisk brooms, wrenches and housing technology (Smart House) computerized and traditional sewing machines, outdoor tools and maintenance equipment, food service equipment, materials and supplies, home technology equipment and software, audio-visual equipment, classroom and storage equipment for materials and supplies These activities prepare students for the Decor and Design Job Preparatory Cluster and the Fashion and Clothing Construction Job Preparatory H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lII.398 t tn('\Q !~f Home F..conomlc~ - 5 Nutrition and Wellness Activities provide Instruction In the use of eqUipment, IncludIng ranges, refrigerators, microwave ovens, convectlon ovens, dehydrators, small and large utensils, and washers and dryers, computer software programs for analyzing diets and other related programs These activIties prepare students for the Food Services and Management and DietetiC Job Preparatory Cluster - - 6 Parenting Skills . These activities mvolve balancing work and famlly responsiblhtles as an employability sklll. Activities will include, the dual roles of males and females as homemakers and wage earners, a plan for child care and parentmg SkIlls, nurturing and protective enVironment, pOSItive parenting skllls and support systems available - - 7 Principles of Clothing Construction - Instruction and learning activities are provided in a laboratory setting using hands-on experiences with tools and materials appropriate to the course content. Activities provide instruction in using sewing tools and equiprr.ent, measuring tools, hand-sewing equipment, marking device and pressmg equipment. These activities prepare students for the Fashion DeSIgn and Clothing Construction Job Preparatory Cluster - - 8 Principles of Food Preparation Program - Instruction and learning activities are provided in a laboratory setting using hands-on experiences with the tools, equipment, and materials appropriate to th course content and in accordance with current practices Activities provide instruction in. the application of the principles of food preparation, food selection, storage, choosing appropriate food service for various occasions and the use of small and large appliances, kItchen tools and equipment. These activities prepare students for the Food Services and Management Job Preparatory Cluster - - - C. Job Preparatory/Occupational Proficiency - 1. Food Production and Services Cluster This program is offered to tenth, eleventh, and twelfth grade students who have career goals of working in the food industry The activities of the program require commercial equipment for food preparation, including commercial appliances, quantity cookware and utensils, cleaning supplies, general classroom equipment and supphes, audiO-Visual equipment, and storage equipment and supplies Space for the separate dining area shall be planned for the food service actlvitles of this program. - - - - H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1ll.398 March 1998 182 Home EconomiCs - 2 Early Childhood Education Cluster This program IS offered to tenth, eleventh, and twelfth grade students Instruction and learnIng activIties are proVided In a laboratory settIng USIng hands-on expenences With the eqUIpment and materials appropnate to the program content and In accordance With hIgh quality standards m the field ActiVities prOVide Instruction in the use of manipulative eqUipment; creative art and woodworkIng supplies, music and science equipment, dramatic play, outdoor playground and audio-vIsual eqUipment, housekeepmg and food preparation equipment, and laundry equipment. Observation and supervised work expenence With young children in a school laboratory and/or a commumty laboratory setting IS an integral part of this program. 3 Fashion Design and Clothing Production Activities provide instruction in the use of tools, equipment and supplies as related to textile characteristics and care, operation and mamtenance of a conventional and a digitizing computerized designing sewing machines, computerized pattern making, employability skills and garment construction, alterations, and clothing repairs 4. Decor and Design/Interior Decor and Fabrication Activities provide computer-aided design systems These actiVItIes include training in the general maintenance and safe use of all equipment. 5 Environmental Services Classroom and laboratory activities include training m the general mamtenance and safe use of all instructional resources IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE Teacher - Student Ratio 1.24 Student Capacity Per Period~ Total No of Teachers --L Grade Levels for Which Program Is Intended 9 - 12 and Community School Hours Per Day Space Will Be Used 7 and Community School v. INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USES A. Spaces shall be planned for competency-based individualized instruction. B Spaces shall be planned to be used by H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIU98 , ~ t. f ('11''\0 Ill' P()n,~ r.r()nnmH'~ - 1 2 3 4 EvenIng Family Consumer Sciences classes Family Consumer SCIences organizations Family Consumer Sciences in-service programs Off-campus Family Consumer Sciences courses sponsored by the state universities - - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM STATE REQIDREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) - 1 Blueprint for Success Resource RQQm is to be shared with the Child Care Program and IDID.l ~ located adjacent to the Qrikl ~ Services Laboratory - 2 Health/Life Management Skills Laboratory has been incorporated into the Family Consumer Sciences program and .shall ~ located in the.Hmne Economics~, a kitchen is essential for Health/Life Management program and the square footage is taken from the dispensary, which is not essential. - - 3 Food and Nutrition Laboratory of 1,536 nsf and Resource Room for Commercial Foods program of 800 nsf .shall ~ combined to create one large space of 2,336 nsf - VIll. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST - No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total HOME ECONOMICS Blueprint for Success/Clothing Laboratory 1,536 Resource Room 800 Laundry 50 Material Storage ~ Subtotal 2,541 Food and Nutrition Laboratory 1,536 Laundry 50 Material Storage 155 Resource Room/Commercial Foods ~ Subtotal 2,541 Teacher Planning -200 Subtotal 2,741 - - - - - - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1l1.398 March 1998 184 Home Economics - No. of Square Feet Areas Description of Areas Per Unit I Total HOME ECONOMICS Child Care Services Laboratory 1, 100 Project Storage 150 Resource Room from Clothing (800) Restrooms from Allotment - Subtotal 1,250 Health/Life Management Skills Laboratory 1,200 Classroom Related 675 Kitchen/Dispensary 135 Project Storage 150 Material Storage ~ 2,315 Subtotal TOTAL 8.847 vm. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT A. Life Management Skills Family and Consumer ScienceslHealth Laboratory 1 Student chair (38), stackable, contour 2 Teacher desk 3 Student desk (38) 4 Table (6) 5 Two/way glass and mirror wall 6 Teacher's podium 7 Laser disc player 8 LCD Panel 9 Monitor, TV, color, remote control 10 Projector, overhead with LCD compatibility 11 Screen projection, wall-mounted 12 Teacher tech mobile cart (holds computer, printer, TV, VCR, laser player H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 185 Home Economics - 13 Demonstration table 14 Movable room-divider panel (4), 84" x 20" x 60" 15 Library display unit 16 Bookcase, 12" d 36" h x 4' w, adjustable shelves 17 Breast form, for cancer detectiOn 18 DIshwasher 19 Kitchen umt 20 DIsposal, garbage 21 Dryer 22 Mannequin, adult, CPR 23 Mannequin, baby, CPR 24 Oven, microwave 25 Washer - - - - - B. Related Classroom/Health 1 Computer/lock down (18) 2 Modular study unit (18) 3 Desk/office chair (18) - - C. Blu~rint for Success/School-to-WorkIFamily. Home and Tech/Clothing Laboratory - 1 Teacher desk 2. Teacher chair 3 Teacher tech mobile cart (holds computer, printer, TV, VCR, laser player and projector) 4 Laser disc player 5 LCD Panel 6 Monitor, TV, color, remote control 7 Projector, overhead with LCD compatibility 8 Screen projection, wall-mounted 9 Cutting table (2), rectangular, 45" x 54", with space for four tote drawer table 10 Chair (24 computer/office type) 11 Student study table (12) 12 Student chair (24), stack 13 Sewing machine (12), domestic 14 Sewing machine (4), overlock 15 Sewing machine/designing and digitizer (6) 16 Student study modular unit (18) to include:ca1llight, bookcase, TVNCR unit, computer, printer stand 17 Computer/lock down (18) 18 Printer. laser (4), colored (4) 19 Steam press, portable 20 Vacuum, upright - - - - - - - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IU.398 March 1998 186 Home Economics - 21 IronIng board (2) 22 File cabinet (2), two-drawer, legal, late~al, lockable 23 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 24 Drawer storage unit on casters with lockable space for 72 tote drawers 25 Mirror, wall, 60" x 72" D Food Science/Dietetic/Nutrition Laboratory 1 Student study modular unit (8) to include call light, bookcase, TV/VCR unit, computer, pnnter stand 2 Teacher desk 3 Teacher tech mobile cart (holds computer, printer, TV, VCR, Laser player and projector) 4 Laser disc player 5 LCD Panel 6 VGA Converter 7 Monitor. TV, color, remote control 8 Projector, overhead with LCD compatibility 9 Screen projection, wall-mounted 10 Student study table (12) 11 Student chair (24) 12 Chair (16), secretarial 13 Chair, teacher, operator's 14 Table (6), 30' x 60", laminated top for serving food 15 Table (2), rectangular, narrow, laminated toplbuffet service 16 Computer/lock-down, (8) 17 Printer (4) 18 Podium 19 Book truck, 36" x 36, casters, three shelves 20 Mannequin (2), CPR, adult 21 Mannequin (2), CPR, infant 22 Model, Betsy Breast (2) 23 Model, testes (2) 24 Grocery cart, heavy-duty 25 Kitchen (4). three - residential, one - special needs 26 Range (4), electric 27 Teacher demonstration island, portable E. Commercial Foods Resource Room Area 1 Booster unit for water heater 2 Cabinet, proofing/heating 3 Cabinet, profer/holding 4 Cart (2), stainless steel, three shelves, refuse basket 5 Cash register, on stand/cashier cart 6 Chair (50) dining, WIth vmyl, padded sea and back 7 Char-broiler, WIth storage and stand H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1lI.398 March 1998 187 Home Economics . 8 Dishwasher/commercial with sarutizing urut 9 DIspenser, cold drink 10 Fire blanket 11 Display case, dessert 12 Freezer/refrigerator combination, commercial-type, with stamless shelves and lock 13 Fryer system, deep-fat 14 Gnddle, with stand, 18" x 36" x 24" 15 Hood, exhaust system, commercial-type, with fire extmguisher 16 Ice maker, 200 lb , magnum capacity 17 Kettle, steam jacketed, with stand and cabinet-type storage 18 Mixer, drink, commercial-type 19 Mixer, 30 qt., with attachments for veg chopper and meat grinder 20 Oven, convection, with double storage 21 Oven, convection/microwave 22 Oven, stack-type, three decker 23 Pan, braising, tilting, stainless steel, with stand and cab 24 Rack, baker's, open, casters, heavy-duty, heavy gauge steel 25 Rack, dish, dolly 26 Rack, hanging, for pots, stainless steel, installed 27 Range, gas, commercial-type, four surface heating units, self-cleaning 28 Refrigerator unit, salad/sandwich type, stainless steel 29 Refrigerator, commercial-type with shelves and locks, stainless steel for all 30 Serving unit, cold food, with sneeze guard, 58" d x 30" x 34" 31 Serving unit, hot food, with sneeze guard, 58" x 30" x 34" 32 Sink, single compartment, for hand washing, stainless steel 33 Sink, three-compartment, deep, stainless steel 34 Stand, mobile bowl, with 30-quart bowl 35 Steamer/cooker, with stand and cabinet-type storage, stainless steel 36 Table, baker's, stainless steel, with hardware 37 Table, demonstration, with mirror and casters 38 Table, dining, seating for 2's, 4's, and 6's, seating for 50 39 Table, dish, with sink and garbage disposal unit, commercial 40 Table, work, stainless steel, with drawers and lower shelves 41 Washer, heavy duty, large capacity, top-loading, minimum 42 Water levels, three-temperature wash, lint filter, bleach dispenser 43 Water heater, 80-gallon, rapid recovery . - . - - - - - - - - - - - F Child Care Services 1 Student chair (6) 2 Teacher desk 3 Basin, sink, child height 4 Bed, plant, installed in playground area 5 Box, sand, 5' x 5', outdoors 6 Table (2) for student - - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 188 Home Economics - 7 Chair, child's rocking, 13" x 11" x 23" 8 Chair, teacher, operator's 9 Carpet, 9' x 12' 10 Cart, utlhty, with swivel casters, 35" x 31" 11 Table (4), pre-school height, round 48" 12 Shed, storage, lockable, outdoors 13 Slide, gym for outdoor, installed 14 Swing set, heavy gauge steel, outdoors, installed 15 PodIUm 16 Book truck (2), casters, three shelves, 36" x 36" 17 Computer/lock-down (2), 18 Computer table (2), child size 19 Pnnter 20 Fire blanket 21 Washer, heavy-duty, commercial 22 Dryer, commercial 23 Mobile resource unit 24 Cabinet, storage, 32" h x 18" d x 60" w, sliding doors (for toys and instructional materials) 25 Bookcase (2), 30" h x 12" d x 48" w 26 Vacuum, upright 27 Cart, utility 28 Range, electric, 30", self-cleaning oven, retractable door locks 29 Refrigerator/freezer, frost-free 30 Demonstration table 31 Movable room divider panel (4), 84" x 20" x 60" G Resource Room 1 Table (6) 2 Chair (24), stackable, contour 3 Two-way glass and mirror wall 4 Computer/lock down, (8) 5 Modular study unit (8) 6 Desk/office chair (16) 7 Teacher's podium 8 Laser disc player 9 LCD Panel 10 Monitor, TV, color, remote control 11 Projector, overhead with LCD compatibility 12 Screen projection, wall-mounted 13 Teacher tech mobile cart, holds computer, printer, TV, VCR, Laser player and projector 14 Demonstration table 15 Movable room-divider panel (4), 84" x 20" x 60" 16 Library display unit 17 Bookcase, 12" d x 36" h x 4' w, adjustable shelves H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 lQO Home Economics . H. Kitchen/Child Care Laboratory . 1 Dishes (4), service for eight 2 Glassware (4), service for eight 3 Silverware (4), service for eight - 4 Sets of cookware 5 Mixer (standmg) 6 Small toaster/broiler wall over . 7 Blender 8 Baking pan set - 9 Cooling rack (4) 10 Measuring equipment set (2) 11 Mixing equipment set - 12 Cookie press 13 Mixer, electric 14 Hot plate, two-burner - 15 Ice cream freezer 16 Kitchen towels and cloths, set of 12 17 Iron . 18 Storage container (2), set of four 19 Small equipment (a) peelers . (b) graters (c) tongs - (d) brushes, etc. 20 Popcorn popper 21 Knife set - I. Observation Area - 1 ChaIT (3) J. Children's EQJlipment rose as guide only) . Inside Eq.uipment - 1 Table (6), child-size, trapezoidal with expandable legs 2 Chair (20), child-size, stackable, 12" 3 Mobile resource unit 4 Marker boards, magnetic boards, peg boards 5 Tackboards (small size) 6 Cabinet (3), storage for toys and instructional materials, 32" h x 18" d x 60" w, with sliding doors 7 Clothes locker for fifteen children 8 Bookcase (3), 30" h x 12" d x 48" w - . - - H :\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 190 Home Economics - 9 Screen, foldmg 10 Housekeeping eqUipment set 11 House gym/slide set 12 Easel, wooden 13 Book and magazine rack 14 Rocking boat 15 Rug 16 Utility cart 17 Drying rack 18 Paper cutter 19 Primary school blocks, soft wood, half set 20 Block-play traffic signs (set) 21 Hollow blocks, perma, half set 22 Big car carrier, fleet of three cars 23 Derrick, giant elevator 24 Wooden train seUtrack 25 Block mobile 26 Airport set 27 Construction vehicle 28 Snap wall 29 Wheelbarrow, wooden 30 Utility cart with casters 31 Refrigerator (play type) 32 Range (play type) 33 Sink (counter and cupboard unit, play type) 34 Bed (doll) 35 Carriage (doll) 36 Children's tea table, four chairs 37 Baby doll, white, 20" 38 Baby doll, black, 20" 39 Doll house and furniture 40 W orkbenchlvises 41 Unifac bulk cube box 42 12-cord autoharp with color cord charts and case 43 Assorted children's record set 44 Music cart 45 Book (36), assorted 46 Musical instrument (6), assorted 47 Stainless and .glass aquarium, 10-gallon 48 Science experiment table 49 Telephone 50 Farm animals 51 Zoo animals 52 Magnet kit 53 Scissors (10), children's safety type 54 Step stool 55 SIght and sound 56 Hamster house H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 I\.,f,r,.h 100R 19t Home Economics - 57 Clock (Judy) 58 Rockmg chair, child 59 Rockmg chair (6), adult . 60 Paint pots 61 Play money 62 Stethoscope - 63 Pegboard/pegs set 64 Garden tool set (2) 65 Ban bag seat (6) - 66 Flannel board 67 Flannel board packet - 68 Easel clips set 69 Wagon 70 Roll paper rack - 71 Tool set 72 Tool cabinet 73 Gas station - 74 Domino set 75 Word puzzle rack 76 Boat fleet - 77 Cash register 78 Blockbusters 79 Can of blocks - 80 Globe 81 Fantasy hats set - 82 Balance board 83 Family puppets set - Outside Equipment 1 Sandbox, 5' x 8' - 2 Climb-a-round, 8' 4" h, ground space 10' 8" 3 Steel nesting climber, 5' 4 Variplay triangle set - 5 Wheelbarrow 6 Sliding board/ladder, 4' 6" h x 36" w x 7' I 7 Jungle Jim set - 8 Flying turtle, Playskool507 - Outside Storage 1 Riding tractor/trailer - 2 Tricycle (4), 16" 3 Tricycle (4), 20" 4 Tumbling mat (15) - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIL398 March 1998 192 Home Economics - Storage Unit 1 Icemaker, automatic, 135 lbs mmllnum 2 Washer, heavy-duty, commercial 3 Dryer, commercial 4 Shelving, heavy-duty, portable Teacher Planning/Department Equipment 1 File cabinet (4), two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 2 Chair (4), teacher (Secretarial) 3 File cabinet (4), four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable 4 Table, 48" round 5 ChaIr (4), padded seat 6 Camcorder, commercial quality, VHDS, with tripod 7 File server 8 Digital camera 9 Camera, 35 mm 10 Cassette player/recorder with built-in microphone 11 Projector, overhead, portable/high intensity 12. Computer (2) 13 Computer station (2) 14 Printer (2), color and laser jet 15 Scan jet 16 Laser disc player 17 Telephone with outside line 18 Table, work, rectangular 19 Copier IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. HeatinglCooling/Ventilation - Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements 1 Clothes dryer. provide vent to outside 2 Surface units/range: provide with exhaust fan and vent to outside 3 Commercial range: provide with exhaust fan/additional air unit B. Acoustical - Standard. Special attention shall be given to the following: 1 Child Care Laboratory 2 Food and Nutrition Laboratory 3 Blueprint/Family Tech/Clothing Laboratory C Floor - Provide resilient tile. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IU.398 March 1998 193 Home Economics - D .walls - Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint fimsh E. Ceiling - Acoustical - F Lighting - Increased level and improved color of hghtmg In BluepnntlFamlly Tech Laboratory Spotlights and other outdoor hghting shall be provided in the outside - area. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Standard Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - H. Doors - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS Locked cabinetry doors and drawers in all laboratories, keyed to a master key Dutch doors located in Child Care Laboratory - kitchen. - - I. Water/Plumbing Fixtures 1 Provide double kitchen sink with kitchen faucet (HW & CW) 2 Ice maker in refrigerator-freezer- provide (CW) 3 Ice machine in Food Nutrition Lab and Commercial Foods Lab 4 Dishwasher- provide (HW) 5 Clothes washer- provide (HW) and (CW) 6 Patio provide single sink with control key faucet (CW) and hose bibb WIth control key operator 7 In Teacher Planning, provide single sink with goose neck faucet (CW) - - - J Communications - Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. - 1 FAX Machine in Teacher Planning area. 2 Telephone jack needed in the Teacher Planning area. 3 Net-working for school and world-wide-web - - K. Electrical - Special concern shall be gIven to the electrical needs of all family and consumer science home economics laboratories, especially in the Blueprint/Family Tech Laboratory where computer (16), a server for networking and sewing machines - (16), will be placed in a limited amount of floor space. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. - L. Gas and Air - For gas ranges, provide natural gas Where natural gs is not available, provide propane - M. Safety - Panic button all laboratory areas, fmger guards on all sewing machines, fire blankets in Food and Nutrition Laboratory and Child Care Laboratory Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS - - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIL398 March 1998 194 Home Economics - N Fencing I Outside Area 1 Food and Nutrition Laboratory Patio - wood or decoratIve block fence with a double gate to parking area. Gate shall have heavy-duty, deadbolt lock. 2 Child Care - Cham link fence, 6', with child-proof gate o Service Drives - Nearby drive shall be provided to the CommercIal Food and/or Nutrition Laboratory for delivery of groceries P Parking - Parking spaces nearest to Commercial Foods and/or Food NutritiOn Laboratory to be designated for that laboratory Parking for parents near Child Care Laboratory Q. Built-ins 1 Built-in work/storage a. BlueprintIFamily Technology/Clothing Laboratory (1) Base cabinet, approximately, 24" d x 34-112" h x 12' 1, with single sink, light-colored formica. Single shelf in base cabinet. ALL THE CABINETS LISTED BELOW PLACED IN THE STORAGE ROOMS (LEA VB CLASSROOM WALL SPACE FOR COMPUTER MODULAR STATIONS). (2) Wall cabinet, approximately, 12" d x 24" h x 12' I, with one adjustable shelf in each unit. (3) Tote drawer cabinet/movable with 135 drawers. (4) Storage shelves for students' books, (26 students) (5) Pattern book reference and storage area, approximately, 4' w x 2' I x 67" h. (6) Lockable cabinet for garment storage with clothes bar, approx- imately, 36" w (7) Textile storage cabinet with shelves and drawers: approximately, 12" h x 36" w x 30" d. (8) Computer/lockdown (16) H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 195 Home Economics - ~-----_._---~---~---~ - (9) Modular station (16), to include call light, with underneath cabinet with single door and hydraulic lift for seeing machine, with _ upper book shelves, and printer rack. (10) A work table for scan jet. - b Food and Nutrition Laboratory - (1) Kitchen umt (4) one, accessible and three, regular, including four-burner cooking surface, wall microwave convection oven, double sink; counter and cabinets, one serving table/meals, electric ranges - (2) Equipment. - (a) Freezer/refrigerator, commercial, combination, lockable (b) Refrigerator, commercial, double door, lockable, per lab (c) Dishwasher, commercial sanitizing unit per lab (d) lcemaker, commercial - - c. Commercial Foods/Resource area - (1) Storage Area, maximum amount, open shelving, 12" and 24" - (2) Cabinets, lockable, 18" d d. Food Production Unit Laboratory - (1) Equipment: - (a) Grill, commercial (b) Stove, gas, commercial (c) Oven, convection, commercial - (d) Oven, microwave e. Teacher Planning - carrel (4), formica desk top, lockable cabinet - adjustable shelves above desk. 2. Built-in Instructional Aids - a. Each laboratory instructional area - (1) Marker board, 16' (2) Bulletin board, 6' (3) A V screen over marker board (4) Poster strips hung on wall l' from ceihng line, on all walls Without wall cabmets - - H:\DA TA \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1l1.398 March 1998 196 Home Economics - b 6' wall display case, lockable, glass doors Locate III corridor near Blueprint/Family Tech/Clothing Laboratory 3 Other Built-ins (a) Washmg machine and dryer in each laboratory (b) Food and NutritiOn Laboratory (1) Icemaker, commercial (2) Refngerator, lockable, commercial (3) OutsIde area, optional a. Grill (4), gas, built-in b Table (6), cement or treated wood, permanently attached to patio, seats 8-12, each. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 197 Home Economics - SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS Home Economics Blueprint/ Clothing Laboratory H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I 11.398 March 1998 - - Food & Nurtrition Laboratory - - - - - . - - - - - - K = Kitchen L Laundry MS Material Storage PS Project Storage TP Teacher Planning - - - Home Economics - TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION I. PROGRAM PHILOSOPHY Technology Education is a comprehensive action-based educational program concerned with technical means, their evolution, utilization, and significance, with industry, its organization, personnel, systems, techniques, resources, and products, and their social/cultural Impact. II. PROGRAM GOALS The program is designed to provide students with an in-depth foundation for career preparation at the secondary or post-secondary levels Students will gain skills leading to consumer awareness and personal enrichment as well as occupatiOnal readiness ill. PROGRAM ACTIVITIES A. General Activities (applicable to all laboratories) 1 Applying problem solving techniques 2 Applying tools, materials, processes, and technical concepts safely and efficiently 3 Designing and developing 4 Applying other school subjects 5 Dealing with forces that influence the future 6 Experimenting in the laboratory 7 Becoming a wiser consumer 8 Making informed career choices B. Specific Activities 1 Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory a. Demonstrating the use and care of drafting instruments, equipment, and materials b Making orthographic, pictorial, auxiliary view, and sectional view drawings c. Making engineering and architectural drawings d. Operating a computer utilizing a CAD program e Making computer assisted drawings (CAD) 2. Communications Technology Laboratory a Operating a computer utilizing a desktop publishing program b Producing printed copies c Usmg the screen printing process d Using continuous tone photography e Usmg bmding and finishing processes H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1Il.398 March 1998 198 Technology Education . f Usmg enlargers g Developmg prints h Usmg vIdeo camera equipment Usmg video editmg equipment J Using audio editing equipment - - 3 Principles of Construction Technology Laboratory - a. Performing experimental testing of model rocket engmes b Constructing model gliders, powered aircraft, and rockets c U smg computer flight simulators d Using word processing, spreadsheet, and data base programs for research and development projects e Designing products f Applying the technology processes of separating and forming, conditioning, fabricating, and fInishing materials g Assembling a product h. Using CAM, CNC, robotics, and work cells i Using technical skills, tools, and materials in constructing and testing a superstructure - - - - 4. Engineering Technology Laboratory - a. Identifying evolving technologies b Performing skills in the physical technologies c Performing skills in the information/communication technologies d. Performing skills in the biotechnologies e. Using robotics technology f Using computer numerical control technology g Applying mechanical, fluid, thermal, and electrical systems h. Using graphical representations in analysis and design 1. Using tools, machines, calculators, and computers to obtain solutions to design problems - - - - IV ORGANIZATIONAL NOMENCLATURE - Teacher - Student ratio 1.24 Student capacity per period. -2Q.... Total number of teachers ~ Grade levels for which program is intended. 9-12 Hours per day space will be used. .J.:1:.... - V INNOVATIONS, EXPERIMENTAL IDEAS, OTHER PLANNED USE - Titles of the laboratories have changed to comply with the revised educational program. - - H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlL398 March 1998 199 Technology Education - VI. JUSTIFICATION FOR VARIANCE FROM ST ATE REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES (S.R.E.F) A Two of the four laboratories have Resource Rooms of 800 nsf each. These Resource Rooms are to be shared spaces with the remaining two labs B The total nsf of the laboratories have not changed from the DOE. approved EducatiOnal Specifications Many of the related spaces have been deleted, increased or decreased due to the unique technology curriculum requirements VII. PROGRAM FACILITIES LIST I Description of Areas I Square Feet Total I TECHNOWGY EDUCATION Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory 2,280 Material Storage 395 Subtotal 2,675 Communication Technology Laboratory 3,240 Material Storage 395 Project Storage 310 Technology Resource Center 800 Subtotal 4,745 Principles of Construction Technology Laboratory 3,240 Material Storage 395 Project Storage 310 Technology Resource Room -800 Subtotal 4,745 Engineering Technology Laboratory 3,240 Material Storage 395 Project Storage 310 Tool Storage ~ Subtotal 4,255 TOTAL 16.420 H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 M1rr-h tQQ!! 200 Technology Education - VIII. PROGRAM FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT - A. Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory 1 Teacher demonstratiOn table, 96" x 30" x 36", with 1 ~" laminate top, double- - door base umt WIth two adjustable shelves, 5-drawer base unit, modesty panel, master keyed cyhnder locks and pulls - 2 Teacher chaIr, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" w x 37lh" d x 37" h, solid maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow print drawer, with dust cover - - 4 Parallel straightedge, 48," mobile, with mounting hardware and instructions 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless - 6 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 26lh" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers - 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 26th" d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers - 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves - 9 Drafting table (26), 32" x 42", individual, drafting surface at a fixed 70 angle with locking storage for CAD equipment and monitor extension arm; new design combines both traditional drafting and computer assisted drafting in one unit; two are to be specially designed to adjust for wheelchair bound students; overall dlffiensions, 42" w x 39" d x 30" h, (at front) - - 10 Student chair (26), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless - 11 Straight edge (26),42", parallel-ruling, aluminum 12 Drafting machine (6), 32" x 40", track-type, c-mount clamping, stainless alloy beams - 13 Drafting machine, 32" x 40", track-type, c-mount clamping, stainless alloy beams, left-handed - 14 Scale (7), 12", with universal chuck, for drafting machines, (P-ll) - 15 Scale (7), 12", with universal chuck, for drafting machines, (P-35) - 16 Scale (7), 8", with universal chuck, for draftmg machmes, (P-ll) - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I11.398 March 1998 201 Technology Education - 17 Scale (7), 18", with universal chuck, for drafting machmes, (P-35) 18 Drafting machine, 4' x 16', marker board, hinged protractor 19 CAD computer (26), IBM compatible, 80486DX2 processor, 8 MB RAM, 120 MB hard drive, 144MB 31h fI mternal floppy disk drive, mouse port, senal port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS- DOS/BASIc (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3 5A 20 Computer, teacher station, mM compatible, 80486DX2 processor, 8 MB RAM, 340 MB hard drive, 12MB 5 IA" internal floppy disk drive, 144MB 31h" floppy disk drive, internal CD-ROM drive, mouse port, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS-DOSIBASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works, (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3 5A Provision for networking the above computers must be made. 21 Power-switching system (27), with surge suppression, 115V 22 Digitizing tablet (4), with four-button cursor, pen stylus, cables, and software drivers 23 AutoCAD (27) (latest version), CAD software, with Autoshade (including on- site training) 24 AutoCAD (4), architectural application software program 25 AutoCAD (4), mechanical application software program 26 Autosketch enhanced software (27), latest version 27 Light table (2), 24" x 28", floor model, 115V, lA 28 Pedestal stool (2), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for light table seating 29 White printer, 55" w x 36" d, non-ammonia type, with paper storage stand and cabinet, 115V, 9A 30 Plotter, 36" w x 12" d x 38 It h, architectural and engineering, multi-pen, with stand, buffer, and plotter cable, must be able to serve as a stand along plot station, paper sizes A, B, c, D, 115V, lA 31 Copier, with stand, 115V, 12A H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlL398 March 1998 202 Technology Education - 32 Laser printer, HP Laser Jet 4 or compatible, 2 MB RAM, 12' shielded printer cable, 115V, 6 5A ยท 33 Dot Matrix printer, 24-pin, wIde carnage, WIth printer cable, 115V, 2A - 34 Mobile printer, stand 35 TelevIsIon, 27" color, WIth cart, 115V, 2A - 36 VCR, 4-head, 115V, 5A - 37 Video encoder to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV - 38 Electric pencil sharpener (2), draftsman type, 115V, 1.25A 39 Drawing storage system flat file (2), 46*" W x 35%" d, steel, consisting of - two, five-drawer units and a closed base, for a total of ten drawers, each, B. Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory Material Storage - 1 Shelving (10), 36" w x 24" d, full height . c. Communication Technology Laboratory - 1 Teacher demonstration table, 96" x 30" x 36", with 1 %" laminate top, double- door base unit with two adjustable shelves, five-drawer base unit, modesty panel, master keyed cylinder locks and pulls - 2 Teacher chair, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless - 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" w x 371h" d x 37" h, solid maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow sprint drawer, with dust cover . 4 Parallel straightedge, 48," mobile, with mounting hardware and instructions 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless - 6 Filing cabinet (2), 36" w x 19" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers . 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 26th" d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable with hangers - 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves - 9 Work station (3), 15' x 15', synergistic-type quad, eight students each - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 203 Technology Education - 10 Student chair (24), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for work stations 11 Light table (3), 42" x 62" top, floor model, (must meet District specification for leg stretcher supportmg 200 lbs ), 115V, 2A 12 Pedestal stool (12), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for hght table seating 13 Computer (4), ffiM compatible, 80486SX processor, 8 MB RAM, 120 MB hard drive, 144MB 3th" internal floppy disk drive, internal CD ROM drive, mouse port, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS-DOS/BASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3 5A 14 Computer (5), MacIntosh, Quadra CPU, 8 MB RAM, 230 MB hard disk drive, 144MB 31h" internal floppy disk drive, internal CD ROM drive, Extended Keyboard n, 14" MacIntosh Color Display (3), 21" MacIntosh Color Display (2), mouse, delivery and setup, 115V, 3 SA NOTE. Two computer systems may be substituted with computer systems of equal configuration at the instructor's request; must include software changes also 15 Computer, teacher station, ffiM compatible, 80486DX2 processor, 66 MHz, 8 MB RAM, 340 MB hard drive, 1.2 MB 5~" internal floppy disk drive, 144 MB 31h" internal floppy disk drive, internal CD ROM drive, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, 9600 bps with MNP error correction modem, mouse, MS-DOS/BASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, Laser Master Series n Printer Controller - provides professional quality print capability for one laser printer, 115V,3.5A OR Equivalent MacIntosh computer Provision for net-working the above computers must be made 16 Power-switching system (11), with surge suppression, 115V 17 Laser printer, HP Laser Jet 4M or compatible, 2 MB RAM, with shielded printer cables to connect to IBM (one printer must have access to the printer video port), 115V, 6 5A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 "-,,"~r,..h 1QQR 204 Technology Education - 18 Laser printer, color, with cables to connect to Macintosh computers, 115V, 65A - 19 Scanner, color, full page, table top, WIth OCR editing software, 115V, 75A 20 Word Perfect word processing software (11), latest version, wmdows compatible - 21 Font software (11), for Word Perfect - 22 Font software (11), for Windows software 23 Pagemaker Desktop Publishmg software (11), for IBM and Macintosh - 24 Font software (11), for Pagemaker - 25 Corel Draw software (11), for lliM and MacIntosh - 26 Video production and editing package (2 stations), total Items to include: S- VHS camcorder (2), super VHS video cassette recorder (4), with editing functiOns, monitor (4); editing controller (2), power switching panel (2), 115V, 35A - 27 Computer, video/editing station, lliM or compatible, 8 MB RAM, 80486SX processor, 230 MB hard drive, 144MB 3%" internal floppy disk drive, internal CD ROM drive, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS-DOSIBASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Willow graphics board with Genlock~ delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3.5A - - - 28 Video digitizer, 24 - bit video frame grabber, with software 29 Paper drill, counter top model, 18" x 18," 115V, 5 SA - 30 Paper jogger, counter top model, 20" w x 14" d, 115V,2A - 31 Printer, xerographic process, high speed, production, digital input, single phase, 115V,30A - 32 Paper cutter, 251h" electric, including stand, 40" w x 50," 2 HP three-phase motor, 230V, llA - 33 Photo-polymer exposure unit, counter top model for rubber stamp making, with supply package, 115V, 2A - 34 Stapler, counter top model, heavy duty, electric, with saddle and flat attachments, 115V, lA - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 205 Technology Education - 35 Paper folder, 40" w x 18" d, counter top model, with slitting, scoring, and perforating capabilities, 115V, 3 6A 36 Collator, 12-page, 22" w x 15" d x 15" h, counter top model, 115V, 3A 37 Adding machine, WIth tape, 115V, 2A 38 Pencil sharpener, electric, 115V, 1 25A 39 Eight-student work center, top to be constructed of 21A" laminated hard maple, center section 56" x 56" with diagonal corner cut-outs, four wings, each 30" x 32,' Base: four single door units with spring-loaded hinges and cylinder locks, four-drawer unit (4), with chrome handles and cylinder locks, overall dimensions 10' x 10' 40 Viewer (2), 36" w x 27" d x 48" h, 115V, 10A 41 Drying rack, 36" w x 26" d, 50 shelves 42. Refrigerator, 30" w x 28" d, with icemaker, 20 C.F or larger, top mount freezer, with lock on refrigerator section, 115V, 5A 43 Wax coater, counter top model, 12" roller, 115V, 6.5A 44 Silk screen printer, 96" diameter, carousel type, four color, work station (4), child and adult size shirt boards, stand, with sleeve, cap, and jacket printing attachments 45 Dryer, 72" I x 26" w x 59" h. textile, with legs, 20" w belt, infraredlconvec-tion heat, 6" diameter power exhaust, 230V, 15A 46 Laminating press, counter top model, with supplies, 181h" x 23" platen, 115V, 11.3A 47 Television, 27" color, with cart, 115V, 2A 48 VCR, four - head, 115V, .5A 49 Video encoder, to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV 50 Cabinet, 72" w x 30" d X 34" h, sliding door, steel base with double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock, 21A" maple top 51 Cabinet. 43" w x 18" d x 44" h, flammable liquid safety storage, 30-gallon capacity 52 Work bench (3), 72" w x 28" d x 34" h, steel, with shelf and stnnger H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\II1.398 March 1998 206 Technology Education . D Communication Technology Laboratory Material Storage 1 Shelvmg (18), open, 36" w x 24" d x 75" h . 2 Shelvmg (6), open, 36" w x 18" d x 75" h . E. Communication Technology Laboratory Darkroom 1 Process camera, 53" w x 64" h x 311h "d, vertical, with digItal controls, 220V, 20A - 2 Darkroom timer (3), 60-minute time range with buzzer, 115V, lA - 3 Diffusion transfer machine, counter top model, 18" autofeed, 115V, 2A - 4 Enlarger (3), 16" w x 25Y2" d x 51 ~" h, with color head, lens, filters and voltage stabilizer, 115V, 1.5A . 5 Printer dryer, 115V, 7 5A . 6 Camera (3), 35mm single lens reflex, with automatic and manual functions F Principles of Construction Technology Laboratory . 1 Teacher demonstration table, 96" x 30" x 36", with 1 ~" laminate top, double- door base unit with two adjustable shelves, five-drawer base unit, modesty panel, master keyed cylinder locks and pulls - - 2 Teacher chair, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" w x 37Y2 tt d x 37" h, solid maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow print drawer, with dust cover . 4 Parallel straightedge, 48, " mobile, with mounting hardware and instructions - 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless - 6 Filing cabinet, 36" w x 19" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable with hangers 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 26Ih"d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers - - 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves 9 Work station (3), 15' x 15', synergistic-type quad, eight students each - - H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 207 Technology Education - 10 Student chair (24), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for work stations 11 Cabinet (6), 72" w x 30" d X 34" h, sliding door, steel base with double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock, 2 ~" maple top 12 Workbench (2), 64" w x 54" d x 2~" h, four-station, base COnsISts of heavy gauge steel unit (2), each with sliding double doors and cylinder locks, top is constructed from hard rock maple, with four woodworking VIses 13 Tool storage cabinet, 62" w x 22" d x 84" h, general shop, with tools, constructed of hard maple framing with hardwood plywood panels, with master keyed locks, 14 Tool storage cabinet, 60" w x 22" d x 84" h, for portable power tools, two sections, each with five adjustable shelves, constructed of hard maple framing and hardwood plywood panels, with master keyed locks 15 Band saw, 14",25" w x 18" d, with enclosed stand, miter gauge and rip fence, wheel and blade guards, arbor and motor pulleys, V-belt, blade guides, wood cutting blade, magnetic control switch, * HP single phase motor, 230V, 7 A 16 Band saw, S," bench top mounted, with miter gauge, liS HP single phase motor, 115V, 2.5A 17 Scroll saw (2), 20, " bench-top mounted, tilting table, multi-speed, with blades and accessories, single phase motor, 115V, 2A 18 Power miter box saw, 10," compound cut, bench-top mounted, with 10" steel blade, clear view retractable blade guard, dust bag, electric blade, work supports, clamp and stock stop, 115V, 15A 19 Drill press, 14", 11" x 25" d, bench-top model, five spindle speeds, lh "chuck, lh HP single phase motor, 115V, lOA 20 Combination belt/disk sander, 30" w x 25" d x 56" h, 6" belt/12" disc, with tilting tables, 4lh" arbor pulley, V-belt, SO - grit garnet belt, 50 - grit garnet disc, stand, auto-set miter gauge, and dust control package, Ilh HP single phase motor, 230V, 10A 21 Combination belt/disc sander, 15" w x 24" d, 1" belt/S" disc, bench-top model, with miter gauge, %HP single phase motor, 115V, 10A 22 Buffer, 8," long shaft with pedestal, 1800 RPM, 3AHP single phase motor, 115/230V. 14/7 A H:\DA TA\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 208 Technology Education 23 Tool grinder, 7," with pedestal and lighted shIelds, water pot and tool tray, exhaust-type guards, two wheels, 7" xl" x 5fa" (one, 36 - grit and one, 60-grit), 3600 RPM, l/zHP single phase motor, 115/230V, 1O/5A 24 Utility vise (2), 5" jaw width, 5lh" opemng, with replaceable serrated steel jaws, built-in steel pipe jaws, swivel base 25 Circular saw, 7 'A," with combination saw blade and wrench, 115V, 13A 26 Jigsaw, vanable speed, 115V, 4A 27 Router, PhHP, with 'A" and lh" collets, collet wrenches, and base assembly, 115V, 8A 28 Drill, electric, reversible, variable speed, lh" chuck, 115V, 5.5A 29 Belt sander, with dust bag, 3" x 24" belt, vacuum dust removal system 115V, 10lhA 30 Sander, orbital pad, Va sheet, double insulated, 115V, 5A 31 Sander, orbital finish, 'A sheet, double insulated, 115V, 1 25A 32 Vacuum cleaner (3), 28 - gallon, with 6' x 2lh" hose, extension wands, and nozzle, 115V, 10A 33 Safety glass cabinet, with glasses 34 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) wood lathe, 50" w x 36" d, with base cabinet, 36" between centers, 6" wing, key operated power switch, Lexan safety shield, built-in dust collection, ffiM compatibility, CAD/CAM design software, 0-2500 RPM, lhHP single phase motor, 115V, 15A 35 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) metal lathe, bench-top model, lathe machinist kit, air chuck robotic interface, pneumatic lathe shield opening, CAD/CAM software, chess set software, 200-2000 RPM, IhHP single phase motor, 115V, 12A 36 Mobil service bench for CNC metal lathe, 42" W x 24"d x 28"h, 5'A" casters 37 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) wood router, with cabinet, Lexan safety shield, key operated switch, built-in dust collection, IBM compatibility, engraving package, CAD/CAM software, 1 ~ HP single phase motor, 115V, 15A H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\lII. 398 March 1998 209 Technology Education - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) milling machine, 24 "w x 22 "d, bench- top model, with Lexan safety shield, air vise robotIc mterface, milling machinist kit, quick change tooling, CAD/CAM software and documentation, IHP DC motor, 115V, 15A 39 Plastics technology module, containing" manual mjectiOn molding machine, rotational molding machine, vacuum former machme, supplies and instructional videos, each machine 115V, 15A each 40 Plastic strip heater, 23" I, bench-top use, 115V, 12A 41 Student table (6), 30" x 60, ff wood 42 Student chair (24), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for student tables 43 Laser printer, HP Laser let 4 or compatible, 2MB RAM, 12' shielded printer cable, 115V, 6.5A 44 Computer (12), one for each CNC machine, eight for off-line programming, IBM compatible, 80486DX2 processor, 8MB RAM, 120MB hard drive, 1 44MB 3th" internal floppy disk drive, mouse port, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS-DOSIBASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3 5A 45 Computer, teacher station, ffiM compatible, 80486DX2 processor, 8MB RAM, 340MB hard drive, 1.2MB 5 ~ " internal floppy disk drive, 1 44MB 31h" floppy disk drive, internal CD-ROM drive, mouse port, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS-DOS/BASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3.5A 46 Power-switching system (9), with surge suppression, 115V 47 CAM software program (6), for off-line programming 48 Computer security cabinet (4), with 3" casters, 37 ~" w x 24" d x 511h" h 49 Mobile Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) bench (2),36" x 72", steel, with controller mounting modules Types 1 and 2, keyboard/monitor mounting module, utilities distribution module, electrical power module, compressed air distribution module, quick release connector, and monitor multiplexer H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 210 Technology Education - 50 Robotic arm (3), with teach through nose software, including. curnculum and instructional packages, Vision System, linear conveyor, rotary table, linear slide base, experimenter table (2), end eff.eptor package, D C servo motor kit, - gravity feeder (2), pallet (4), infra-red sensor (2), integration manual (2), bar stock gripper adapter, Introduction to Robotics Cassette package #1, The Robots Role in Industry Video, Robotics in Inte2rated Manufacturin2 Video, student - instructional materials package, all cables necessary to connect robot arms to IBM compatible computers - 51 Laptop computer (3), IBM compatible, for robotics package, 80486SX processor, 4MB RAM, 120MB hard drive, 144MB 3lh" internal floppy disk drive, serial port, parallel port, internal modem, MS-DOS/BASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (la.test version), one-year warranty - - 52 Dot Matrix printer (2), 24-pin, with cables, 115V, 2A 53 Printer stand, mobile - 54 Television (4), one. 27" color, with cart; three. 13" color, 115V, 2A - 55 VCR (4), 4 - head, 115V, .5A 56 Video encoder, to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV - 57 Projection screen, 10' x 10', ceiling mounted, manually operated - 58 Aerodynamics technology module, with wind tunnel, accessories, instruc-tional videos, and curriculum material, 15V, 6A - 59 Rocketry and flight technology module, with supplies, instructional videos, and curriculum material - 60 Stock cart (2), steel,S' diameter casters, 24" w x 36" d x 32" h - 61 Oily waste can, 6 gallon G Principles of Construction Technology Laboratory Material Storage - 1 Storage rack (2),48" w x 34" d x 112" h, triangular type to store up to 14' of stock vertically, three shelves - 2 Storage cabinet (10), 35" w x 21" d x 78" b, steel construction, four adjustable shelves, lockable - 3 Parts storage cabinet, 36" w x 18" d x 78" h, steel, lockable, with 176 drawers - - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 211 Technology Education - H. Engineering Technology Laboratory 1 Teacher demonstration table, 96" x 30" x 36", with 1 ~" laminate top, double- door base unit with two adjustable shelves, five-drawer base unit, modesty panel, master keyed cylinder locks and pulls, 2 Teacher chair, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 3 Drafting table, teacher's, 48" w x 37th" d x 37" h, solid maple legs, full tilting top, tool drawer with lock, shallow pnnt drawer, with dust cover 4 Parallel straightedge, 48," mobile, with mounting hardware and instructions 5 Teacher drafting stool, pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless 6 Filing cabinet, 36" w x 19" d, four-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with hangers 7 Filing cabinet, 18" w x 26th" d, two-drawer, legal, lateral, lockable, with and hangers 8 Magazine rack, 42" w x 18" d x 60" h, steel, eight shelves 9 Work station (3th), IS' xIS', synergistic-type quad, eight students, each 10 Student chair (28), pneumatic lift, non-tilt, caster base, armless, for work stations 11 Tool storage cabinet, 62" w x 22" d x 84" h, general shop, without tools, constructed of hard maple framing with hardwood plywood panels, with master keyed locks 12 Hand tools, assorted, including basic woodworking and mechanical tools 13 Cabinet, 72" w x 30" d x 34" h, sliding door, steel base with double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock 2 ~" maple top 14 Work bench (2), 64" w x 28" d x 2~" h, two-station, base consists of one heavy gauge steel unit, with double swinging doors and cylinder lock, top is constructed from hard rock maple, with one wood-working vise 15 Cabinet (2), 60" w x 30" d x 34" h, sliding door, steel base with double sliding doors, one adjustable shelf, cylinder lock, 2 ~ " maple top H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IlI.398 March 1998 212 Technology Education 16 Tool storage cabinet, 60" w x 22" d x 84" h, for portable power tools and robot arms, two sections, each with five adjustable shelves, constructed of hard maple framing and hardwood plywood panels, with master keyed locks 17 Computer (10), IBM compatible, 80486DX2 processor, 8MB RAM, 120MB hard drive, 144MB 31h" internal floppy disk drive, mouse port, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS- DOS/BASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3.5A 18 Computer, teacher station, IBM compatible, 80486DX2 processor, 8MB RAM, 340MB hard drive, 1 2MB 5 ~" internal floppy disk drive, 1 44MB 3lh II floppy disk drive, internal CD-ROM drive, mouse port, serial port, parallel port, enhanced keyboard, SVGA color monitor, mouse, MS-DOS/BASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), Microsoft Works (latest version), delivery and setup, one-year warranty, 115V, 3 5A 19 Power-switching system (11), with surge suppression, 115V 20 Laptop computer (4), IBM compatible, for robotics package, 80486DX processor, 4MB RAM, 120MB hard drive, 1 44MB 3lh II internal floppy disk drive, serial port, parallel port, internal modem, MS-DOSIBASIC (latest version), Microsoft Windows (latest version), one-year warranty 21 Computer security cabinet (2), 3 7 ~ "w x 24" d x 51lh II x h, with 3' casters 22 Laser printer, HP Laser Jet 4 or compatible, 2MB RAM, 12' shielded printer cable, 115V, 6.5A 23 Dot Matrix printer (2), 24-pin wide carriage, with cables, 115V, 2A 24 Printer stand (2), mobile 25 Robotic arm (3), advanced robotic arm with teach through nose software, including: curriculum and instructional packages, Vision System, linear conveyor, rotary table, linear slide base, two experimenter tables, end effector package, D C servo motor kit, gravity feeder (2), pallet (4), infra-red sensor (2), integration manual (2), bar stock gripper adapter, Introduction to Robotics Cassette package #1, The Robots Role in Industty Video, Robotics in Inte~ted Manufacturing Video, Student Instructional Materials package, all cables necessary to connect robot arms to IBM compatible computers 26 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) metal lathe, bench-top model, lathe machinist kit, air chuck robotic interface, pneumatic lathe shield opener, CAD/CAM software, chess set software, 200-2000 RPM, lhHP single phase motor, 115V, 12A H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 March 1998 213 Technology Education . . - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - - - 27 Mobile service bench, for CNC metal lathe, 5 ~" casters, 42" w x 24" d x 28" h 28 Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) milling machine, 24" w x 22" d bench- top model, with Lexan safety shield, air vise robotic mterface, milling machinist kIt, qUick-change tooling, CAD/CAM software and documentation" IHP DC motor, 115V, 15A 29 Mobile Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) bench (2), 36" x 72", steel, with controller mounting modules Type 1 and 2, keyboard/monitor mounting module, utilities distribution module, electrical power module, compressed air distribution module, quick release connector, and monitor multiplexer 30 Solar energy trainer, with cart, two collectors, control panel, and battery recharger, 47" w x 26" d x 48" h 31 Steam engine, 15" w x 10" d, table top, twin cylinder, slide valve type, reversible, electrically heated, water gauge, safety valve, whistle, 115V, 2A 32. Band saw, 8", bench-top mounted, with miter gauge, 1/5 HP single phase motor, 115V, 2.5A 33 Scroll saw, 20", bench-top mounted, tilting table, multi-speed, with blades and accessories, single phase motor, 115V, 2A 34 Drill press, 14", bench-top model, five spindle speeds, Ih" chuck, 11" w x 25" d, Ih HP single phase motor, 115V, 10A 35 Combination belt/disc sander, 1" be1tl8" disc, bench-top model, with miter gauge, IS" w x 24" d, 1fa HP single phase motor, 115V, lOA 36 Tool grinder, 6," bench-top model, with two-piece tool rests, exhaust-type guards, two wheels 6" x * " x Ih" (one, 36 - grit and one, 60 - grit), 1fa HP single phase motor, 115/230V, 10/5A 37 Utility vise, 5" jaw width, 5-lh" opening, with replaceable serrated steel jaws, built-in steel pipe jaws, swivel base 38 Vacuum cleaner (3), 28 - gallon, with 6' x 2-lh" hose, extension wands and nozzle, 115V, 10A 39 Drill, variable speed, reversing, 3/8" chuck, 115V, 4A 40 Bench (2), steel, open base, 72" w x 30" d 41 Safety glasses cabinet, with glasses H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIl.398 March 1998 214 Technology Education - 42 Television (4), one 27" color, with cart; three 13" color, 115V, 2A . 43 VCR (4), four - head, 115V, 5A 44 Video encoder, to connect a computer's video card to a VCR and TV . 45 Projection screen, 10' x 10', ceihng mounted, manually operated - 46 Bio-technology module, advanced, with exercise bicycle, curriculum, software, video tapes, instructor notes and management system - 47 Laser module, 80" w x 21" d, advanced, with laser alignment grid, cabinet base, 8mW modulated helium neon laser, accessories and manuals, 115V, .SA - 48 Structural technology module, with structural tester (counter top model), videos, projects, software and manuals - 49 Electricity and electronics module, with trainer, tools, meters, leads and curriculum, 115V, 1A - 50 Transportation technology module, with trainer, electro-pak motor, tools, videos, curriculum and manuals - 51 Satellite communication technology module, with 85 meter dish, support system, rolling alignment platform, color television, 24 - channel satellite - receiver, videos and curriculum, 115V, 2.5A - 52 Hydraulics module, with lockable steel case, counter top, components, video, instructor notes and curriculum - 53 Pneumatics module, with lockable steel case, counter top, components, video, instructor notes and curriculwn - 54 Mechanisms module, with lockable steel case, counter top, components, video, instructor notes and curriculum - 55 Oily waste can, six gallon I. Engineering Technology Laboratory Material Storage - 1 Open, full-height shelving (11), 36" x 24" shelves - 2 Storage cabinet (6), 36" w x 21" d x 78" h, steel construction, four adjustable shelves, lockable - 3 Parts storage cabinet, 36" w x 18" d x 78" h, steel, lockable, with 176 drawers - H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\HI.398 March 1998 215 Technology Education - IX. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Heating/Cooling/Ventilation - All laboratories to be air-conditioned. Refer to the HV AC System Design Requirements for the SDPBC for specific requirements Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS B. Acoustical - Acoustical tile or sound absorbing matenals should be used where possible to reduce noise level. C EIoor - Resilient tile in all areas D IDUs - The entire facility to be painted with epoxy for ease of cleaning Concrete masonry, plaster or hard coat finish on gypsum board, paint finish. E. Ceiling - 12' in all laboratories except the Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory which will be standard height. F Lighting - Fluorescent. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS G Windows - Exterior windows in the laboratory should be above eye-level to avoid outside distractions and allow use of wall space Windows should be operable for ventilation. Maximum security must be provided at all exterior windows. Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS H. Doors - One, 6' double door in each laboratory to facilitate delivery of materials and sharing of equipment. One, 6' double door between the equipment storage room and the Principles of Construction Technology Laboratory, the equipment storage room and the Engineering Technology Laboratory, and the project storage room and the Communication Technology Laboratory Refer to GENERAL CON- SIDERA TIONS I. Watertplumbing Fixtures 1 Based on program furniture and equipment for each laboratory, provide (HW) and (CW) 2 Drafting and Design Laboratory. Provide developing sink with thermostatic water controls 3 Each Laboratory Provide gang, foot-operated wash-up sink (CW) Provide electric water cooler J. Communications - Provision for data, voice and video wiring in all laboratories Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS K. Electrical - Appropriate wiring for all laboratory equipment. Refer to GENEAL CONSIDERATIONS H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\I1I.398 M~r("" 1 QQR 216 Technology Education . L. Gas and Air - Based on program furmture and eqUipment for each laboratory, provide gas and compressed air . M. Safety - Panic buttons (kill switches) for Instant disconnection of all equipment should be installed on two walls in appropriate laboratories A keyed reset sWitch to be installed in conjunction with one of the panic buttons in each laboratory Adequate fire extinguishers of proper size must be provided in each laboratory (Note All computer circuits to be isolated and controlled by a keyed switch.) Refer to GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS . . . N Fencing - N/A o Service Drives - N/A - P Parking - N/A - Q Built-ins 1. Built-in Work/Storage - a. Drafting and Design Technology Laboratory . (1) Counter, 25', cabinets below and above, lockable - b. Communication Technology Laboratory (1) Counter, 60', cabinets below and above, lockable - (2) Counter, with cabinets below and above as appropriate in darkroom, lockable - (3) Work station (3), eight-student quad type, to DIstrict specifications . c. Principles of Construction Technology Laboratory (1) Counter, 30', 1-*" thick, hard maple top, with cabinets below and above, lockable . (2) Work station (3), eight-student quad type, to District specifications - d. Engineering Technology Laboratory - (1) Counter, 30', 1-* 11 thick, hard maple top, with cabinets below and above, lockable - (2) Work station (3-1h), eight-student quad type, to District specifications - H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 217 Technology Education - 2 Built-in Instructional Aids a. Laboratories (1) Marker board, minimum 16' (2) A V screen (3) Tack board, mimmum 12' 3. Other Built-ins a. Air compressor, central system, located away from laboratories R. Other Considerations 1 Noise control between laboratories and within laboratory areas 2. Visual availability and supervision should be considered in planning all areas of the laboratories for the purpose of providing the instructor visual contact with students at all times and in all areas 3 Air compressor system located outside and away from laboratories. H:\DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 218 Technology Education . SP A TIAL RELATIONSHIPS . Technology Education Drafting and Design Laboratory H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\IIL398 March 1998 . . - . . - . . - - . - - - - . Technology Education . ore apacltv , I I Student I Net Assign I Facility Area Stations Sq. Ft. (NASF) Administrative/Student Service 11,467 Art 90 6,815 Auditorium 13,439 Computer Education 60 2,300 Custodial 3,258 Driver Education 30 900 Exceptional Student Education 147 15,839 Food Service 22,564 Foreign Language 120 3,820 General Classroom 900 27.200 Language Arts 240 7,940 Mathematics 180 5.730 Media Center 19,443 Music 78 6.766 Physical Education 160 28.662 Resourse Rooms 5,700 Restrooms 5,265 R.OTC. 25 1,580 Science 168 11.553 Social Studies 180 5,730 Student Storage 1,250 Vocational 264 32,706 (Business Bducation. Distributive Educalion. HeallhlFamily L1viDc. Home Ecooomia. Tcchaology E4uc:ati0n) Total Student Stations 2,642 Subtotal Net Sq. Ft. 239,927 Mechanical @ 6 % 14.396 Total Net Sq. Ft. 254,323 Circulation, Wall, etc. @ 34% 86 470 Total Gross Sq Ft. 340,793 FAC[LrrYSPACES~ARY High School "ill" Grade 9-12 Student Capacity 2,509 Student Stations 2,642 C C . 2507 APPENDIX B H. \DA T A \ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\1II.398 March 1998 219 Facility Space Summary . ore aoacltv 2,5 Student Net Assign Facilitv Area Stations Sq. Ft. (NASF) Administrative/Student Service 11,467 Art 90 6,815 Auditorium 13,439 Computer Education 60 2,300 Custodial 3,258 Driver Education 30 900 Exceptional Student Education 147 15,839 Food Service 22,564 Foreign Language 120 3,820 General Classroom 900 27.200 Language Arts 240 7,940 Mathematics 180 5,730 Media Center 19,443 Music 78 6,766 Physical Education 160 28,662 Resourse Rooms 5,700 Restrooms 5,265 R.OTC. 25 1,580 Science 168 11 ,553 Social Studies 180 5,730 Student Storage 1,250 Vocational 264 32,706 (Business Education. Distributive Education. HcalthlFamily Living, Home Economics, Technology Education) Total Student Stations 2,642 Subtotal Net Sq Ft. 239,927 Mechanical @ 6 % 14.396 Total Net Sq Ft. 254,323 Circulation, Wall, etc. @ 34% 86.470 Total Gross Sq. Ft. 340,793 FACILITY SPACE SUMMARY High School "III" Grade 9-12 Student Capacity 2,509 Student Stations 2,642 C C 07 APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - - - H:\DA T A\ARC\MEMOS\EDSPECS\HS\III.398 March 1998 219 Facility Space Summary -